VigorIPPBX 2820 - Router Draytek - Free user manual and instructions

USER MANUAL VigorIPPBX 2820 Draytek

VigorIPPBX 2820 Series

DrayTek

Your reliable networking solutions partner

User's Guide

V2.6

VigorIPPBX 2820 Series User's Guide

Version: 2.6

Based on Firmware Version: V3.5.5

Date: 21/03/2011

Copyright Information

Copyright Declarations

Copyright 2011 All rights reserved. This publication contains information that is protected by copyright. No part may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language without written permission from the copyright holders.

Trademarks

The following trademarks are used in this document:

● Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corp.
● Windows, Windows 95, 98, Me, NT, 2000, XP, Vista and Explorer are trademarks of Microsoft Corp.
● Apple and Mac OS are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.
● Other products may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturers.

Safety Instructions and Approval

Safety Instructions

● Read the installation guide thoroughly before you set up the router.
- The router is a complicated electronic unit that may be repaired only be authorized and qualified personnel. Do not try to open or repair the router yourself.
● Do not place the router in a damp or humid place, e.g. a bathroom.
● The router should be used in a sheltered area, within a temperature range of +5 to +40 Celsius.
- Do not expose the router to direct sunlight or other heat sources. The housing and electronic components may be damaged by direct sunlight or heat sources.
- Do not deploy the cable for LAN connection outdoor to prevent electronic shock hazards.
- Keep the package out of reach of children.
- When you want to dispose of the router, please follow local regulations on conservation of the environment.

Warranty

We warrant to the original end user (purchaser) that the router will be free from any defects in workmanship or materials for a period of two (2) years from the date of purchase from the dealer. Please keep your purchase receipt in a safe place as it serves as proof of date of purchase. During the warranty period, and upon proof of purchase, should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and/or materials, we will, at our discretion, repair or replace the defective products or components, without charge for either parts or labor, to whatever extent we deem necessary tore-store the product to proper operating condition. Any replacement will consist of a new or re-manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal value, and will be offered solely at our discretion. This warranty will not apply if the product is modified, misused, tampered with, damaged by an act of God, or subjected to abnormal working conditions. The warranty does not cover the bundled or licensed software of other vendors. Defects which do not significantly affect the usability of the product will not be covered by the warranty. We reserve the right to revise the manual and online documentation and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation to notify any person of such revision or changes.

Be a Registered Owner

Web registration is preferred. You can register your Vigor router via http://www.draytek.com.

Firmware & Tools Updates

Due to the continuous evolution of DrayTek technology, all routers will be regularly upgraded. Please consult the DrayTek web site for more information on newest firmware, tools and documents.

http://www.draytek.com

European Community Declarations

Manufacturer: DrayTek Corp.

Address: No. 26, Fu Shing Road, HuKou Township, HsinChu Industrial Park, Hsin-Chu County, Taiwan 303

Product: VigorIPPBX 2820

DrayTek Corp. declares that VigorIPPBX 2820 of routers are in compliance with the following essential requirements and other relevant provisions of R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EEC.

The product conforms to the requirements of Electro-Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive 2004/108/EC by complying with the requirements set forth in EN55022/Class B and EN55024/Class B.

The product conforms to the requirements of Low Voltage (LVD) Directive 2006/95/EC by complying with the requirements set forth in EN60950-1.

Regulatory Information

Federal Communication Commission Interference Statement

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:

● Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device may accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Please visit http://www.draytek.com/user/AboutRegulatory.php.

This product is designed for DSL, ISDN, and POTS network throughout the EC region and Switzerland with restrictions in France. Please see the user manual for the applicable networks on your product.

Table of Contents

Chapter 1: Preface ....1

1.1 Web Configuration Buttons Explanation .... 1
1.2 LED Indicators and Connectors 2
1.2.1 For VigorIPPBX 2820 .... 3
1.2.2 For VigorIPPBX 2820n 5
1.3 Hardware Installation 7
1.4 ISDN Phone Adapter Installation 8
1.5 Printer Installation 9

Chapter 2: Configuring Basic Settings....15

2.1 Changing Password 15
2.2 Quick Start Wizard 17
2.2.1 PPPoE/PPPoA.... 18
2.2.2 1483 Bridged IP 20
2.2.3 1483 Routed IP 21
2.3 IPPBX Wizard 22
2.3.1 Extension & Group Setup 22
2.3.2 SIP Trunk Setup 24
2.3.3 Office Hours Setup 25
2.4 Service Activation Wizard.... 27
2.5 Online Status.... 30
2.6 Saving Configuration.... 33

Chapter 3: Applications....35

3.1 The Registration of 50 IP-based Telephone/Extensions 35
3.2 The IP Registration from Remote Site (through WAN Connection) 36
3.3 The Integration IP Registration with SIP Server 37
3.4 The Integration VoIP Communications via SIP Server 38
3.5 The Integration with PSTN telephony 39
3.6 The Added ISDN Telephony 40
3.7 The Integrated ISDN line.... 41
3.8 The 4 B Channels of Two ISDN Lines 42
3.9 The Integration of ISDN PBX with One ISDN Line 43
3.10 The Integration of ISDN PBX with One ISDN Line-2 44
3.11 The Deployment of ISDN PBX and PSTN Network 45
3.12 The Integration of ISDN Telephony and PSTN Network 46
3.13 The Integration of ISDN Telephony, PSTN Network and VoIP Connection 47

Chapter 4: Tutorial ....49

4.1 Create a LAN-to-LAN Connection Between Remote Office and Headquarter 49

4.2 Create a Remote Dial-in User Connection Between the Teleworker and Headquarter...... 57

4.3 QoS Setting Example....61

4.4 LAN – Created by Using NAT 65

4.5 Upgrade Firmware for Your Router 67

4.6 Request a certificate from a CA server on Windows CA Server 70

4.7 Request a CA Certificate and Set as Trusted on Windows CA Server 74

4.8 How to achieve DID (Direct Inward Dialing) with SIP Alias? 76

4.9 How to use Call Parking? 80

4.10 How to set up VigorPhone 350 with Vigor/PPBX2820 series by using Auto-Provisioning? 82

4.11 How to configure Hunt Group? 87

4.12 How to use Auto Attendant? 91

4.13 How to use Voice Mail? 97

4.14 How to configure and use the MWI on Vigor/PPBX 2820?...... 103

4.15 How to register extensions to Vigor/PPBX 2820? 106

4.16 How to configure and use ISDN-S0 MSN on Vigor/PPBX 2820....112

4.17 Creating an Account for MyVigor ....115

4.17.1 Creating an Account via Vigor Router 115

4.17.2 Creating an Account via MyVigor Web Site.... 118

4.18 How to use mOTP feature through the router and iPhone 121

4.19 How to use call pickup via IPPBX router.... 126

4.20 How to Configure Hunt Group in VigorIPPBX Series 128

4.21 How to make a phone call for extensions in different IPPBX routers 130

4.22 How to enhance the security for extensions' registration 134

Chapter 5: Reference - Advanced Web Configuration....137

5.1 WAN 137

5.1.1 Basics of Internet Protocol (IP) Network.... 137

5.1.2 Network Connection by 3G USB Modem 138

5.1.3 General Setup.... 138

5.1.4 Internet Access.... 141

5.1.5 Multi-PVCs.... 157

5.1.6 Load-Balance Policy 162

5.2 LAN 164

5.2.1 Basics of LAN 164

5.2.2 General Setup.... 166

5.2.3 Static Route 169

5.2.4 VLAN....172

5.2.5 Bind IP to MAC 173

5.3 NAT 174

5.3.1 Port Redirection.... 175

5.3.2 DMZ Host....178

5.3.3 Open Ports 180

5.3.4 Address Mapping....182

5.3.5 Port Trigger 183

5.4 Firewall.... 185

5.4.1 Basics for Firewall.... 185
5.4.2 General Setup.... 187
5.4.3 Filter Setup 189
5.4.4 DoS Defense 196

5.5 Objects Settings....199

5.5.1 IP Object 199
5.5.2 IP Group 201
5.5.3 Service Type Object 202
5.5.4 Service Type Group 203
5.5.5 Keyword Object 204
5.5.6 Keyword Group....205
5.5.7 File Extension Object....206

5.6 CSM 208

5.6.1 APP Enforcement Profile 209
5.6.2 URL Content Filter Profile 212
5.6.3 Web Content Filter Profile....216

5.7 Bandwidth Management 220

5.7.1 Sessions Limit.... 220
5.7.2 Bandwidth Limit 221
5.7.3 Quality of Service.... 222

5.8 Applications 229

5.8.1 Dynamic DNS 229
5.8.2 Schedule 231
5.8.3 RADIUS 233
5.8.4 UPnP 234
5.8.5 IGMP 236
5.8.6 Wake on LAN 237

5.9 VPN and Remote Access.... 238

5.9.1 Remote Access Control 238
5.9.2 PPP General Setup 239
5.9.3 IPSec General Setup 240
5.9.4 IPSec Peer Identity 241
5.9.5 Remote Dial-in User 243
5.9.6 LAN to LAN 247
5.9.7 Connection Management.... 256

5.10 Certificate Management....257

5.10.1 Local Certificate 257
5.10.2 Trusted CA Certificate 259
5.10.3 Certificate Backup.... 260

5.11 ISDN 260

5.11.1 Basic Concept....260
5.11.2 General Setup.... 261
5.11.3 Dial to Single ISP 264
5.11.4 Dial to Dual ISPs.... 265
5.11.5 Call Control 267

5.12 IP PBX.... 268

5.12.1 Extension 269
5.12.2 Line Setting.... 274
5.12.3 Dial Plan 281
5.12.4 PBX System.... 286

5.12.5 PBX Status 317

5.13 Wireless LAN 318

5.13.1 Basic Concepts.... 318

5.13.2 General Setup.... 320

5.13.3 Security 323

5.13.4 Access Control 325

5.13.5 WPS.... 326

5.13.6 WDS.... 328

5.13.7 Advanced Setting.... 331

5.13.8 AP Discovery 332

5.13.9 Station List 333

5.14 USB Application 334

5.14.1 USB General Settings.... 334

5.14.2 USB User Management 335

5.14.3 File Explorer.... 337

5.14.4 Disk Status.... 339

5.15 System Maintenance.... 340

5.15.1 System Status.... 340

5.15.2 TR-069 342

5.15.3 Administrator Password.... 343

5.15.4 Configuration Backup 343

5.15.5 Syslog/Mail Alert 345

5.15.6 Time and Date 347

5.15.7 Management....348

5.15.8 Reboot System 349

5.15.9 Firmware Upgrade 350

5.16 Diagnostics....352

5.16.1 Dial-out Trigger 353

5.16.2 Routing Table 353

5.16.3 ARP Cache Table 354

5.16.4 DHCP Table.... 354

5.16.5 NAT Sessions Table 355

5.16.6 Ping Diagnosis.... 355

5.16.7 Data Flow Monitor.... 356

5.16.8 Traffic Graph....358

5.16.9 Trace Route 358

Chapter 6: Trouble Shooting....361

6.1 Checking If the Hardware Status Is OK or Not 361

6.2 Checking If the Network Connection Settings on Your Computer Is OK or Not 362

6.3 Pinging the Router from Your Computer 364

6.4 Checking If the ISP Settings are OK or Not 366

6.5 Problems for 3G Network Connection .... 366

6.6 Backing to Factory Default Setting If Necessary 367

6.7 Contacting Your Dealer 368

Appendix: Hardware Specifications....369

VigorIPPBX 2820, an ADSL router with IPPBX feature, provides policy-based load-balance, fail-over and BOD (Bandwidth on Demand), also it integrates IP layer QoS, NAT session/bandwidth management to help users control works well with large bandwidth.

By adopting hardware-based VPN platform and hardware encryption of AES/DES/3DS, the router increases the performance of VPN greatly, and offers several protocols (such as IPSec/PPTP/L2TP) with up to 32 VPN tunnels.

The object-based design used in SPI (Stateful Packet Inspection) firewall allows users to set firewall policy with ease. CSM (Content Security Management) provides users control and management in IM (Instant Messenger) and P2P (Peer to Peer) more efficiency than before. By the way, DoS/DDoS prevention and URL/Web content filter strengthen the security outside and control inside.

VigorIPPBX 2820 can provide up to 50 extensions setup to let all registered IP phones in LAN or remote sites around the world to have unlimited free calls through Internet. Moreover, VigorIPPBX 2820 is able to establish multiple networking architectures corresponding to your current desire and future needs of growing communication. Its ISDN/PSTN compatibility lets you move from simple VoIP solution such as IP phone and Softphone to integrate with comprehensive networking infrastructure, such as ISDN and Analog phone line any time you need.

Object-based firewall is flexible and allows your network be safe. In addition, through VoIP function, the communication fee for you and remote people can be reduced.

1.1 Web Configuration Buttons Explanation

Several main buttons appeared on the web pages are defined as the following:

OK	Save and apply current settings.
Cancel	Cancel current settings and recover to the previous saved settings.
Clear	Clear all the selections and parameters settings, including selection from drop-down list. All the values must be reset with factory default settings.
Add	Add new settings for specified item.
Edit	Edit the settings for the selected item.
Delete	Delete the selected item with the corresponding settings.

Note: For the other buttons shown on the web pages, please refer to Chapter 4 for detailed explanation.

1.2 LED Indicators and Connectors

Before you use the Vigor router, please get acquainted with the LED indicators and connectors first.

The displays of LED indicators and connectors for the routers are different slightly. The following sections will introduce them respectively. If the model of router you have does not support ISDN and/or VoIP function, simply ignore the relational description.

Definitions for ISDN Ports

Below shows the names that displayed on front panel of the device and the WEB UI of this device.

Both ISDN1 and ISDN2 port on front panel of the device are configurable for connecting phone or accessing Internet according to the settings that you adjust on WEB UI.

ISDN1-TE /ISDN2-TE (shown on WEB UI) is a port that used to connect ISDN line.

ISDN1-S0/ISDN2-S0 (shown on WEB UI) is a port that used to connect ISDN phone.

Please refer to IP PBX>>PBX System>>Phone Settings in this User's Guide for detailed information.

Warning: When the orange LED lights (means ISDN NT mode), the ISDN port can be used to connect phone only. Wrong ISDN connection might cause severe damage on your device.

1.2.1 For VigorIPPBX 2820

DrayTek VIGOR/PPBX 2820 Factory Reset ACT VPN Line USB DSL Phone CSM WAN2 QoS ISDN1 ISDN2 Phone Line 1(Giga) 2 3 4 LAN DSL WAN2 USB

LED		Status	Explanation
ACT (Activity)		Blinking	The router is powered on and running normally.
		Off The router is powered off.
		On A USB device is connected and active. USB
		Blinking The data is transmitting.
CSM On The profile of CSM		(Content Security Management) for IM/P2P application is enabled from Firewall >> General Setup. (Such profile is established under CSM menu).
VPN On VPN tunnel is up and down.
DSL		On	The router is ready to access Internet through DSL link.
		Blinking Slowly: The modem is ready. Quickly: The connection is training.
		On The WAN2 connection is ready. WAN 2
		Blinking It will blink while transmitting data.
Line		On A PSTN phone call comes (in and out). However, when the phone call is disconnected, the LED will be off about six seconds later.
		Off There is no PSTN phone call.
Phone		On The phone connected to this port is off-hook.
		Off The phone connected to this port is on-hook.
		Blinking A phone call comes.
QoS On The QoS function is active.
LED on Connector
ISDN1/2	Left LED (Orange)	On ISDN-S0 (ISDN-NT) mode is active configured from IP PBX>>PBX System>>Phone Settings and an ISDN phone adapter is connected.
		Blinking ISDN S0 (ISDN-NT) mode configured from IP PBX>>PBX System>>Phone Settings is active and an ISDN phone adapter is not connected.
		Off It means ISDN TE mode is active which is configured from IP PBX>>PBX System>>Phone Settings.
	Right LED (Green)	On A phone adapter with phone set has been connected (ISDN-S0) or ISDN line has been connected (ISDN-TE).
		Blinking ISDN-S0 (ISDN-NT) mode, it means an ISDN phone is off-hook or a phone call comes. In ISDN-TE mode, it means data, fax or voice (phone call) is transmitting.
		Off It will be off if there is nothing connected.
LAN 1(Giga)	Left LED (Green)	On The port is connected.
		Off The port is disconnected.
		Blinking The data is transmitting.
	Right LED (Green)	On The port is connected with 1000Mbps.
		Off The port is connected with 10/100Mbps.
LAN 2/3/4	Left LED(Green)	On The port is connected.
		Off The port is disconnected.
		Blinking The data is transmitting.
	Right LED(Green)	On The port is connected with 100Mbps.
		Off The port is connected with 10Mbps.
WAN 2	Left LED(Green)	On The port is connected.
		Off The port is disconnected.
		Blinking The data is transmitting.
	Right LED(Green)	On The port is connected with 100Mbps.
		Off The port is connected with 10Mbps.

Factory Reset ISDN1 ISDN2 Phone Line 1(Giga) 2 3 4 +LAN DSL WAN2 PWR ON OFF

Interface Description

Factory Reset Restore the default settings.
	Usage: Turn on the router (ACT LED is blinking). Press the hole and keep for more than 5 seconds. When you see the ACT LED begins to blink rapidly than usual, release the button. Then the router will restart with the factory default configuration.
ISDN1/2 Connector for ISDN line or ISDN phone adapter in particular condition.Refer to section 2.2 for more details.
Phone Connector for PSTN phone.
Line Connector for PSTN life line.
LAN (1-4) Connecters for local networked devices.
DSL Connector for accessing the Internet through ADSL2/2+.
WAN 2 Connector for remote networked devices.
USB Connector for a USB device (for 3G USB Modem or printer).
PWR	Connector for a power adapter.
ON/OFF	Power Switch.

1.2.2 For VigorIPPBX 2820n

DrayTek Vigor/PPBX 2820n Wireless LAN ON/OFF/WPS ACT WLAN Line USB DSL Phone Factory Reset CSM WAN2 QoS ISDN1 ISDN2 Phone Line 1(Giga) 2 3 4 *LAN DSL WAN2 USB

LED		Status	Explanation
ACT (Activity)		Blinking	The router is powered on and running normally.
		Off The router is powered off.
		On A USB device is connected and active. USB
		Blinking The data is transmitting.
CSM On The profile of CSM		(Content Security Management) for IM/P2P application is enabled from Firewall >> General Setup. (Such profile is established under CSM menu).
WLAN		On	Wireless access point is ready.
		Blinking	It will blink while wireless traffic goes through. If ACT and WLAN LEDs blink simultaneously when WPS is working, and it will return to normal condition after two minutes. (You need to setup WPS within 2 minutes.)
DSL		On	The router is ready to access Internet through DSL link.
		Blinking Slowly: The modem is ready. Quickly: The connection is training.
		On The WAN2 connection is ready. WAN 2
		Blinking It will blink while transmitting data.
Line		On A PSTN phone call comes (in and out). However, when the phone call is disconnected, the LED will be off about six seconds later.
		Off There is no PSTN phone call.
Phone		On The phone connected to this port is off-hook.
		Off The phone connected to this port is on-hook.
		Blinking A phone call comes.
QoS On The QoS function is active.
LED on Connector
ISDN1/2	Left LED (Orange)	On ISDN-S0 (ISDN-NT) mode is active configured from IP PBX>>PBX System>>Phone Settings and an ISDN phone adapter is connected.
		Blinking ISDN S0 (ISDN-NT) mode configured from IP PBX>>PBX System>>Phone Settings is active and an ISDN phone adapter is not connected.
		Off It means ISDN TE mode is active which is configured from IP PBX>>PBX System>>Phone Settings.
	Right LED (Green)	On A phone adapter with phone set has been connected (ISDN-S0) or ISDN line has been connected (ISDN-TE).
		Blinking ISDN-S0 (ISDN-NT) mode, it means an ISDN phone is off-hook or a phone call comes. In ISDN-TE mode, it means data, fax or voice (phone call) is transmitting.
		Off It will be off if there is nothing connected.
LAN 1(Giga)	Left LED (Green)	On The port is connected.
		Off The port is disconnected.
		Blinking The data is transmitting.
	Right LED (Green)	On The port is connected with 1000Mbps.
		Off The port is connected with 10/100Mbps.
LAN 2/3/4	Left LED (Green)	On The port is connected.
		Off The port is disconnected.
		Blinking The data is transmitting.
	Right LED (Green)	On The port is connected with 100Mbps.
		Off The port is connected with 10Mbps.
WAN 2	Left LED (Green)	On The port is connected.
		Off The port is disconnected.
		Blinking The data is transmitting.
	Right LED (Green)	On The port is connected with 100Mbps.
		Off The port is connected with 10Mbps.

Factory Reset ISDN1 ISDN2 Phone Line 1(Giga) 2 3 4 + LAN DSL WAN2 PWR ON OFF

Interface Description
Factory Reset Restore the default settings.
	Usage: Turn on the router (ACT LED is blinking). Press the hole and keep for more than 5 seconds. When you see the ACT LED begins to blink rapidly than usual, release the button. Then the router will restart with the factory default configuration.
ISDN1/2 Connector for ISDN line or ISDN phone adapter in particular condition.Refer to section 2.2 for more details.
Phone Connector for PSTN phone.
Line Connector for PSTN life line.
LAN (1-4) Connecters for local networked devices.
DSL Connector for accessing the Internet through ADSL2/2+.
WAN 2 Connector for remote networked devices.
USB Connector for a USB device (for 3G USB Modem or printer).
PWR	Connector for a power adapter.
ON/OFF	Power Switch.

1.3 Hardware Installation

Before starting to configure the router, you have to connect your devices correctly.

1. Connect the ADSL interface to the external ADSL splitter with an ADSL line cable. Also, connect Line interface to an external ADSL splitter.

LINE PHONE MODEM Line DSL

For second WAN, connect the cable Modem/DSL Modem/Media Converter to WAN2 port of router with Ethernet cable (RJ-45).

1. Connect one end of an Ethernet cable (RJ-45) to one of the LAN ports of the router and the other end of the cable (RJ-45) into the Ethernet port on your computer.

Note: It is strongly recommended to connect to Ethernet port on your computer with a shielding cable provided with the router.

1. Connect the telephone sets with phone lines (for using VoIP function). For the model without phone ports, skip this step.
2. Connect one end of the power adapter to the router's power port on the rear panel, and the other side into a wall outlet.
3. Power on the device by pressing down the power switch on the rear panel.
4. The system starts to initiate. After completing the system test, the ACT LED will light up and start blinking.

(For the detailed information of LED status, please refer to section 1.2.)

graph TD
    A["Power Adapter"] --> B["Phone Line"]
    B --> C["Analog Phone"]
    C --> D["ADSL Splitter or (Microfilter)"]
    D --> E["Cable/DSL Modem or Media Converter"]
    E --> F["Internet ISP1 / ISP 2"]
    G["Power Switch"] --> H["LAN"]
    H --> I["LAN"]
    I --> J["4 + LAN"]
    J --> K["3"]
    K --> L["2"]
    L --> M["10Digital"]
    M --> N["3"]
    N --> O["4 + LAN"]
    O --> P["DSL"]
    P --> Q["3"]
    Q --> R["2"]
    R --> S["10Digital"]
    S --> T["2"]
    T --> U["10Digital"]
    U --> V["3"]
    V --> W["4 + LAN"]
    W --> X["DSL"]
    X --> Y["3"]
    Y --> Z["2"]
    Z --> AA["10Digital"]
    AA --> AB["2"]
    AB --> AC["10Digital"]
    AC --> AD["3"]
    AD --> AE["4 + LAN"]
    AE --> AF["DSL"]
    AF --> AG["3"]
    AG --> AH["2"]
    AH --> AI["10Digital"]
    AI --> AJ["2"]

Caution: Each of the Phone ports can be connected to an analog phone only. Do not connect the phone ports to the telephone wall jack. Such connection might damage your router.

1.4 ISDN Phone Adapter Installation

ISDN1/2 port is configurable as NT or TE mode. When the user configures ISDN port as NT mode in IP PBX>>PBX System>>Phone Settings, the orange LED will light on to indicate ISDN-NT is selected. And by using ISDN phone adapters (coming from the router package), the user can connect several phones to the router for communication. Refer to the following figure for reference.

graph TD
    A["ISDN Phone"] --> B["ISDN Phone Adapter"]
    C["Analog Phone"] --> D["DrayTek DRayTek"]
    B --> E["ISDN1"]
    B --> F["ISDN2"]
    D --> G["Phone Line"]
    D --> H["ISDN Phone Adapter"]
    H --> I["ISDN Phone"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

Yet, if the user configures ISDN port as TE Mode in IP PBX>>PBX System>>Phone Settings, the green LED will light on to indicate ISDN-TE is selected. Then, the port is specified for ISDN line only. Refer to the following figure for reference.

graph TD
    A["ISDN Phone"] --> B["ISDN Phone Adapter"]
    C["Analog Phone"] --> D["Phone Line"]
    B --> E["DrayTek"]
    D --> E
    E --> F["VIGOR/IPPBX 2820"]
    F --> G["NT1/1+"]
    G --> H["ISDN"]
    style G fill:#blue,stroke:#333

Note: ISDN Phone MUST be connected to ISDN port via an ISDN Phone Adapter. Do not connect the ISDN phone(s) to the ISDN port of the router directly for it cannot be used normally.

1.5 Printer Installation

You can install a printer onto the router for sharing printing. All the PCs connected this router can print documents via the router. The example provided here is made based on Windows XP/2000. For Windows 98/SE, please visit www.draytek.com.

Printer Name:192.168.1.1

Port Name: IP_192.168.1.1

Before using it, please follow the steps below to configure settings for connected computers (or wireless clients).

1. Connect the printer with the router through USB/parallel port.
2. Open Start>>Settings>> Printer and Faxes.

Documents Settings Search Help and Support Run... Log Off coco lee... Turn Off Computer... Control Panel Network Connections Printers and Faxes Taskbar and Start Menu

1. Open File>>Add a New Computer. A welcome dialog will appear. Please click Next.

Printers and Focus File Edit View Favorites Tools Add Printer Server Properties Set Up Folding Create Shortcut Delete Rename Properties Close

Add Printer Wizard Welcome to the Add Printer Wizard This wizard helps you install a printer or make printer connections. If you have a Plug and Play printer that connects through a USB port (or any other hot pluggable port, such as IEEE 1394, infrared, and so on), you do not need to use this wizard. Click Cancel to close the wizard, and then plug the printer's cable into your computer or point the printer toward your computer's infrared port, and turn the printer on Windows will automatically install the printer for you. To continue, click Next < Back Next> Cancel

1. Click Local printer attached to this computer and click Next.

Add Printer Wizard Local or Network Printer The wizard needs to know which type of printer to set up. Select the option that describes the printer you want to use: ● Local printer attached to this computer ○ Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer ○ A network printer, or a printer attached to another computer To set up a network printer that is not attached to a print server, use the "Local printer" option < Back Next > Cancel

1. In this dialog, choose Create a new port Type of port and use the drop down list to select Standard TCP/IP Port. Click Next.

Add Printer Wizard Select a Printer Port Computers communicate with printers through ports. Select the port you want your printer to use. If the port is not listed, you can create a new port. Use the following port: LPT1 (Recommended Printer Port) Note: Most computers use the LPT1 port to communicate with a local printer. The connector for this port should look something like this. Create a new port: Type of port: Standard TCP/IP Port < Back Next > Cancel

1. In the following dialog, type 192.168.1.1 (router's LAN IP) in the field of Printer Name or IP Address and type IP_192.168.1.1 as the port name. Then, click Next.

Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard Add Port For which device do you want to add a port? Enter the Printer Name or IP address, and a port name for the desired device. Printer Name or IP Address: 192.168.1.1 Port Name: IP_192.168.1.1 < Back Next > Cancel

1. Click Standard and choose Generic Network Card.

Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard Additional Port Information Required The device could not be denitrified. The detected device is of unknown type. Be sure that: 1. The device is properly configured. 2. The address on the previous page is correct. Either correct the address and perform another search on the network by returning to the previous wizard page or select the device type if you are sure the address is correct. Device Type Standard Generic Network Card Custom Settings < Back Next > Cancel

1. Then, in the following dialog, click Finish.

Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard Completing the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard You have selected a port with the following characteristics. SNMP: No Protocol: RAW, Port 9100 Device: 192.168.1.1 Port Name: IP_192.168.1.1 Adapter Type: Generic Network Card To complete this wizard, click Finish.

1. Now, your system will ask you to choose right name of the printer that you installed onto the router. Such step can make correct driver loaded onto your PC. When you finish the selection, click Next.

Add Printer Wizard Install Printer Software The manufacturer and model determine which printer software to use. Select the manufacturer and model of your printer. If your printer came with an installation disk, click Have Disk. If your printer is not listed, consult your printer documentation for compatible printer software. Manufacturer AST DT&T Brother Duo Canon Printers Brother HL-1060 BR-Script2 Brother HL-1070 BR-Script2 Brother HL-1070 Brother HL-TOPS/LPS This driver is digitally signed. Tell me why driver signing is important Windows Update Have Disk... < Back Next > Cancel

1. For the final stage, you need to go back to Control Panel >> Printers and edit the property of the new printer you have added.

Brother HL-1070 Properties General Sharing Ports Advanced Device Settings Brother HL-1070 Print to the following port(s). Documents will print to the first free checked port. Port Description Printer 3 250 Standard TCPAP Port Epson Stylus COLOR 1100 ... IP_1.. Standard TCPAP Port IP_1.. Standard TCPAP Port HP LaserJet 1300 IP_1.. Standard TCPAP Port IP_1.. Standard TCPAP Port IP_1.. Standard TCPAP Port Better HL-1070 PDF Local Port PDF995 Add Port... Delete Port Configure Port... Enable bidirectional support Enable printer pooling OK Cancel Apply

1. Select LPR on Protocol, type p1 (number 1) as Queue Name. Then click OK. Next please refer to the red rectangle for choosing the correct protocol and LPR name.

Configure Standard TCP/IP Port Monitor Port Settings Port Name: IP_192.168.1.1 Printer Name or IP Address: 192.168.1.1 Protocol Raw LPR Row Settings Port Number: 9103 LPR Settings Queue Name: p1 LPR Byte Counting Enabled SNMP Status Enabled Community Name: public SNMP Device Index: 1 OK Cancel

The printer can be used for printing now. Most of the printers with different manufacturers are compatible with vigor router.

Note 1: Some printers with the fax/scanning or other additional functions are not supported. If you do not know whether your printer is supported or not, please visit www.draytek.com to find out the printer list. Open Support >>FAQ; find out the link of Printer Server and click it; then click the What types of printers are compatible with Vigor router? link.

About DrayTek Products Support Partners Contact Us Home > Support > FAQ FAQ - Basic 01. What are the differences among these firmware file formats ? 02. How could I get the telnet command for routers ? 03. How can I backup/restore my configuration settings ? 04. How do I reset/clear the router's password ? 05. How to bring back my router to its default value ? 06. How do I tell the type of my Vigor Router is AnnexA or AnnexB? ( For ADSL model only ) 07. Ways for firmware upgrade 08. Why is SNMP removed in firmware 2.3.6 and above for Vigor2200 Series routers? 09. I failed to upgrade Vigor Router's firmware from my Mac machine constantly, what should I do? 10. How to upgrade firmware of Vigor Router remotely ? FAQ Basic Advanced VPN DHCP Wireless VoIP QoS ISDN Firewall / IP Filter Printer Server USD ICON TA USB

FAQ - Printer Server

1. How do I configure LPR printing on Windows2000/XP?

2. How do I configure LPR printing on Windows98/Me?

3. How do I configure LPR printing on Linux boxes?

4. Why there are some strange print-out when I try to print my documents through Vigor210 4P / 2300's print server?

5. What types of printers are compatible with Vigor router?

6. What are the limitations in the USB Printer Port of Vigor Router?

7. What is the printing buffer size of Vigor Router?

8. How do I configure LPR printing on Mac OSX?

9. How do I configure LPR printing on My Windows Vista?

Note 2: Vigor router supports printing request from computers via LAN ports but not WAN port.

This page is left blank.

Chapter 2: Configuring Basic Settings

For use the router properly, it is necessary for you to change the password of web configuration for security and adjust primary basic settings.

This chapter explains how to setup a password for an administrator, how to adjust basic settings for accessing Internet successfully and how to configure IPPBX settings via IPPBX wizard. Note that only the administrator can change the router configuration.

2.1 Changing Password

To change the password for this device, you have to access into the web browse with default password first.

1. Make sure your computer connects to the router correctly.

Notice: You may either simply set up your computer to get IP dynamically from the router or set up the IP address of the computer to be the same subnet as the default IP address of Vigor router 192.168.1.1. For the detailed information, please refer to the later section - Trouble Shooting of this guide.

1. Open a web browser on your PC and type http://192.168.1.1. A pop-up window will open to ask for username and password. Please type "admin" as the username and leave blank for the password on the window. Next click OK for next screen.

Connect to 192.168.1.1 Login to the Router Web Configurator User name: admin Password: Remember my password OK Cancel

1. Now, the Main Screen will pop up.

Quick Start Wizard IP-BOX Wizard Service Activation Wizard Online Status WAN LAN MAT Firewall Objects Setting CSM Bandwidth Management Applications VPN and Remote Access Certificate Management ISON IP-PRX Wireless LAN USB Application System Maintenance Diagnostics All Rights Reserved. System Status Model Name : VigorIPPBX 2820 Firmware Version : 3.5.5_RC3 Build Date/Time : Jun 15 2010 19:00:18 ADSL Firmware Version : 211011_A Hardware: Annex A LAN MAC Address : 00-50-7F-68-F8-28 1st IP Address : 192.168.1.1 1st Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0 DHCP Server : Yes DNS : 8.8.8.8 WAN 1 Link Status : Disconnected MAC Address : 00-50-7F-68-F8-29 Connection : --- JP Address : --- Default Gateway : --- SIP Trunk Index Profile Status 1. --- --- 2. --- --- 3. --- --- 4. --- --- 5. --- --- 6. --- --- WAN 2 Link Status : Connected MAC Address : 00-50-7F-68-F8-2A Connection : Static IP IP Address : 172.16.3.102 Default Gateway : 172.16.1.1 Wireless LAN MAC Address : 00-50-7F-68-F8-28 Frequency Domain : Europe Firmware Version : 1.8.1.0 SSID : DrayTek

Note: The home page will change slightly in accordance with the router you have.

1. Go to System Maintenance page and choose Administrator Password.

System Maintenance >> Administrator Password Setup

Administrator Password

Old Password New Password Confirm Password OK

1. Enter the login password (the default is blank) on the field of Old Password. Type New Password. Then click OK to continue.
2. Now, the password has been changed. Next time, use the new password to access the Web Configurator for this router.

Connect to 192.168.1.1 Login to the Router Web Configurator User name: admin Password: ••••• Remember my password OK Cancel

2.2 Quick Start Wizard

If your router can be under an environment with high speed NAT, the configuration provide here can help you to deploy and use the router quickly. The first screen of Quick Start Wizard is entering login password. After typing the password, please click Next.

Quick Start Wizard

Enter login password

Please enter an alpha-numeric string as your Password (Max 23 characters).

New Password

Confirm Password

< Back

Next >

Finish

Cancel

On the next page as shown below, please select the WAN interface (WAN 1 or WAN2) that you use. If DSL interface is used, please choose WAN1; if WAN2 interface is used, please choose WAN2. Choose Auto negotiation as the physical type for your router. Then click Next for next step.

Quick Start Wizard

WAN Interface

WAN Interface:

Display Name:

Physical Mode:

Physical Type:

< Back

Next >

Finish

Cancel

In this section, WAN1 is selected as an example.

On the next page as shown below, please select the appropriate Internet access type according to the information from your ISP. For example, you should select PPPoE mode if the ISP provides you PPPoE interface. Then click Next for next step.

Quick Start Wizard

Connect to Internet

WAN 1 VPI 0 Auto detect VCI 33 Protocol / Encapsulation PPPoE LLC/SNAP Fixed IP Yes No(Dynamic IP) IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS Second DNS < Back Next > Finish Cancel

PPPoE LLC/SNAP PPPoE LLC/SNAP PPPoE VC MUX PPPoA LLC/SNAP PPPoA VC MUX 1483 Bridged IP LLC 1483 Routed IP LLC 1483 Bridged IP VC-Mux 1483 Routed IP VC-Mux (IPoA) 1483 Bridged IP (IPoE)

In the Quick Start Wizard, you can configure the router to access the Internet with different protocol/modes such as PPPoE/PPPoA, 1483 Bridged IP or 1483 Routed IP. The router supports the DSL WAN interface for Internet access.

2.2.1 PPPoE/PPPoA

PPPoE stands for Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet. It relies on two widely accepted standards: PPP and Ethernet. It connects users through an Ethernet to the Internet with a common broadband medium, such as a single DSL line, wireless device or cable modem. All the users over the Ethernet can share a common connection.

PPPoE is used for most of DSL modem users. All local users can share one PPPoE connection for accessing the Internet. Your service provider will provide you information about user name, password, and authentication mode.

If your ISP provides you the PPPoE connection, please select PPPoE for this router. The following page will be shown:

Quick Start Wizard

Set PPPoE / PPPoA

WAN 1

User Name

Password

Confirm Password

[e-mail]

●●●●●●●

●●●●●●●

< Back

Next >

Finish

Cancel

User Name

Assign a specific valid user name provided by the ISP.

Password

Assign a valid password provided by the ISP.

Confirm Password

Retype the password.

Click Next for viewing summary of such connection.

Quick Start Wizard

Please confirm your settings:

WAN Interface:

Physical Mode:

Physical Type:

VPI:

VCI:

Protocol / Encapsulation:

Fixed IP:

Primary DNS:

Secondary DNS:

WAN1

ADSL

Auto negotiation

8

35

PPPoA / VCMUX

No

undefined

undefined

< Back

Next >

Finish

Cancel

Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system status of this protocol will be shown.

Quick Start Wizard Setup OK !!!

2.2.2 1483 Bridged IP

Click 1483 Bridged IP as the protocol. Type in all the information that your ISP provides for this protocol.

Quick Start Wizard

Connect to Internet

WAN 1 VPI 0 Auto detect VCI 33 Protocol / Encapsulation 1483 Bridged IP LLC Fixed IP Yes No(Dynamic IP) IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary DNS 168.95.1.1 Second DNS < Back Next > Finish Cancel

Click Next for viewing summary of such connection.

Quick Start Wizard

Please confirm your settings:

WAN Interface: WAN1 Physical Mode: ADSL Physical Type: Auto negotiation VPI: 0 VCI: 33 Protocol / Encapsulation: 1483 Bridge LLC Fixed IP: No Primary DNS: 168.95.1.1 Secondary DNS:

Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system status of this protocol will be shown.

Quick Start Wizard Setup OK !!!

2.2.3 1483 Routed IP

Click 1483 Routed IP as the protocol. Type in all the information that your ISP provides for this protocol.

Quick Start Wizard

Connect to Internet

WAN 1 VPI 8 Auto detect VCI 35 Protocol / Encapsulation 1483 Routed IP LLC Fixed IP Yes No(Dynamic IP) IP Address 192.168.3.10 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway 192.168.3.1 Primary DNS undefined Second DNS undefined < Back Next > Finish Cancel

After finishing the settings in this page, click Next to see the following page.

Quick Start Wizard

Please confirm your settings:

WAN Interface:	WAN1
Physical Mode:	ADSL
Physical Type:	Auto negotiation
VPI:	8
VCI:	35
Protocol / Encapsulation:	1483 Route LLC
Fixed IP:	Yes
IP Address:	192.168.3.10
Subnet Mask:	255.255.255.0
Default Gateway:	192.168.3.1
Primary DNS:	undefined
Secondary DNS:	undefined

Click Finish. A page of Quick Start Wizard Setup OK!!! will appear. Then, the system status of this protocol will be shown.

Quick Start Wizard Setup OK !!!

2.3 IPPBX Wizard

IPPBX Wizard can guide the user to configure the required settings for this router within several steps. All the settings, also, can be configured by using IP PBX menu. However, the wizard is the most convenient and easy method for users.

VigorIPPBX 2820 DrayTek www.draytek.com System Status Model Name : VigorIPPBX 2020 Firmware Version : 3.5.5_RC3 Build Date/Time : Jun 15 2010 19:00:18 ADSL Firmware Version : 211011_A Hardware: Annex A LAN MAC Address : 00-50-7F-68-F8-20 1st IP Address : 192.169.1.1 1st Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0 DHCP Server : Yes DNS : 8.8.8.8 WAN 1 Link Status : Disconnected MAC Address : 00-50-7F-68-F8-29 Connection : --- IP Address : --- Default Gateway : --- SIP Trunk Index Profile Status 1. --- --- 2. --- --- 3. --- --- 4. --- --- 5. --- --- 6. --- --- WAN 2 Link Status : Connected MAC Address : 00-50-7F-68-F8-2A Connection : Static IP IP Address : 172.15.3.102 Default Gateway : 172.15.1.1 Wireless LAN MAC Address : 00-50-7F-68-F8-20 Frequency Domain : Europe Firmware Version : 1.8.1.0 SSID : DrayTek

2.3.1 Extension & Group Setup

Click IPPBX Wizard. You can get the first screen as shown below.

IPPBX Wizard

Extension & Groups Setup : Index 1

Extension Group Name:		(for example : sales)
Extension Group Number:		(for example : 100)
Start Number of the extension Group:		(for example : 101)
Number of extensions in this group:		(for example : 10, max = 20)
Extension Password in this group:
	OK

Index	Group Name	Group Extension	Hunt List(Max 20 Extension)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Extension Group Name

Type a name as a display for this extension group.

Extension Group Number Type the number of extension for such group.

Start Number of the extension Type the start extension number for such group. Group

Number of extension in this group Type the total number of the extension for such group.

Extension Password in this group Type the password for this extension group, which will be used in registration done by IP Phone.

When you finish the settings of group name, group number, start number, number of extension fields, please click OK to save them. The new added group will be displayed on the screen. You can set 10 groups for using in different conditions. Then click Next to access into next web page.

Below shows an example for your reference:

IPPBX Wizard

Extension & Groups Setup : Index 5

Extension Group Name:	TSS	(for example : sales)
Extension Group Number:	205	(for example : 100)
Start Number of the extension Group:	2051	(for example : 101)
Number of extensions in this group:	4	(for example : 10, max = 20)
Extension Password in this group:
	OK

Index	Group Name	Group Extension	Hunt List(Max 20 Extension)
1.	SMB E	201	2011-2015
2.	SMB W	202	2021-2026
3.	Gov C	203	2031-2037
4.	Healthcare	204	2041-2043
5.	TSS	205	2051-2054
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

2.3.2 SIP Trunk Setup

This page allows you to set profiles for six SIP outside lines at one time.

IPPBX Wizard

Sip Trunk Setup : Index 1

Profile Name:		(11 characters max.)
Domain/Realm:		(63 characters max.)
Proxy:		(63 characters max.)
Account Number/Name:		(63 characters max.)
Password:		(63 characters max.)
Trunk number:	001	(3 characters max.)

Index	Profile Name	Domain/Realm	Proxy	Account Number/Name	Trunk Number
1.					001
2.					002
3.					003
4.					004
5.					005
6.					006

Profile Name Type a name for this profile for identifying.

Domain/Realm Set the domain name or IP address of the SIP Registrar server.

Proxy Set domain name or IP address of SIP proxy server. By the time you can type :port number after the domain name to specify that port as the destination of data transmission (e.g., nat.draytel.org:5065)

Account Number/Name Enter your account name of SIP Address, e.g. every text before @.

Password Type the password which will be used in registration for SIP service for this profile.

Trunk Number There are two ways to dial outside lines for an extension number. First, dial a short number and wait for a while. When dial tone appears, please dial the real outside line number. Second, dial a short number and then the real outside line number without waiting for dial tone. The short number is defined here as Trunk Number.

When you finish the settings of profile name, domain/realm, proxy, account number/name, password and trunk number fields, please click OK to save them. The new added profile will be displayed on the screen.

Index	Profile Name	Domain/Realm	Proxy	Account Number/Name	Trunk Number
1.	SalesMarket	192.168.1.55	nat.draytel.org:5065	salesgroup	001
2.					002
3.					003
4.					004
5.					005
6.					006

You can set 6 profiles for using in different conditions. Then click Next to access into next web page.

2.3.3 Office Hours Setup

This page allows you to set office hours including starting point, ending point on duty day(s).

IPPBX Wizard

Office Hours Setup

Now, You can make the work time schedule of your office.

When do you start working in the morning

When do you have a rest at noon

When do you start working in the afternoon

When do you leave the office

Is this schedule available at weekend?

Hour : Min

When do you start working in the morning Use the drop down menu to choose the time as the starting point in the morning.

When do you have a rest at noon Use the drop down menu to choose the time as the ending point in the morning.

When do you start working in the afternoon Use the drop down menu to choose the time as the starting point in the afternoon.

When do you leave the office Use the drop down menu to choose the time as the ending point in the afternoon.

Is this schedule available at the weekend If such schedule will be available in the weekend, simply click Yes, otherwise, click No.

When you finish the settings, click Finish to save the settings and exit the wizard.

work time schedule of your office.

Hour : 08 00 at noon 12 00 ing in the afternoon 13 00 office 17 30 e at weekend? Yes No

2.4 Service Activation Wizard

Service Activation Wizard can guide you to set WCF (Web Content Feature) feature with a quick way.

Note: There are three ways to activate WCF on vigor router, using Service Activation Wizard, by means of CSM>>Web Content Filter Profile or via System Maintenance>>Activation.

Service Activation Wizard is a tool which allows you to use trial version or update the license of WCF directly without accessing into the server (MyVigor) located on http://myvigor.draytek.com. For using Web Content Filter Profile, please refer to section

5.6.3 Web Content Filter Profile for detailed information.

Now, please follow the steps listed below to activate WCF feature for your router.

1. Open Service Activation Wizard.

Quick Start Wizard IPPRX Wizard Service Activation Wizard Online Status

1. The screen of Service Activation Wizard will be shown as follows. Choose the one you need and click Next. In this case, we choose to activate free trial edition.

Service Activation Wizard

Select the service type that you want to activate

This wizard is used for activating - Web Content Filter Please choose the edition you need. Free trial edition Formal edition with license key Next > Finish Cancel

Free trial edition: it offers a period of trial for you to get acquainted with WCF function.

Formal edition with license key: you can extend the license valid time manually.

Note: If you activate Formal edition with license key first, the free trial edition will be invalid.

1. In the following page, please check the box of "I have read and accept the above Agreement" and click Next.

Service Activation Wizard

Select the service type that you want to activate

This product provides 30 days of free trial, please choose the item(s) you want to use.

WCF service:

Web Content Filter (Commtouch)

License Agreement

Commouch is the web content filter based on Commouch operated in the worldwide. There is a 30-day trial period. After trial, you can purchase DrayTek's prepared Commouch GlobalView WCF package from retailing outlets.

Activation Date: 2010-12-16

I have read and accept the above Agreement. (Please check this box).

Note: The activation date is brought out by the server automatically and cannot be changed.

< Back Next > Finish Cancel

1. Setting confirmation page will be displayed as follows, please click Next.

Service Activation Wizard

Please confirm your settings

Sevice Type :

Trial version

Sevice Activated :

Web Content Filter (Commtouch)

Please click Back to re-select service type you to activate.

< Back

Next >

Finish

Cancel

1. Wait for a moment till the following page appears.

Service Activation Wizard

Connection Succeeded!

Please check the following item(s) to enable the AI/AV or WCF or AS services on your router.

Enable Web Content Filter

Next > Finish

When such page appears, you can enable or disable these services for your necessity. Then, click Finish.

Note: The service will be activated and applied as the default rule configured in Firewall>>General Setup.

1. Now, the web page will display the service that you have activated according to your selection(s). The valid time for the free trial of these services is one month.

Service Activation Wizard

Server Enabled!

Service Name	Start Date	Expire Date	Status
Web Content filter	2010-12-16	2011-01-16	Commtouch

Later, if you need to extend the license valid time, you can also use the Service Activation Wizard again to reach your goal by clicking the radio button of Formal edition with license key and clicking Next.

Service Activation Wizard

Select the service type that you want to activate This wizard is used for activating - Web Content Filter Please choose the edition you need. Free trial edition Formal edition with license key Next > Finish Cancel Service Activation Wizard select the service type that you want to activate Please choose the item you want to use. WGF service: Web Content Filter (Commtouch) License Agreement Commtouch is the web content filter based on Commtouch operated in the worldwide. There is a 30-day trial period. After trial, you can purchase DrayTek's prepared Commtouch GlobalView WCF package from retailing outlets. Enter your License key: Activation Date : select I have read and accept the above Agreement. (Please check this box). Note: The activation date is brought out by the server automatically and cannot be changed. < Back Next > Finish Cancel

2.5 Online Status

The online status shows the system status, WAN status, ADSL Information and other status related to this router within one page. If you select PPPoE/PPPoA as the protocol, you will find out a link of Dial PPPoE or Drop PPPoE in the Online Status web page.

Online status for PPPoE (WAN2)

Online Status

System Status					System Uptime: 3:18:44
Primary		Secondary
LAN Status		Primary DNS: 192.168.66.1		Secondary DNS: 168.95.1.1
IP Address		TX Packets	RX Packets
192.168.1.1		749	552
WAN 1 Status					>> Release
Enable	Line	Name	Mode	Up Time
Yes	ADSL		DHCP Client	0:00:00
IP	GW IP	TX Packets	TX Rate(Bps)	RX Packets	RX Rate(Bps)
192.168.66.10	192.168.66.1	1	9	1	0
WAN 2 Status					>> Drop PPPoE
Enable	Line	Name	Mode	Up Time
Yes	Ethernet		PPPoE	0:00:22
IP	GW IP	TX Packets	TX Rate(Bps)	RX Packets	RX Rate(Bps)
218.160.234.238	61.216.116.254	14	16	15	41
ADSL Information ( ADSL Firmware Version: 211011_A)
ATM Statistics	TX Blocks	RX Blocks	Corrected Blocks	Uncorrected Blocks
	18	23	0	0
ADSL Status	Mode	State	Up Speed	Down Speed	SNR Margin	Loop Att.
	G.DMT	SHOWTIME	1024000	11936000	0	0

Online status for PPTP (for WAN2)

Online Status

System Status					System Uptime: 3:18:44
Primary		Secondary
LAN Status		Primary DNS: 168.95.1.1		Secondary DNS: 168.95.1.1
IP Address		TX Packets	RX Packets
192.168.1.1		480	339
WAN 1 Status
Enable	Line	Name	Mode	Up Time
Yes	ADSL		Static IP	0:00:00
IP	GW IP	TX Packets	TX Rate(Bps)	RX Packets	RX Rate(Bps)
192.168.66.52	192.168.66.1	1	9	1	16
WAN 2 Status					>> Release
Enable	Line	Name	Mode	Up Time
Yes	Ethernet		PPTP	0:00:28
IP	GW IP	TX Packets	TX Rate(Bps)	RX Packets	RX Rate(Bps)
192.168.129.11	192.168.129.1	8	12	10	9
ADSL Information ( ADSL Firmware Version: 211011_A)
ATM Statistics	TX Blocks	RX Blocks	Corrected Blocks	Uncorrected Blocks
	4	3	0	2
ADSL Status Mode	State	Up Speed	Down Speed	SNR Margin	Loop Att.
G.DMT	SHOWTIME	1024000	12000000	8	0

Online status for Static IP (for WAN1)

Online Status

System Status					System Uptime: 3:18:44
Primary		Secondary
LAN Status		Primary DNS: 168.95.1.1		Secondary DNS: 168.95.1.1
IP Address		TX Packets	RX Packets
192.168.1.1		480	339
WAN 1 Status
Enable	Line	Name	Mode	Up Time
Yes	ADSL		Static IP	0:00:00
IP	GW IP	TX Packets	TX Rate(Bps)	RX Packets	RX Rate(Bps)
192.168.66.52	192.168.66.1	1	9	1	16
WAN 2 Status					>> Release
Enable	Line	Name	Mode	Up Time
Yes	Ethernet		PPTP	0:00:28
IP	GW IP	TX Packets	TX Rate(Bps)	RX Packets	RX Rate(Bps)
192.168.129.11	192.168.129.1	8	12	10	9
ADSL Information ( ADSL Firmware Version: 211011_A)
ATM Statistics	TX Blocks	RX Blocks	Corrected Blocks	Uncorrected Blocks
	4	3	0	2
ADSL Status	Mode	State	Up Speed	Down Speed	SNR Margin	Loop Att.
	G.DMT	SHOWTIME	1024000	12000000	8	0

Online status for DHCP (WAN1)

Online Status

System Status					System Uptime: 3:18:44
Primary		Secondary
LAN Status		Primary DNS: 192.168.66.1		Secondary DNS: 168.95.1.1
IP Address		TX Packets	RX Packets
192.168.1.1		749	552
WAN 1 Status					>> Release
Enable	Line	Name	Mode	Up Time
Yes	ADSL		DHCP Client	0:00:00
IP	GW IP	TX Packets	TX Rate(Bps)	RX Packets	RX Rate(Bps)
192.168.66.10	192.168.66.1	1	9	1	0
WAN 2 Status					>> Drop PPPoE
Enable	Line	Name	Mode	Up Time
Yes	Ethernet		PPPoE	0:00:22
IP	GW IP	TX Packets	TX Rate(Bps)	RX Packets	RX Rate(Bps)
218.160.234.238	61.216.116.254	14	16	15	41
ADSL Information ( ADSL Firmware Version: 211011_A)
ATM Statistics	TX Blocks	RX Blocks	Corrected Blocks		Uncorrected Blocks
	18	23	0		0
ADSL Status Mode	State	Up Speed	Down Speed	SNR Margin		Loop Att.
G.DMT	SHOWTIME	1024000	11936000	0		0

Online status for ISDN enabled

EnableYesIP172.17.3.43	LineEthernetGW IP172.17.3.2	NameTX Packets0	ModeStatic IPTX Rate(Bps)0	Up Time00:00:00RX Packets0	RX Rate(Bps)0
ADSL Information ( ADSL Firmware Version: 2121501_A)
ATM Statistics	TX Blocks0	RX Blocks0	Corrected Blocks0	Uncorrected Blocks0
ADSL Status Mode----	StateREADY	Up Speed0	Down Speed0	SNR Margin0	Loop Att.0
ISDN Status Channel Active Connection TX Pkts TX Rate (Bps) >> Dial ISDN >> Drop B1 >> Drop B2RX Pkts RX Rate (Bps) Up Time AOC
ISDN1-B1 Idle [---]	0	0	0	0	0:0:0	0
ISDN1-B2 Idle [---]	0	0	0	0	0:0:0	0
ISDN1-D UP
ISDN2-B1 2930 [192.168.3.10]	19	9	10	3	0:0:36	0
ISDN2-B2 Idle [---]	0	0	0	0	0:0:0	0
ISDN2-D UP

Detailed explanation is shown below:

Primary DNS Displays the IP address of the primary DNS.

Secondary DNS Displays the IP address of the secondary DNS.

LAN Status

IP Address Displays the IP address of the LAN interface.

TX Packets Displays the total transmitted packets at the LAN interface.

RX Packets Displays the total number of received packets at the LAN interface.

WAN1/2 Status

Line Displays the physical connection (Ethernet) of this interface.

Name Displays the name set in WAN1/WAN web page.

Mode Displays the type of WAN connection (e.g., PPPoE).

Up Time Displays the total uptime of the interface.

IP Displays the IP address of the WAN interface.

GW IP Displays the IP address of the default gateway.

TX Packets Displays the total transmitted packets at the WAN interface.

TX Rate Displays the speed of transmitted octets at the WAN interface.

RX Packets Displays the total number of received packets at the WAN interface.

RX Rate Displays the speed of received octets at the WAN interface.

ISDN Status

Channel Active Displays the active connection status for each channel.

Conn.

TX Pkts Displays the total transmitted packets at the ISDN interface.

TX Rate Displays the speed of transmitted octets at the ISDN interface.

RX Pkts Displays the total number of received packets at the ISDN interface.

RX Rate Displays the speed of received octets at the ISDN interface.

Up Time Displays the total uptime of the interface.

AOC Displays the charge information of the interface.

Note: The words in green mean that the WAN connection of that interface (WAN1/WAN2) is ready for accessing Internet; the words in red mean that the WAN connection of that interface (WAN1/WAN2) is not ready for accessing Internet.

2.6 Saving Configuration

Each time you click OK on the web page for saving the configuration, you can find messages showing the system interaction with you.

Status: Ready

Ready indicates the system is ready for you to input settings.

Settings Saved means your settings are saved once you click Finish or OK button.

This page is left blank.

This chapter shows several scenarios for your reference to configure IP PBX for different purposes.

3.1 The Registration of 50 IP-based Telephone/Extensions

Vigor1PPBX 2820 Internet IP Phone Ext:103@ippbx IP Phone Ext:101@ippbx IP Phone Ext:102@ippbx

● The establishment through DSL Internet.
● Flexible second WAN for back-up.
- IP-based telephones are connected to LAN ports and set with ext. no. 101, 102 & 103.
● The IP-based telephones (101, 102, and 103) are registered on the VigorIPPBX 2820.

3.2 The IP Registration from Remote Site (through WAN Connection)

graph TD
    A["Vigo1PPBX 2820"] --> B["Internet"]
    B --> C["IP Phone Ext:103@ippbx"]
    B --> D["IP Phone Ext:102@ippbx"]
    C --> E["IP Phone Ext:101@ippbx"]
    D --> F["IP Phone Ext:102@ippbx"]
    style B stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    style C stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px
    style D stroke:#ff0000,stroke-width:2px

● The establishment through DSL Internet.
● Flexible second WAN for back-up.
- IP-based telephones are connected to LAN ports and set with ext. no. 101, 102 & 103.
- The IP-based telephones (101, 102, and 103) and remote IP-based phone are registered on the VigorIPPBX 2820.
● The IP-based phone with ext. no. 201 is at remote site.

3.3 The Integration IP Registration with SIP Server

graph TD
    A["Vigo1PPBX 2820"] --> B["IP Phone Ext:101@ippbx"]
    A --> C["IP Phone Ext:102@ippbx"]
    B --> D["Internet"]
    C --> D
    D --> E["SIP Server"]
    D --> F["IP Phone Ext:103@ippbx"]
    D --> G["IP Phone Ext:201@ippbx"]

● The establishment through DSL Internet.
● Flexible second WAN for back-up.
IP-based telephones are connected to LAN ports and set with ext. no. 101, 102 & 103.
- The IP-based telephones (101, 102, and 103) and remote IP-based phone are registered on the VigorIPPBX 2820.
● The IP-based phone with ext. no. 201 is at remote site.
● The VigorIPPBX 2820 seamlessly integrate with ITSP services (allow you to register at a SIP server).

3.4 The Integration VoIP Communications via SIP Server

graph TD
    A["Vigo1PPBX 2820"] --> B["Internet"]
    B --> C["SIP Server"]
    B --> D["IP Phone Ext:301@sipserver"]
    B --> E["IP Phone Ext:201@ippbx"]
    B --> F["IP Phone Ext:103@ippbx"]
    B --> G["IP Phone Ext:101@ippbx"]
    B --> H["IP Phone Ext:102@ippbx"]

● The establishment through DSL Internet.
● Flexible second WAN for back-up.
IP-based telephones are connected to LAN ports and set with ext. no. 101, 102 & 103.
- The IP-based telephones (101, 102, and 103) and remote IP-based phone are registered on the VigorIPPBX 2820.
● The IP-based phone with ext. no. 201 is at remote site.
- The VigorIPPBX 2820 seamlessly integrate with ITSP services (allow you to register at a SIP server).
● The remote IP-based phone with ext. 301 is registered at a SIP server.

3.5 The Integration with PSTN telephony

graph TD
    A["VigotIPPBX 2820"] --> B["Internet"]
    B --> C["SIP Server"]
    B --> D["IP Phone Ext:301@sipserver"]
    B --> E["IP Phone Ext:201@ippbx"]
    B --> F["IP Phone Ext:103@ippbx"]
    B --> G["IP Phone Ext:102@ippbx"]
    B --> H["Analog Phone Ext:401@ippbx"]
    B --> I["PSTN"]
    H --> J["IP Phone Ext:101@ippbx"]
    H --> K["IP Phone Ext:102@ippbx"]

● The establishment through DSL Internet.
● Flexible second WAN for back-up.
IP-based telephones are connected to LAN ports and set with ext. no. 101, 102 & 103.
- The IP-based telephones (101, 102, and 103) and remote IP-based phone are registered on the VigorIPPBX 2820.
● The IP-based phone with ext. no. 201 is at remote site.
● The VigorIPPBX 2820 seamlessly integrate with ITSP services (allow you to register at a SIP server).
● The remote IP-based phone with ext. 301 is registered at a SIP server.
● The analog land line is connected to the Line port.
- The analog phone is connected to the Phone port and is using ext. no. 401 at the VigorIPPBX 2820.

3.6 The Added ISDN Telephony

graph TD
    A["Vigo1PPBX 2820"] --> B["Router"]
    B --> C["SIP Server"]
    B --> D["Internet"]
    B --> E["IP Phone Ext:301@sipserver"]
    B --> F["IP Phone Ext:201@ippbx"]
    B --> G["IP Phone Ext:103@ippbx"]
    B --> H["IP Phone Ext:101@ippbx"]
    B --> I["IP Phone Ext:102@ippbx"]
    B --> J["ISDN Phone Ext:601@ippbx"]
    B --> K["ISDN Phone Ext:602@ippbx"]

● The establishment through DSL Internet.
● Flexible second WAN for back-up.
IP-based telephones are connected to LAN ports and set with ext. no. 101, 102 & 103.
- The IP-based telephones (101, 102, and 103) and remote IP-based phone are registered on the VigorIPPBX 2820.
● The IP-based phone with ext. no. 201 is at remote site.
- The VigorIPPBX 2820 seamlessly integrate with ITSP services (allow you to register at a SIP server).
● The remote IP-based phone with ext. 301 is registered at a SIP server.
● The ISDN phones with ext. no. 601 and 602 are connected to NT-interface of the VigorIPPBX 2820.

3.7 The Integrated ISDN line

graph TD
    A["ISDN"] --> B["ISDN NT"]
    B --> C["Vigor1PPBX 2820"]
    C --> D["SIP Server"]
    D --> E["Internet"]
    E --> F["IP Phone Ext:301@sipserver"]
    E --> G["IP Phone Ext:201@ippbx"]
    C --> H["ISDN Trunk Ext:0"]
    C --> I["ISDN Phone Ext:601@ippbx"]
    C --> J["IP Phone Ext:101@ippbx"]
    C --> K["IP Phone Ext:102@ippbx"]

● The establishment through DSL Internet.
- Flexible second WAN for back-up.
IP-based telephones are connected to LAN ports and set with ext. no. 101, 102 & 103.
- The IP-based telephones (101, 102, and 103) and remote IP-based phone are registered on the VigorIPPBX 2820.
● The IP-based phone with ext. no. 201 is at remote site.
- The VigorIPPBX 2820 seamlessly integrate with ITSP services (allow you to register at a SIP server).
● The remote IP-based phone with ext. 301 is registered at a SIP server.
● The ISDN line is connected to TE-interface of the VigorIPPBX 2820.
- The ISDN phone with ext. no. 601 is connected to NT-interface of the VigorIPPBX 2820.

3.8 The 4 B Channels of Two ISDN Lines

graph TD
    A["Vigor1PPBX 2820"] -->|ISDN| B["ISDN NT"]
    A -->|ISDN NT| C["ISDN Trunk Ext:0"]
    A -->|ISDN| D["ISDN NT"]
    A -->|SIP Server| E["SIP Server"]
    E --> F["IP Phone Ext:301@sipserver"]
    A --> G["Internet"]
    G --> H["IP Phone Ext:103@ippbx"]
    A --> I["IP Phone Ext:201@ippbx"]
    B --> J["IP Phone Ext:101@ippbx"]
    C --> K["IP Phone Ext:102@ippbx"]

● The establishment through DSL Internet.
● Flexible second WAN for back-up.
IP-based telephones are connected to LAN ports and set with ext. no. 101, 102 & 103.
- The IP-based telephones (101, 102, and 103) and remote IP-based phone are registered on the VigorIPPBX 2820.
● The IP-based phone with ext. no. 201 is at remote site.
- The VigorIPPBX 2820 seamlessly integrate with ITSP services (allow you to register at a SIP server).
● The remote IP-based phone with ext. 301 is registered at a SIP server.
● The two ISDN lines are connected to two TE-interfaces of the VigorIPPBX 2820.

3.9 The Integration of ISDN PBX with One ISDN Line

graph TD
    A["ISDN"] --> B["ISDN NT"]
    B --> C["ISDN Trunk Ext: 0"]
    C --> D["ISDN Phone Ext:601"]
    C --> E["ISDN Phone Ext:602"]
    C --> F["Analog Phone Ext:603"]
    D --> G["Vigo4PPBX 2820"]
    E --> G
    F --> G
    G --> H["SIP Server"]
    H --> I["IP Phone Ext:301@sipserver"]
    G --> J["Internet"]
    J --> K["IP Phone Ext:103@ippbx"]
    J --> L["IP Phone Ext:201@ippbx"]
    G --> M["IP Phone Ext:101@ippbx"]
    G --> N["IP Phone Ext:102@ippbx"]

● The establishment through DSL Internet.
● Flexible second WAN for back-up.
IP-based telephones are connected to LAN ports and set with ext. no. 101, 102 & 103.
- The IP-based telephones (101, 102, and 103) and remote IP-based phone are registered. On the VigorIPPBX 2820.
● The IP-based phone with ext. no. 201 is at remote site.
- The VigorIPPBX 2820 seamlessly integrate with ITSP services (allow you to register at a SIP server).
● The remote IP-based phone with ext. 301 is registered at a SIP server.
● The ISDN phone with ext. no. 701 is connected to NT-interface of the VigorIPPBX 2820.
- The ISDN PBX is connected to TE-interface of the VigorIPPBX 2820. The ISDN phones with ext. no. 601 and 602 are connected to ISDN PBX.
● The ISDN PBX also provides analog extensions to allow analog phones to be connected. The analog phone with ext. no. 603 is connected at the ISDN PBX.

3.10 The Integration of ISDN PBX with One ISDN Line-2

graph TD
    A["IP Phone"] -->|ext 201| B["TE"]
    A -->|ext 202| C["LAN"]
    A -->|ext 203| D["Internet"]
    B --> E["S0(NT)"]
    C --> F["ADSL Line"]
    D --> G["ADSL Splitter"]
    E --> H["ISDN NTBA"]
    F --> H
    G --> H
    H --> I["Connecting to the ISDN Line"]
    I --> J["ISDN PBX"]
    J --> K["ext 601"]
    J --> L["ext 602"]
    J --> M["ext 603"]

● The establishment through DSL Internet.
- Flexible second WAN for back-up.
● IP-based telephones are connected to LAN ports and set with ext. no. 101, 102 & 103.
● The IP-based telephones (201, 202, and 203) and remote IP-based phone are registered on the VigorIPPBX 2820.
- The VigorIPPBX 2820 seamlessly integrate with ITSP services (allow you to register at a SIP server).
- The ISDN PBX is connected to S0-interface of the VigorIPPBX 2820. The ISDN phones with ext. no. 601 and 602 are connected to ISDN PBX.
● The ISDN line is connected to TE-interface of the VigorIPPBX 2820.

3.11 The Deployment of ISDN PBX and PSTN Network

graph TD
    A["ISDN"] --> B["ISDN NT"]
    B --> C["ISDN Trunk Ext: 0"]
    C --> D["ISDN Phone Ext:601"]
    C --> E["ISDN Phone Ext:602"]
    C --> F["Analog Phone Ext:603"]
    D --> G["VigoITPPBX 2820"]
    E --> G
    F --> G
    G --> H["SIP Server"]
    H --> I["IP Phone Ext:301@sipserver"]
    G --> J["Internet"]
    J --> K["IP Phone Ext:103@ippbx"]
    J --> L["IP Phone Ext:201@ippbx"]
    G --> M["PSTN"]
    M --> N["Analog Phone Ext:401@ippbx"]
    M --> O["IP Phone Ext:101@ippbx"]
    M --> P["IP Phone Ext:102@ippbx"]

● The establishment through DSL Internet.
● Flexible second WAN for back-up.
IP-based telephones are connected to LAN ports and set with ext. no. 101, 102 & 103.
- The IP-based telephones (101, 102, and 103) and remote IP-based phone are registered on the VigorIPPBX 2820.
● The IP-based phone with ext. no. 201 is at remote site.
- The VigorIPPBX 2820 seamlessly integrate with ITSP services (allow you to register at a SIP server).
● The remote IP-based phone with ext. 301 is registered at a SIP server.
● The ISDN phone with ext. no. 701 is connected to NT-interface of the VigorIPPBX 2820.
- The ISDN PBX is connected to TE-interface of the VigorIPPBX 2820. The ISDN phones with ext. no. 601 and 602 are connected to ISDN PBX.
● The ISDN PBX also provides analog extensions to allow analog phones to be connected. The analog phone with ext. no. 603 is connected at the ISDN PBX.
● The analog land line is connected to the Line port.
- The analog phone is connected to the Phone port and is using ext. no. 401 at the VigorIPPBX 2820.

3.12 The Integration of ISDN Telephony and PSTN Network

graph TD
    A["ISDN"] --> B["ISDN NT"]
    B --> C["ISDN Trunk Ext: 0"]
    C --> D["ISDN Phone Ext:601"]
    C --> E["ISDN Phone Ext:602"]
    C --> F["Analog Phone Ext:603"]
    D --> G["VigotlPPBX 2820"]
    E --> G
    F --> G
    G --> H["Internet"]
    H --> I["SIP Server"]
    H --> J["IP Phone Ext:301@sipserver"]
    H --> K["IP Phone Ext:201@ippbx"]
    H --> L["IP Phone Ext:103@ippbx"]
    H --> M["IP Phone Ext:101@ippbx"]
    H --> N["IP Phone Ext:102@ippbx"]
    G --> O["PSTN"]
    O --> P["Analog Phone Ext:401@ippbx"]
    P --> Q["ISDN Trunk Ext: 0"]
    Q --> R["SIP Server"]

● The establishment through DSL Internet.
● Flexible second WAN for back-up.
IP-based telephones are connected to LAN ports and set with ext. no. 101, 102 & 103.
- The IP-based telephones (101, 102, and 103) and remote IP-based phone are registered on VigorIPPBX 2820.
● The IP-based phone with ext. no. 201 is at remote site.
- The VigorIPPBX 2820 seamlessly integrate with ITSP services (allow you to register at a SIP server).
● The remote IP-based phone with ext. 301 is registered at a SIP server.
● The ISDN phones with ext. no. 601 and 602 are connected to ISDN PBX.
● The ISDN PBX also provides analog extensions to allow analog phones to be connected. The analog phone with ext. no. 603 is connected at the ISDN PBX.
● The analog land line is connected to the Line port.
- The analog phone is connected to the Phone port and is using ext. no. 401 at VigorIPPBX 2820.
- The ISDN PBX's two internal lines are connected to the TE-interfaces of the VigorIPPBX 2820.

3.13 The Integration of ISDN Telephony, PSTN Network and VoIP Connection

graph TD
    A["ISDN"] --> B["ISDN NT"]
    B --> C["ISDN Phone Ext:601"]
    C --> D["ISDN Phone Ext:602"]
    D --> E["Analog Phone Ext:603"]
    E --> F["VigorTalk ATA24"]
    F --> G["Analog Phone Ext:701@ippbx"]
    G --> H["Analog Phone Ext:702@ippbx"]
    H --> I["Analog Phone Ext:703@ippbx"]
    I --> J["VigorSwitch G2240"]
    J --> K["VigorSwitch P2250 (PcS Switch)"]
    K --> L["SIP Server"]
    K --> M["IP Phone Ext:301@sipserver"]
    K --> N["IP Phone Ext:201@ippbx"]
    K --> O["IP Phone Ext:101@ippbx"]
    K --> P["IP Phone Ext:102@ippbx"]
    K --> Q["Internet"]
    style A fill:#99ccff,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#99ccff,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#99ccff,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#99ccff,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style M fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style N fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style O fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style P fill:#ccc,stroke:#333
    style Q fill:#ccc,stroke:#333

● The establishment through DSL Internet.

● Flexible second WAN for back-up.

- IP-based telephones with ext. no. 101 & 102 are connected to LAN ports of the VigorSwitch. Analog telephones with ext. no. 701, 702 & 703 are connected to the VigorTalk ATA24 and are registered at the VigorIPPBX 2820.

- The IP-based telephone with ext. no. 103 and remote IP-based phone ext. no. 201 are registered on the VigorIPPBX 2820.

● The IP-based phone with ext. no. 201 is at remote site.

● The VigorIPPBX 2820 seamlessly integrate with ITSP services (allow you to register at a SIP server).

● The remote IP-based phone with ext. 301 is registered at a SIP server.

● The ISDN phones with ext. no. 601 and 602 are connected to ISDN PBX.

● The ISDN PBX also provides analog extensions to allow analog phones to be connected. The analog phone with ext. no. 603 is connected at the ISDN PBX.

● The analog land line is connected to the Line port.

● The analog phone is connected to the Phone port and is using ext. no. 401 at VigorIPPBX 2820.

- The ISDN PBX's two internal lines are connected to the TE-interfaces of the VigorIPPBX 2820.

This page is left blank.

4.1 Create a LAN-to-LAN Connection Between Remote Office and Headquarter

The most common case is that you may want to connect to network securely, such as the remote branch office and headquarter. According to the network structure as shown in the below illustration, you may follow the steps to create a LAN-to-LAN profile. These two networks (LANs) should NOT have the same network address.

graph TD
    A["Router A 220.135.240.208"] -->|Headquarter 192.168.1.0| B["Router B 220.135.240.210"]
    B -->|Remote Branch Office 192.168.2.0| C["Router B 192.168.2.21"]
    C -->|Mail Server 192.168.1.2| D["Router B 192.168.2.22"]
    D -->|Marketing Department 192.168.3.0| E["Router B 192.168.2.21"]

Settings in Router A in headquarter:

1. Go to VPN and Remote Access and select Remote Access Control to enable the necessary VPN service and click OK.

2. Then,

For using PPP based services, such as PPTP, L2TP, you have to set general settings in PPP General Setup.

VPN and Remote Access >> PPP General Setup

PPP General Setup PPP/MP Protocol Dial-In PPP Authentication PAP or CHAP Dial-In PPP Encryption (MPPE) Optional MPPE Mutual Authentication (PAP) Yes No Username Password IP Address Assignment for Dial-In Users (When DHCP Disable set) Start IP Address 192.168.1.200 OK

For using IPSec-based service, such as IPSec or L2TP with IPSec Policy, you have to set general settings in IPSec General Setup, such as the pre-shared key that both parties have known.

VPN and Remote Access >> IPSec General Setup

VPN IKE/IPSec General Setup

Dial-in Set up for Remote Dial-in users and Dynamic IP Client (LAN to LAN).

IKE Authentication Method Pre-Shared Key Confirm Pre-Shared Key IPSec Security Method ✓ Medium (AH) Data will be authentic, but will not be encrypted. High (ESP) ✓ DES ✓ 3DES ✓ AES Data will be encrypted and authentic. OK Cancel

1. Go to LAN-to-LAN. Click on one index number to edit a profile.
2. Set Common Settings as shown below. You should enable both of VPN connections because any one of the parties may start the VPN connection.

VPN and Remote Access >> LAN to LAN

Profile Index : 1

1. Common Settings

Profile Name Branch1 Enable this profile VPN Connection Through: WAN1 First Netbios Naming Packet Pass Block Call Direction Both Dial-Out Dial-In Always on Idle Timeout 300 second(s) Enable PING to keep alive PING to the IP

1. Set Dial-Out Settings as shown below to dial to connect to Router B aggressively with the selected Dial-Out method.

If an IPSec-based service is selected, you should further specify the remote peer IP Address, IKE Authentication Method and IPSec Security Method for this Dial-Out connection.

2. Dial-Out Settings

Type of Server I am calling ○ ISDN ○ PPTP ● IPSec Tunnel ○ L2TP with IPSec Policy None Dial Number for ISDN or Server IP/Host Name for VPN. (such as 5551234, draytek.com or 123.45.67.09) 220.135.240.210 Link Type 64k bps Username ???? Password PPP Authentication PAP/CHAP VJ Compression On Off IKE Authentication Method ● Pre-Shared Key IKE Pre-Shared Key ○ Digital Signature(X.509) None IPSec Security Method ● Medium(AH) ○ High(ESP) DES without Authentication Advanced Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: □, □, □, □ Callback Function (CBGP) □ Require Remote to Callback □ Provide ISDN Number to Remote

If a PPP-based service is selected, you should further specify the remote peer IP Address, Username, Password, PPP Authentication and VJ Compression for this Dial-Out connection.

2. Dial-Out Settings

Type of Server I am calling ○ ISDN ● PPTP ○ IPSec Tunnel ○ L2TP with IPSec Policy None Dial Number for ISDN or Server IP/Host Name for VPN. (such as 5551234, draytek.com or 123.45.67.89) 220.135.240.210 Link Type 54k ops Username draytek Password •••••••• PPP Authentication PAP/CHAP VJ Compression On Off IKE Authentication Method ● Pre-Shared Key IKE Pre Shared Key ○ Digital Signature(X.509) None IPSec Security Method ● Medium(AH) ○ High(ESP) DES without Authentication Advanced Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: □, □, □, □, Callback Function (CBCP) □ Require Remote to Callback □ Provide ISDN Number to Remote

1. Set Dial-In settings to as shown below to allow Router B dial-in to build VPN connection.

If an IPSec-based service is selected, you may further specify the remote peer IP Address, IKE Authentication Method and IPSec Security Method for this Dial-In connection. Otherwise, it will apply the settings defined in IPSec General Setup above.

1. Dial-In Settings
   

Allowed Dial-In Type □ ISDN □ PPTP ✓ IPSec Tunnel □ L2TP with IPSec Policy None ✓ Specify ISDN CLID or Remote VPN Gateway Peer ISDN Number or Peer VPN Server IP 220.135.240.210 or Peer ID Username ???? Password VJ Compression On Off IKE Authentication Method ✓ Pre-Shared Key IKE Pre-Shared Key □ Digital Signature(X.509) None IPSec Security Method ✓ Medium (AH) High (ESP) ✓ DES 3DES AES Callback Function (CBCP) □ Enable Callback Function □ Use the Following Number to Callback Callback Number Callback Budget 0 minute(s)

If a PPP-based service is selected, you should further specify the remote peer IP Address, Username, Password, and VJ Compression for this Dial-In connection.

1. Dial-In Settings
   

Allowed Dial-In Type □ ISDN ✓ PPTP □ IPSec Tunnel □ L2TP with IPSec Policy None ✓ Specify ISDN CLID or Remote VPN Gateway Peer ISDN Number or Peer VPN Server IP 220.135.240.210 or Peer ID Username draytek Password •••••••• VJ Compression On Off IKE Authentication Method ✓ Pre-Shared Key IKE Pre-Shared Key □ Digital Signature(X.509) None IPSec Security Method ✓ Medium (AH) High (ESP) ✓ DES 3DES AES Callback Function (CBCP) □ Enable Callback Function □ Use the Following Number to Callback Callback Number Callback Budget 0 minute(s)

1. At last, set the remote network IP/subnet in TCP/IP Network Settings so that Router A can direct the packets destined to the remote network to Router B via the VPN connection.

2. TCP/IP Network Settings
   

My WAN IP 0.0.0.0 Remote Gateway IP 0.0.0.0 Remote Network IP 192.168.2.0 Remote Network Mask 255.255.255.0 More RIP Direction Disable From first subnet to remote network, you have to do Route Change default route to this VPN tunnel ( Only single WAN supports this ) OK Clear Cancel

Settings in Router B in the remote office:

1. Go to VPN and Remote Access and select Remote Access Control to enable the necessary VPN service and click OK.

2. Then, for using PPP based services, such as PPTP, L2TP, you have to set general settings in PPP General Setup.

VPN and Remote Access >> PPP General Setup

PPP General Setup PPP/MP Protocol Dial-In PPP Authentication PAP or CHAP Dial-In PPP Encryption (MPPE) Optional MPPE Mutual Authentication (PAP) Yes No Username Password IP Address Assignment for Dial-In Users (When DHCP Disable set) Start IP Address 192.168.2.200 OK

For using IPSec-based service, such as IPSec or L2TP with IPSec Policy, you have to set general settings in IPSec General Setup, such as the pre-shared key that both parties have known.

VPN and Remote Access >> IPSec General Setup

VPN IKE/IPSec General Setup Dial-in Set up for Remote Dial-in users and Dynamic IP Client (LAN to LAN). IKE Authentication Method Pre-Shared Key Confirm Pre-Shared Key IPSec Security Method ✓ Medium (AH) Data will be authentic, but will not be encrypted. High (ESP) ✓ DES ✓ 3DES ✓ AES Data will be encrypted and authentic. OK Cancel

1. Go to LAN-to-LAN. Click on one index number to edit a profile.

2. Set Common Settings as shown below. You should enable both of VPN connections because any one of the parties may start the VPN connection.

VPN and Remote Access >> LAN to LAN

Profile Index : 1

1. Common Settings

Profile Name Branch1 Enable this profile VPN Connection Through: WAN1 First Netbios Naming Packet Pass Block Call Direction Both Dial-Out Dial-In Always on Idle Timeout 300 second(s) Enable PING to keep alive PING to the IP

1. Set Dial-Out Settings as shown below to dial to connect to Router B aggressively with the selected Dial-Out method.

If an IPSec-based service is selected, you should further specify the remote peer IP Address, IKE Authentication Method and IPSec Security Method for this Dial-Out connection.

2. Dial-Out Settings

Type of Server I am calling ISDN PPTP IPSec Tunnel L2TP with IPSec Policy None Dial Number for ISDN or Server IP/Host Name for VPN. (such as 5551234, draytek.com or 123.45.07.89) 220.135 240.208 Link Type 64k bps Username draytek Password PPP Authentication PAP/CHAP VJ Compression On Off IKE Authentication Method Pre-Shared Key IKE Pre-Shared Key Digital Signature(X.509) None IPSec Security Method Medium(AH) High(ESP) DES without Authentication Advanced Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: Callback Function (CBCP) Require Remote to Callback Provide ISDN Number to Remote

If a PPP-based service is selected, you should further specify the remote peer IP Address, Username, Password, PPP Authentication and VJ Compression for this Dial-Out connection.

1. Dial-Out Settings
   

Type of Server I am calling ○ IISDN ● PPTP ○ IPSec Tunnel ○ L2TP with IPSec Policy None Dial Number for ISDN or Server IP/Host Name for VPN (such as 5551234, draytek.com or 123.45.67.89) 220.135.240 208 Link Type 64k bps Username draytek Password •••••••• PPP Authentication PAP/CHAP VJ Compression On Off IKE Authentication Method ● Pre-Shared Key IKE Pre-Shared Key ○ Digital Signature(X.509) None IPSec Security Method ● Medium(AH) ○ High(ESP) DES without Authentication Advanced Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: □, □, □, □ Callback Function (CBCP) □ Require Remote to Callback □ Provide ISDN Number to Remote

1. Set Dial-In settings to as shown below to allow Router A dial-in to build VPN connection.

If an IPSec-based service is selected, you may further specify the remote peer IP Address, IKE Authentication Method and IPSec Security Method for this Dial-In connection. Otherwise, it will apply the settings defined in IPSec General Setup above.

1. Dial-In Settings
   

Allowed Dial-In Type □ ISON □ PPTP ✓ IPSec Tunnel □ L2TP with IPSec Policy None ✓ Specify ISDN CLID or Remote VPN Gateway Peer ISDN Number or Peer VPN Server IP 220.135 240.208 or Peer ID Username draytek Password VJ Compression On Off IKE Authentication Method ✓ Pre-Shared Key IKE Pre-Shared Key □ Digital Signature(×.509) None IPSec Security Method ✓ Medium (AH) High (ESP) ✓ DES 3DES AES Callback Function (CBCP) □ Enable Callback Function □ Use the Following Number to Callback Callback Number Callback Budget 0 minute(s)

If a PPP-based service is selected, you should further specify the remote peer IP Address, Username, Password, and VJ Compression for this Dial-In connection.

3. Dial-In Settings

Allowed Dial-In Type □ ISDN ✓ PPTP □ IPSec Tunnel □ L2TP with IPSec Policy None ✓ Specify ISDN CLID or Remote VPN Gateway Peer ISDN Number or Peer VPN Server IP 220.135.240.208 or Peer ID Username draytek Password •••••••• VJ Compression On Off IKE Authentication Method ✓ Pre-Shared Key IKE Pre-Shared Key □ Digital Signature(X.509) None IPSec Security Method ✓ Medium (AH) High (ESP) ✓ DES 3DES AES Callback Function (CBCP) □ Enable Callback Function □ Use the Following Number to Callback Callback Number Callback Budget 0 minute(s)

1. At last, set the remote network IP/subnet in TCP/IP Network Settings so that Router B can direct the packets destined to the remote network to Router A via the VPN connection.

4. TCP/IP Network Settings

My WAN IP 0.0.0.0 Remote Gateway IP 0.0.0.0 Remote Network IP 192.168.1.0 Remote Network Mask 255.255.255.0 More RIP Direction Disable From first subnet to remote network, you have to do Route Change default route to this VPN tunnel ( Only single WAN supports this )

4.2 Create a Remote Dial-in User Connection Between the Teleworker and Headquarter

The other common case is that you, as a teleworker, may want to connect to the enterprise network securely. According to the network structure as shown in the below illustration, you may follow the steps to create a Remote User Profile and install Smart VPN Client on the remote host.

graph TD
    A["VPN Router 210.135.240.208"] -->|Dial In| B["Remote Network 192.168.1.0"]
    B --> C["192.168.1.2"]
    B --> D["192.168.1.3"]
    E["Computer"] --> F["Internet"]
    G["Computer"] --> H["Internet"]
    I["Internet"] --> J["Dial In"]
    K["Internet"] --> L["Dial In"]
    M["Internet"] --> N["Dial In"]
    O["Internet"] --> P["Dial In"]
    Q["Internet"] --> R["Dial In"]
    S["Internet"] --> T["Dial In"]
    U["Internet"] --> V["Dial In"]
    W["Internet"] --> X["Dial In"]
    Y["Internet"] --> Z["Dial In"]
    AA["Internet"] --> AB["Dial In"]
    AC["Internet"] --> AD["Dial In"]
    AE["Internet"] --> AF["Dial In"]
    AG["Internet"] --> AH["Dial In"]
    AI["Internet"] --> AJ["Dial In"]
    AK["Internet"] --> AL["Dial In"]
    AM["Internet"] --> AN["Dial In"]
    AO["Internet"] --> AP["Dial In"]
    AQ["Internet"] --> AR["Dial In"]
    AS["Internet"] --> AT["Dial In"]
    AU["Internet"] --> AV["Dial In"]
    AW["Internet"] --> AX["Dial In"]
    AY["Internet"] --> AZ["Dial In"]
    BA["Internet"] --> BB["Dial In"]
    BC["Internet"] --> BD["Dial In"]
    BE["Internet"] --> BF["Dial In"]
    BG["Internet"] --> BH["Dial In"]
    BI["Internet"] --> BJ["Dial In"]
    BK["Internet"] --> BL["Dial In"]
    BM["Internet"] --> BN["Dial In"]
    BO["Internet"] --> BP["Dial In"]
    BQ["Internet"] --> BR["Dial In"]
    BS["Internet"] --> BT["Dial In"]
    BU["Internet"] --> BV["Dial In"]
    BW["Internet"] --> BX["Dial In"]
    BY["Internet"] --> BZ["Dial In"]
    CA["Internet"] --> CB["Dial In"]
    CC["Internet"] --> CD["Dial In"]
    CE["Internet"] --> CF["Dial In"]
    CG["Internet"] --> CH["Dial In"]
    CI["Internet"] --> CJ["Dial In"]
    CK["Internet"] --> CR["Dial In"]
    CS["Internet"] --> CT["Dial In"]
    CU["Internet"] --> CV["Dial In"]
    CW["Internet"] --> CX["Dial In"]
    CY["Internet"] --> CZ["Dial In"]
    DA["Internet"] --> DB["Dial In"]
    DC["Internet"] --> DE["Dial In"]
    DF["Internet"] --> DG["Dial In"]
    DH["Internet"] --> DI["Dial In"]
    DJ["Internet"] --> DK["Dial In"]
    DL["Internet"] --> DV["Dial In"]
    DW["Internet"] --> DX["Dial In"]
    DXG["Internet"] --> DXH["Dial In"]
    DXJ["Internet"] --> DXK["Dial In"]

Settings in VPN Router in the enterprise office:

1. Go to VPN and Remote Access and select Remote Access Control to enable the necessary VPN service and click OK.

2. Then, for using PPP based services, such as PPTP, L2TP, you have to set general settings in PPP General Setup.

VPN and Remote Access >> PPP General Setup

PPP General Setup

PPP/MP Protocol Dial-In PPP Authentication PAP or CHAP Dial-In PPP Encryption (MPPE) Optional MPPE Mutual Authentication (PAP) Yes No Username Password IP Address Assignment for Dial-In Users (When DHCP Disable set) Start IP Address 192.168.1.200 OK

For using IPSec-based service, such as IPSec or L2TP with IPSec Policy, you have to set general settings in IKE/IPSec General Setup, such as the pre-shared key that both parties have known.

VPN IKE/IPSec General Setup

Dial-in Set up for Remote Dial-in users and Dynamic IP Client (LAN to LAN).

IKE Authentication Method

Pre-Shared Key

Confirm Pre-Shared Key

IPSec Security Method

Medium (AH)

Data will be authentic, but will not be encrypted.

High (ESP)

DES

3DES

AES

Data will be encrypted and authentic.

1. Go to Remote Dial-In User. Click on one index number to edit a profile.
2. Set Dial-In settings to as shown below to allow the remote user dial-in to build VPN connection.

If an IPSec-based service is selected, you may further specify the remote peer IP Address, IKE Authentication Method and IPSec Security Method for this Dial-In connection. Otherwise, it will apply the settings defined in IPSec General Setup above.

VPN and Remote Access >> Remote Dial-in User

Index No. 1

User account and Authentication Enable this account Idle Timeout 300 second(s) Allowed Dial-In Type ISDN PPTP IPSec Tunnel L2TP with IPSec Policy None Specify Remote Node Remote Client IP or Peer ISDN Number 220.135.240.210 or Peer ID Username ???? Password IKE Authentication Method Pre-Shared Key IKE Pre-Shared Key Digital Signature (X.509) None IPSec Security Method Medium (AH) High (ESP) DES 3DES AES Local ID (optional) Callback Function Check to enable Callback function Specify the callback number Callback Number Check to enable Callback Budget Control Callback Budget 30 minute(s)

If a PPP-based service is selected, you should further specify the remote peer IP Address, Username, Password, and VJ Compression for this Dial-In connection.

VPN and Remote Access >> Remote Dial-in User

Index No. 1

User account and Authentication Enable this account Idle Timeout 300 second(s) Allowed Dial-In Type ISDN PPTP IPSec Tunnel L2TP with IPSec Policy None Specify Remote Node Remote Client IP or Peer ISDN Number 220.135.240.210 or Peer ID Username draytek Password •••••••• IKE Authentication Method Pre-Shared Key IKE Pre-Shared Key Digital Signature (X.509) None IPSec Security Method Medium (AH) High (ESP) DES 3DES AES Local ID (optional) Callback Function Check to enable Callback function Specify the callback number Callback Number Check to enable Callback Budget Control Callback Budget 30 minute(s) OK Clear Cancel

Settings in the remote host:

1. For Win98/ME, you may use "Dial-up Networking" to create the PPTP tunnel to Vigor router. For Win2000/XP, please use "Network and Dial-up connections" or "Smart VPN Client", complimentary software to help you create PPTP, L2TP, and L2TP over IPSec tunnel. You can find it in CD-ROM in the package or go to www.draytek.com download center. Install as instructed.
2. After successful installation, for the first time user, you should click on the Step 0. Configure button. Reboot the host.

Smart VPN Client 3.2.2 (WinXP) Step 0. This step will add the ProhibitIPSec registry value to computer in order to configure a L2TP/IPSec connection using a pre-shared key or a L2TP connection. For more information, please read the article Q240262 in the Microsoft Knowledgement Base. Configure Step 1. Dial to ISP If you have already gotten a public IP, you can skip this step. Dial Step 2. Connect to VPN Server Connect Insert Remove Setup Status: No connection PPTP ISP VPN

1. In Step 2. Connect to VPN Server, click Insert button to add a new entry.

If an IPSec-based service is selected as shown below,

Dial To VPN Session Name: Office VPN Server IP/HOST Name(such as 123.45.67.89 or draytek.com) 192.168.1.1 User Name : draytek_user1 Password : Type of VPN ○ PPTP ○ L2TP ● IPSec Tunnel ○ L2TP over IPSec PPTP Encryption ● No encryption ○ Require encryption ○ Maximum strength encryption □ Use default gateway on remote network OK Cancel

You may further specify the method you use to get IP, the security method, and authentication method. If the Pre-Shared Key is selected, it should be consistent with the one set in VPN router.

IPSec Policy Setting My IP : 172.16.3.100 Type of IPSec Standard IPSec Tunnel Remote Subnet : 0 . 0 . 0 . 0 Remote Subnet Mask : 255 . 255 . 255 . 0 Virture IP DrayTek Virture Interface Obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP over IPSec) Specify an IP address IP Address: 192 . 168 . 1 . 201 Subnet Mask: 255 . 255 . 255 . 0 Security Method Medium(AH) High(ESP) MD5 DES Authority Method Pre-shared Key : ***** Certification Authority: Browse... OK Cancel

If a PPP-based service is selected, you should further specify the remote VPN server IP address, Username, Password, and encryption method. The User Name and Password should be consistent with the one set up in the VPN router. To use default gateway on remote network means that all the packets of remote host will be directed to VPN server then forwarded to Internet. This will make the remote host seem to be working in the enterprise network.

Dial To VPN Session Name: office VPN Server IP/HOST Name(such as 123.45.67.89 or draytek.com) 192.168.1.1 User Name : draytek_user1 Password : ***** Type of VPN ● PPTP ○ L2TP ○ IPSec Tunnel ○ L2TP over IPSec PPTP Encryption ○ No encryption ● Require encryption ○ Maximum strength encryption ✓ Use default gateway on remote network OK Cancel

1. Click Connect button to build connection. When the connection is successful, you will find a green light on the right down corner.

4.3 QoS Setting Example

Assume a teleworker sometimes works at home and takes care of children. When working time, he would use Vigor router at home to connect to the server in the headquarter office downtown via either HTTPS or VPN to check email and access internal database. Meanwhile, children may chat on Skype in the restroom.

1. Go to Bandwidth Management>>Quality of Service.

Bandwidth Management >> Quality of Service

General Setup Set to Factory Default Index Status Bandwidth Director Class Class Class Others UDP 1 2 3 Bandwidth Control WAN1 Enable 10000Kbps/10000Kbps Outbound 25% 25% 25% 25% Inactive Setup WAN2 Enable 10000Kbps/10000Kbps Outbound 25% 25% 25% 25% Inactive Setup Class Rule Index Name Rule Service Type Class 1 Edit Class 2 Edit Class 3 Edit

1. Click Setup link of WAN 1. Make sure the QoS Control on the left corner is checked. And select BOTH in Direction.

Bandwidth Management >> Quality of Service

WAN1 General Setup

Enable the QoS Control OUT Index IN OUT BOTH Class 1 Class 2

1. Return to previous page. Enter the Name of Index Class 1 by clicking Edit link. Type the name E-mail for Class 1.

Bandwidth Management >> Quality of Service

Class Index #1 Name E-mail NO Status Local Address Remote Address DiffServ CodePoint Service Type 1 Empty - - - - Add Edit Delete OK Cancel

1. For this index, the user will set reserved bandwidth (e.g., 25%) for E-mail using protocol POP3 and SMTP.

Bandwidth Management >> Quality of Service

WAN1 General Setup Enable the QoS Control BOTH Index Class Name Reserved_bandwidth Ratio Class 1 E-mail 25 % Class 2 25 % Class 3 25 % Others 25 % Enable UDP Bandwidth Control Limited_bandwidth Ratio 25 % Outbound TCP ACK Prioritize Online Statistics OK Clear Cancel

1. Return to previous page. Enter the Name of Index Class 2 by clicking Edit link. In this index, the user will set reserved bandwidth for HTTPS. And click OK.

Bandwidth Management >> Quality of Service

Class Index #2 Name HTTPS NO Status Local Address Remote Address DiffServ CodePoint Service Type 1 ○ Active Any Any ANY Add Edit Delete OK Cancel

1. Click Setup link for WAN1.

Bandwidth Management >> Quality of Service

General Setup								Set to Factory Default
Index	Status	Bandwidth	Direction	Class 1	Class 2	Class 3	Others	UDP Bandwidth Control
WAN1	Enable	10000Kbps/10000Kbps	Both	25%	25%	25%	25%	Inactive	Setup
WAN2	Enable	10000Kbps/10000Kbps	Outbound	25%	25%	25%	25%	Inactive	Setup

Class Rule
Index	Name	Rule	Service Type
Class 1	E-mail	Edit	Edit
Class 2	HTTPS	Edit
Class 3		Edit

1. Check Enable UDP Bandwidth Control on the bottom to prevent enormous UDP traffic of VoIP influent other application. Click OK.

Bandwidth Management >> Quality of Service

WAN1 General Setup Enable the QoS Control BOTH Index Class Name Reserved_bandwidth Ratio Class 1 E-mail 25 % Class 2 HTTPS 25 % Class 3 25 % Others 25 % Enable UDP Bandwidth Control Limited_bandwidth Ratio 25 % Outbound TCP ACK Prioritize Online Statistics OK Clear Cancel

1. If the worker has connected to the headquarter using host to host VPN tunnel, he may set up an index for it. Enter the Class Name of Index 3. In this index, he will set reserved bandwidth for 1 VPN tunnel.

graph LR
    A["Internet"] -->|VPN Tunnel| B["Private Network"]
    B -->|VPN Router 210.135.240.208| C["Server"]
    C -->|VPN Router 210.135.240.208| D["Server"]
    D -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| E["Server"]
    E -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| F["Server"]
    F -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| G["Server"]
    G -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| H["Server"]
    H -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| I["Server"]
    I -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| J["Server"]
    J -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| K["Server"]
    K -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| L["Server"]
    L -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| M["Server"]
    M -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| N["Server"]
    N -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| O["Server"]
    O -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| P["Server"]
    P -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| Q["Server"]
    Q -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| R["Server"]
    R -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| S["Server"]
    S -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| T["Server"]
    T -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| U["Server"]
    U -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| V["Server"]
    V -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| W["Server"]
    W -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| X["Server"]
    X -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| Y["Server"]
    Y -->|Cooperate Network 192.168.2.0| Z["Server"]

Bandwidth Management >> Quality of Service

Class Index #3

Name	VPN
NO	Status	Local Address	Remote Address	DiffServ CodePoint	Service Type
1 ○	Inactive	Any	Any	ANY	undefined
			Add Edit Delete
			OK Cancel

1. Click Edit to open the following window. Check the ACT box, first.

Bandwidth Management >> Quality of Service
Rule Edit

ACT
Local Address	Any Edit
Remote Address	Any Edit
DiffServ CodePoint	ANY
Service Type	ANY
Note: Please choose/setup the Service Type first.

1. Then click Edit of Local Address to set a worker's subnet address. Click Edit of Remote Address to set headquarter's IP address. Leave other fields and click OK.

Bandwidth Management >> Quality of Service

Rule Edit

ACT

Local Address

Remote Address

DiffServ CodePoint

Service Type

Note: Please choose/setup the Service Type first.

OK

Cancel

4.4 LAN – Created by Using NAT

An example of default setting and the corresponding deployment are shown below. The default Vigor router private IP address/Subnet Mask is 192.168.1.1/255.255.255.0. The built-in DHCP server is enabled so it assigns every local NATed host an IP address of 192.168.1.x starting from 192.168.1.10.

graph TD
    A["Internet"] --> B["NAT"]
    B --> C["DHCP Server"]
    C --> D["Private Subnet Router IP Address: 192.168.1.1"]
    D --> E["192.168.1.10"]
    D --> F["192.168.1.11"]
    D --> G["192.168.1.12"]
    D --> H["192.168.1.13"]

You can just set the settings wrapped inside the red rectangles to fit the request of NAT usage.

LAN>> General Setup

Ethernet TCP / IP and DHCP Setup

LAN IP Network Configuration For NAT Usage 1st IP Address 192.168.1.1 1st Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 For IP Routing Usage Enable Disable 2nd IP Address 192.168.2.1 2nd Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 2nd Subnet DHCP Server DHCP Server Configuration Enable Server Disable Server Relay Agent: 1st Subnet 2nd Subnet Start IP Address 192.168.1.10 IP Pool Counts 50 Gateway IP Address 192.168.1.1 DHCP Server IP Address for Relay Agent DNS Server IP Address Force DNS manual setting Primary IP Address Secondary IP Address

To use another DHCP server in the network rather than the built-in one of Vigor Router, you have to change the settings as show below.

graph TD
    A["Internet"] --> B["NAT"]
    B --> C["Router"]
    C --> D["192.168.1.22"]
    C --> E["192.168.1.11"]
    C --> F["192.168.3.22"]
    C --> G["192.168.3.11"]
    H["Public IP Address 220.135.240.207"] -.-> C
    I["Private Subnet Router IP Address:192.168.1.1"] -.-> C
    J["DHCP Server"] -.-> C

You can just set the settings wrapped inside the red rectangles to fit the request of NAT usage.

LAN >> General Setup

Ethernet TCP / IP and DHCP Setup

LAN IP Network Configuration For NAT Usage 1st IP Address 192.168.1.1 1st Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 For IP Routing Usage ○ Enable ● Disable 2nd IP Address 192.168.2.1 2nd Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 2nd Subnet DHCP Server DHCP Server Configuration ○ Enable Server ● Disable Server Relay Agent: ○ 1st Subnet ○ 2nd Subnet Start IP Address 192.168.1.10 IP Pool Counts 50 Gateway IP Address 192.168.1.1 DHCP Server IP Address for Relay Agent DNS Server IP Address □ Force DNS manual setting Primary IP Address Secondary IP Address

4.5 Upgrade Firmware for Your Router

Before upgrading your router firmware, you need to install the Router Tools. The file RTSxxx.exe will be asked to copy onto your computer. Remember the place of storing the execution file.

1. Go to www.draytek.com.
2. Access into Support >> Downloads. Please find out Firmware menu and click it. Search the model you have and click on it to download the newly update firmware for your router.

	About DrayTek	Products	Support	Education	Partners	Contact Us
Home > Support > Downloads

Downloads - Firmware

Model Name	Firmware Version	Release Date
Vigor120 series	3.2.2.1	26/06/2009
Vigor2100 series	2.6.2	26/02/2008
Vigor2104 series	2.5.7.3	13/02/2008
Vigor2110 series	3.3.0	25/06/2009
Vigor2200/XW/E	2.3.11	22/09/2004
Vigor2200Eplus	2.5.7	18/02/2009
Vigor2200USB	2.3.10	16/03/2005

Downloads

Firmware

Driver

Utility

Utility Introduction

Datasheet

R&TTE Certification

1. Access into Support >> Downloads. Please find out Utility menu and click it.

About DrayTek Products Support Education Partners Contact Us Home > Support > Utility

Utility
Tools Name	Release Date	Version	OS	Support Model
Router Tools	2009/06/18	4.2.0	MS-Windows	All Modules
Syslog Tools	2009/06/18	4.2.0	MS-Windows XP MS-Vista	All Modules
VigorPro Alert Notice Tools	2009/06/03	1.1.0 (Multi-language)	MS-Windows XP MS-Vista	VigorPro 100 seriesVigorPro 5500 seriesVigorPro 5510 seriesVigorPro 5300 series
Smart VPN Client	2009/05/25	3.6.3 (Multi-language)	MS-Windows XP MS-Vista	All Modules
Smart Monitor	2009/03/25	2.0	MS-Windows XP	Vigor2950 series

Downloads

Firmware

Driver

Utility

Utility Introduction

Datasheet

R&TTE Certification

1. Click on the link of Router Tools to download the file. After downloading the files, please decompressed the file onto your host.

2. Double click on the icon of router tool. The setup wizard will appear.

RTSv420

DrayTek Router Tools V4.2.0 Setup

DrayTek corp

Setup - DrayTek Router Tools V4.2.0 Welcome to the DrayTek Router Tools V4.2.0 Setup Wizard This will install DrayTek Router Tools V4.2.0 on your computer. It is recommended that you close all other applications before continuing. Click Next to continue, or Cancel to exit Setup. Next > Cancel

1. Follow the onscreen instructions to install the tool. Finally, click Finish to end the installation.

2. From the Start menu, open Programs and choose Router Tools XXX >> Firmware Upgrade Utility.

Firmware Upgrade Utility 3.5.1 Time Out(Sec.) 5 Router IP: ... Port 69 Firmware file: ... Password: Abort Send

1. Type in your router IP, usually 192.168.1.1.

2. Click the button to the right side of Firmware file typing box. Locate the files that you download from the company web sites. You will find out two files with different extension names, xxxx.all (keep the old custom settings) and xxxx.rst (reset all the custom settings to default settings). Choose any one of them that you need.

Firmware Upgrade Utility 3.5.1 Time Out(Sec.) 5 Router IP: 192.168.1.1 ... Port 69 Firmware file: C:\Documents and Settings\Carrie ... Password: Abort Send

1. Click Send.

Firmware Upgrade Utility 3.5.1 Time Out(Sec.) 5 Router IP: 192.168.1.1 ... Port 69 Firmware file: C:\Documents and Settings\Carrie ... Password: Abort Send Sending...

1. Now the firmware update is finished.

4.6 Request a certificate from a CA server on Windows CA Server

graph TD
    A["User requests a certificate issued by CA Server A and Saves it."] --> B["User imports the certificate as local certificate to Vigor Router via Web GUI"]
    B --> C["Internet"]
    D["User requests a certificate issued by CA Server A and Saves it."] --> E["User requests a certificate via Web GUI"]
    E --> F["User imports the certificate as local certificate to Vigor Router via Web GUI"]

1. Go to Certificate Management and choose Local Certificate.

Certificate Management >> Local Certificate

X509 Local Certificate Configuration

Name Subject Status Modify Local --- --- View Delete GENERATE IMPORT REFRESH X509 Local Certificato

1. You can click GENERATE button to start to edit a certificate request. Enter the information in the certificate request.

Certificate Management >> Local Certificate

Generate Certificate Request

Subject Alternative Name

Type

IP

Domain Name

draytek.com

Subject Name

Country (C)

State (ST)

Location (L)

Organization (0)

Organization Unit (OU)

Common Name (CN)

Email (E)

TW

Draytek

[e-mail]

Key Type

Key Size

RSA

1024 Bit

Generate

1. Copy and save the X509 Local Certificate Requet as a text file and save it for later use.

Certificate Management >> Local Certificate

X509 Local Certificate Configuration

Name Local /C=TW/ST=HS/O=Draytek/OU=RD/... GENEATE IMPORT REFRESH X509 Local Certificate Request ----BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST---- MIIDnTCCAGYCAQAXTELMAkGA1UEHMCVFcxCzAJDgNVEAgTAkhTMRAwBgYDVQQF EwdEcmF5dGVrMvNbTCBnzINBgkqhkiGSwOBQAEFALCBjQAvgYxCgYEAyZELVTVByt1x CTS3ZS3QdwIReItv1HnVwm/MFCOy9x+XWtNKG46jdGYLSAvOTduHH9Oz+CNUxO2G mASVORtj7HbNOdYa8Sp1xRrQFgck8nkbNLdiqp1Coc/lsYN/smGb4N+Pbo4VHO1VG dk1yAPfp/202OWsCddxh/Hz3Zys8n60CAwEAAaAAMA0GCSqGSId3DQEBBQUA4GB AGHB9071Y44sgXw1WnXHJvdFLDDwcQ01ZL1XRn+OVdheJjvaI5Cg1qzJQCKaDQ7 nacBqEclWChkZESOdyDc8mtIf7k+i045SeuY7nxswXvPIOn31JMJGMZvQSVrTYu oOvJGBHHwESkWb1RAZLSxvHjDcMX16csTlybedZSerJv ----END CERTIFICATE REQUEST---- View Delete

1. Connect to CA server via web browser. Follow the instruction to submit the request. Below we take a Windows 2000 CA server for example. Select Request a Certificate.

Microsoft Certificate Services - vgor Home Welcome You use this web site to request a certificate for your web browser, e-mail client, or other secure program. Once you acquire a certificate, you will be able to securely identify yourself to other people over the web, sign your e-mail messages, encrypt your e-mail messages, and more depending upon the type of certificate you request. Select a task: ○ Retrieve the CA certificate or certificate revocation list ● Request a certificate ○ Check on a pending certificate Next >

Select Advanced request.

Microsoft Certificate Services - vigor Home Choose Request Type Please select the type of request: you would like to make: ○ User certificate request User Certificate ○ Advanced request Next >

Select Submit a certificate request a base64 encoded PKCS #10 file or a renewal request using a base64 encoded PKCS #7 file

Microsoft Certificate Services -- vigor Home Advanced Certificate Requests You can request a certificate for yourself, another user, or a computer using one of the following methods. Note that the policy of the certification authority (CA) will determine the certificates that you can obtain. ○ Submit a certificate request to this CA using a form. ○ Submit a certificate request using a base64 encoded PKCS #10 file or a renewal request using a base64 encoded PKCS #7 file. ○ Request a certificate for a smart card on behalf of another user using the Smart Card Enrollment Station. You must have an enrollment agent certificate to submit a request for another user. Next >

Import the X509 Local Certificate Requet text file. Select Router (Offline request) or IPSec (Offline request) below.

Microsoft Certificates Services - vgor Submit A Saved Request Paste a base64 encoded PKCS #10 certificate request or PKCS #7 renewal request generated by an external application (such as a web server) into the request field to submit the request to the certification authority (CA). Saved Request: ----BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST---- M1BqjCCARCADwOTELMAkGA1UEBhMCVfcxEDAO BgKQnAIG9W0BCQEWEZByZINzQGRyTX102VsnY29t A4GNADCB1QKBgQDQT87wmIFCFH09/IsQnGOSIXk++ hX4bY6NtIP9dIeACGGaII/ccDOckdc2dPFFvIEcP3 x/0DA7CTVo/f0zpxroCw10TJLSjSO/Bn5vS09510 Browse for a file to insert. Certificate Template: Administrator Administrator Authenticated Session Basic EFS EFS Recovery Agent User IPSEC (Offline request) Router (Offline request) Subordinate Certification Authority Web Server Additional Attribut Attributes: Submit >

Then you have done the request and the server now issues you a certificate. Select Base 64 encoded certificate and Download CA certificate. Now you should get a certificate (.cer file) and save it.

1. Back to Vigor router, go to Local Certificate. Click IMPORT button and browse the file to import the certificate (.cer file) into Vigor router. When finished, click refresh and you will find the below window showing “----BEGINE CERTIFICATE----....”

Certificate Management >> Local Certificate

X509 Local Certificate Configuration

Name Local /C=TW/ST=HS/O=Draytek/OU=RD/... GENERATE IMPORT REFRESH X509 Local Certificate Request ----BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST---- MIIBnTCCAQYCAQAwXTELMAkGA1UEBhMCVFcxCzAJBgNVBAgTAkhTMRAwDgYDVQQK EwdEcmF5dGVrMQswCQYDVQQLEwJSRDEiMCAGCSqGSIb3DQEJARYTc3VwcG9ydEBk cmF5dGVrLmNvbTCBnzANBgkqhkiG9wOBAQEFAAOBjQAwgYkCgYEAy2ELVTVBytix OTSZSZQdw1ReltylHnVwm/MFCOy9x+XEwNKG46jdGY1LSAvJTduHH9Oz4OMWx02G mASV0Rtj7HbNOdYn88p1xRrQFgk8nkblMLdAqb1Ooc/lsYN/smGb4N+Pbo4VM01VO dKiyAPfp/Z02OWsCddxh/HzZ3Ys8m60CAwEAAaAAMA0GCSqGSIb3DQEBBQUAA4GB AGNB9071V44sgXwiWnXHJvdFLD0dwcQO1ZL1XRn+OVdheJvjaISCg1qzJQCKaDQ7 nacBqEc1WOchKzESOdyDc8mtIf7k+i045SeuY7nxswXvPIOn31JMJGMZvQSVrTYu sOvJGBHHwKSkWb1RAZL5xvHjDoMX16czT1ybedZSsrJw ----END CERTIFICATE REQUEST----

1. You may review the detail information of the certificate by clicking View button.

Name :	Local
Issuer :	/C=US/CN=vigor
Subject :	/emailAddress=[e-mail]/C=TWO=Draytek
Subject Alternative Name :	DNS:draytek.com
Valid From :	Aug 30 23:08:43 2005 GMT
Valid To :	Aug 30 23:17:47 2007 GMT

4.7 Request a CA Certificate and Set as Trusted on Windows CA Server

graph TD
    A["User requests a certificate issued by CA Server A and Saves it."] --> B["User imports the certificate as local certificate to Vigor Router via Web GUI"]
    B --> C["CA Server A"]
    B --> D["CA Server B"]
    C --> E["Internet"]
    D --> E

1. Use web browser connecting to the CA server that you would like to retrieve its CA certificate. Click Retrieve the CA certificate or certificate recoring list.

Microsoft Certificate Services - Microsoft Internet Explorer 搜索(E) 编辑(E) 视频(V) 我的最新(A) 工具(T) 跟踪(B) 上一页 搜寻 我的最新 推荐 网站(U): http://172.16.2.195/accepte/ msn 登录 配目提示 验证 时间戳/跟踪视窗 (315) Email Messenger 收藏 MSN Microsoft Certificate Services - vigor Home Welcome You use this web site to request a certificate for your web browser, e-mail client, or other secure program. Once you acquire a certificate, you will be able to securely identify yourself to other people over the web, sign your e-mail messages, encrypt your e-mail messages, and more depending upon the type of certificate you request. Select a task: ● Retrieve the CA certificate or certificate revocation list ○ Request a certificate ○ Check on a pending certificate Next >

1. In Choose file to download, click CA Certificate Current and Base 64 encoded, and Download CA certificate to save the .cer. file.

Microsoft Certificate Services - Microsoft Internet Explorer 搜索(S) 编辑(E) 硬式(O) 我的易受(A) 工具(T) 読号(B) 上一目 http://172.16.2.17%bertvinkertwac.asp msn 搜寻 展目提示 选项 打印快照密 (19) Hotmail Messages 我的 MDR Microsoft Certificate Services - vigor Home Retrieve The CA Certificate Or Certificate Revocation List Install this CA certification path to allow your computer to trust certificates issued from this certification authority. It is not necessary to manually install the CA certification path if you request and install a certificate from this certification authority, because the CA certification path will be installed for you automatically. Choose file to download: CA Certificate Current [vigor(1)] Previous [vigor] ○ DER encoded or ○ Base 64 encoded Download CA certificate Download CA certification path Download latest certificate revocation list

1. Back to Vigor router, go to Trusted CA Certificate. Click IMPORT button and browse the file to import the certificate (.cer file) into Vigor router. When finished, click refresh and you will find the below illustration.

Certificate Management >> Trusted CA Certificate

X509 Trusted CA Certificate Configuration

Name	Subject	Status	Modify
Trusted CA-1	/C=US/CN=vigor	Not Yet Valid	View	Delete
Trusted CA-2	---	---	View	Delete
Trusted CA-3	---	---	View	Delete

IMPORT

REFRESH

1. You may review the detail information of the certificate by clicking View button.

Name :	Trusted CA-1
Issuer :	/C=US/CN=vigor
Subject :	/C=US/CN=vigor
Subject Alternative Name :	DNS:draytek.com
Valid From :	Aug 30 23:08:43 2005 GMT
Valid To :	Aug 30 23:17:47 2007 GMT

Close

Note: Before setting certificate configuration, please go to System Maintenance >> Time and Date to reset current time of the router first.

4.8 How to achieve DID (Direct Inward Dialing) with SIP Alias?

SIP Alias is an alternative address for your main SIP Address. Normally, when you have a user account for one ITSP, you have one SIP address provided by the ITSP. However, with SIP alias, you can own multiple SIP addresses over one user account. When you register with a regular user account, alias are registered as well as the main SIP address. Then, when somebody dials the alias, the SIP URI bound to the alias will ring.

DID - Direct-Inward-Dial (also called DDI in Europe) is a service offered by a telephone company that provides a block of telephone numbers associated with one phone line for calling into a company's PBX system. The employees can have their extension numbers respectively, and the caller, via DID function on Vigor router, can dial to any one of the extension numbers directly without passing through auto-attendant.

Below shows a scenario:

[e-mail] is the main SIP trunk set on VigorIPPBX 2820, and [e-mail] is set as SIP alias on VigorIPPBX 2820 as well. Both share the same SIP account. When you complete the registration for the main SIP trunk, an additional registration for the SIP alias will be automatically performed. Therefore, in this case, if Benson wants to call Jacky, he has two options. One is using auto-attendant by calling [e-mail]. After hearing the greeting, Benson should press the extension number 101 to call Jacky. The other is using DID by calling [e-mail], the call will be forwarded to extension number 101 directly by the PBX system

graph TD
    A["Vigor 2820 IP PBX"] -->|LAN Port| B["Internet"]
    B -->|SIP Trunk: [e-mail]| C["iptel.org"]
    B -->|sip alias [e-mail] forward to Extension 101| D["IP Phone Jacky (Ext. 101)"]
    D --> E["Computer"]
    C --> F["IP Phone Benson (benson.123@iptel.c)"]

Follow the steps below to setup SIP Alias and achieve DID.

1. Create a SIP Alias. First of all, make sure your VoIP Service Provider supports SIP Alias. For example, iptel.org provides such service. When you register an SIP account [e-mail] on iptel.org, you will be provided with a sip alias [e-mail] as well. See below.

iptel.org user management my account phone book missed calls accounting speed dial general privacy forward other your password: retype password: first name: tt last name: yy email: yinglqy@hotmail.c phone: language: English timezone: Asia/Shanghai your aliases: sip:[e-mail] sip:[e-mail] Save

1. Setup SIP account on VigorIPPBX 2820. Open the IP PBX>>Line Setting>>SIP Trunk page and configure the SIP account as follows.

IP PBX >> SIP Trunk List

SIP Trunk Index 1

Profile Name	iptel	(11 char max.)
Register via	Auto
SIP Local Port	5070
Domain/Realm	iptel.org	(63 char max.)
Proxy	iptel.org	(63 char max.)
Proxy Port	5060	(63 char max.)
Display Name	866668	(23 char max.)
Account Number/Name	866668	(63 char max.)
Authentication ID	866668	(63 char max.)
Password	****	(63 char max.)
Expiry Time	1 hour 3600 sec
Trunk number	001	(3 char max.)
Office hours answer mode	Auto Attendant
Non-Office hours answer mode	Auto Attendant

1. Setup SIP Alias on VigorIPPBX 2820. Open the IP PBX>>SIP Trunk List page and click on Alias List to enter the SIP Alias setup page.

IP PBX >> SIP Trunk List

SIP Trunk List Refresh Seconds: 5 | Refresh |
Index	Profile Name	Domain/Realm	Proxy	Account Number/Name	Trunk Number	Status
1.	iptel	iptel.org	iptel.org	866668	001	-
2.					002	-
3.					003	-
4.					004	-
5.					005	-
6.					006	-

R: Success registered on SIP server --:Fail to register on SIP server

Alias List

IP PBX >> Alias

Alias List

Index	Profile Name	Number	Office Hours	Non Office Hours	Active	Trunk
1.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
2.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
3.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
4.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
5.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
6.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
7.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
8.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
9.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
10.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No

<< 1.10 | 11.20 | 21.30 | 31.40 | 41.50 >> Next >>

1. Press one index and input the SIP Alias in the Alias Number fields. Select the associated SIP account from Alias of SIP Trunk, which was created in step 2. Route the call to Jacky by selecting Forward To Extension and the extension profile 1-101.

IP PBX >> Alias

Alias 1.

Active	Enable	Disable
Alias Name	Jacky
Alias Number	3400017904
Alias of SIP Trunk	1 - iptel
Answer Mode
Office hours answer mode	Forward To Extension	1 - 101 Extension
Non-Office hours answer mode	Auto Attendant

Alias List

Index	Profile Name	Number	Office Hours	Non Office Hours	Active	Trunk
1.	Jacky	3400017904	Ext.101	Auto Attendant	Yes	1 - iptel
2.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
3.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
4.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
5.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
6.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
7.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
8.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
9.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
10.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No

1. The configuration is completed. Make sure the extension number 101 is registered. Next, Benson can make a direct call to Jacky by calling [e-mail].

IP PBX >> PBX Status

Index	Name	Extension	IP	Status	Peer ID
1	Jacky	101	192.168.1.12	Online
2	Stephen	222	192.168.1.10	Online
3	Joseph	223	202.211.100.61	Online
4	Mark	204		Offline
5	Mandy	221	192.168.1.1	Online
6	---	---		Offline
7	---	---		Offline
8	---	---		Offline
9	---	---		Offline
10	---	---		Offline

<< 1.10 | 11.20 | 21.30 | 31.40 | 41.50 | 51.52 >> Next >>

4.9 How to use Call Parking?

Call parking allows you to hold the call on a telephone set and pick it up at a different phone. Below shows a brief illustration for call parking application.

graph TD
    A["LAN Port"] -->|Internet| B["iptel.org"]
    B --> C["IP Phone Benson Ext: 886 (benson.123@iptel.c)"]
    B --> D["IP Phone A Ext: 222"]
    B --> E["IP Phone B Ext: 333"]

Benson calls extension 222. Stephen picks IP Phone A up and tells Benson that he wants to park the call for transferring to another phone to continue the conversation.

To park a call, Stephen can perform the following actions on IP Phone A:

1. Press the transfer button on IP Phone A.
2. Dial the call park number, 777.
3. Stephen hears an announcement that "Your parking number is XXXXX" (for example 22201).
4. Hang Up.

Please take notice:

• If there is no transfer button on your phone, please try the # button. Or, check the user guide of your hardware/software IP phone to find the button for call parking.
• The call park number is defined in the IP PBX>>PBX System>>SIP Proxy Setting page as Parking Server Number.

IP PBX >> PBX System

SIP Proxy Setting

SIP Local Port	5060
SIP Proxy Realm	PBX.com
Parking Server Number	777
RTP Local Port Start	15050
RTP Local Port End	20000

1. When an incoming call is parked, a certain extension will be assigned to it temporarily and the number will be announced to you. In this example, the announcement “Your parking number is 22201” informs you of the new extension 22201. Next, you can dial the new extension to retrieve the call from a different phone. The new extension number may also be displayed on your IP phone.
2. After you hang up the call, it is left on hold with the new extension and the caller will be listening to the music on hold.
3. The call will remain on hold before someone retrieves it or the caller hangs up.

To retrieve a parked call, Stephen can perform following actions on IP Phone B:

1. Pick up the phone and listen for a dial tone.
2. Dial 22201(the announced new extension) to continue the conversation.

Call Parking Usage

Call Parking is similar to Call Transfer. But Call Transfer is a “blind” transfer. Sometimes you are required to confirm if a person is available or not before transferring a call. For example, Mike is manager and Jane is his secretary. When there is an incoming call, Jane always parks the call. After the announcement, Jane hangs up and dials the extension of Mike and informs him of the park number to retrieve the call. If Mike refuses to take the call, Jane hangs up and dials park number by herself to pick up the call back and make some excuses. With Call Transfer, Jane can just simply transfer the call to Mike directly.

Another useful scenario: During a conversation, you may need to go to another office for some reason (for example, to check an important file). You can park the call and continue the conversation from another phone at the other office.

4.10 How to set up VigorPhone 350 with Vigor/PPBX2820 series by using Auto-Provisioning?

DrayTek VigorIPPBX 2820/VigorIPPBX 2820n supports the function of auto-provisioning. VigorPhone 350 is also capable of auto-provisioning, it can get a configuration text file from the VigorIPPBX 2820 series. The configuration file contains SIP settings that the SIP devices can register with VigorIPPBX 2820 series.

graph TD
    A["VigorIPPBX 2820"] -->|Internet| B["VigorSwitch P2260 (PoE Switch)"]
    A --> C["VigorPhone 350"]
    A --> D["VigorPhone 350"]
    B --> E["Network Port"]
    C --> F["Network Port"]
    D --> G["Network Port"]

1. Configure the extension number and password for each IP phone on VigorIPPBX 2820. You can configure extensions from IP PBX Wizard.

VigorIPPBX 2820 Quick Start Wizard IPPBX Wizard Online Status WAN LAN NAT System Status Model Name : Vigor2820 PBX Firmware Version : 3.5.3 Build Date/Time : Sep 8 2009 18:07:32 ADSL Firmware Version : 211801_A Annex A

1. Click IPPBX Wizard to get the first screen as shown below.

IPPBX Wizard

Extension & Groups Setup : Index 1

Extension Group Name:	VigorPhone	(for example : sales)
Extension Group Number:	910	(for example : 100)
Start Number of the extension Group:	911	(for example : 101)
Number of extensions in this group:	10	(for example : 10, max = 20)

Index	Group Name	Group Extension	Hunt List(Max 20 Extension)
1.	VigorPhone	910	911-920
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Type the extension group name, group number, start number, and number of extension fields. Click OK to save them. The new added group will be displayed on the screen. Then click Next to access into next web page.

1. In the SIP Trunk Setup page, you can set up to six SIP profiles outside lines at one time.

IPPBX Wizard

Sip Trunk Setup : Index 1

Profile Name:		(11 characters max.)
Domain/Realm:		(63 characters max.)
Proxy:		(63 characters max.)
Account Number/Name:		(63 characters max.)
Password:		(63 characters max.)
Trunk number:	001	(3 characters max.)
	OK

Index	Profile Name	Domain/Realm	Proxy	Account Number/Name	Trunk Number
1.					001
2.					002
3.					003
4.					004
5.					005
6.					006

Type the profile name, domain/realm, proxy, account number/name, password and trunk number fields, then click OK to save them. The new added profile will be displayed on the screen.

Index	Profile Name	Domain/Realm	Proxy	Account Number/Name	Trunk Number
1.	SalesMarket	192.168.1.55	nat.draytel.org:5065	salesgroup	001
2.					002
3.					003
4.					004
5.					005
6.					006

1. Click Next to access into office hours setup page.

IPPBX Wizard

Office Hours Setup

Now, You can make the work time schedule of your office.

When do you start working in the morning

When do you have a rest at noon

When do you start working in the afternoon

When do you leave the office

Is this schedule available at weekend?

Hour : Min

Please specify office hours including starting point and ending point on duty day(s). Then, click Finish to save the settings and exit the wizard.

work time schedule of your office.

ing in the morning

t at noon

ing in the afternoon

office

at weekend?

Hour :

Min

1. After finishing the Wizard, please go to IPPBX>Extension to configure the Extension Number and the Password settings.

IP PBX >> Extension

Internal Phone Extension

Index	Ext.	Name	Email Address	Outgoing Call	Status
1.	911	---		SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 ISDN1-TE ISDN2-TE	v
2.	912	---		SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 ISDN1-TE ISDN2-TE	v
3.	913	---		SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 ISDN1-TE ISDN2-TE	v
4.	914	---		SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 ISDN1-TE ISDN2-TE	v
5.	915	---		SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 ISDN1-TE ISDN2-TE	v

IP PBX >> Extension Profile

Internal Phone Extension Index 1

Internal Phone Extension Active Enable Disable Extension Number 911 User Name --- Authentication Password ●●● E-mail Address Send a test e-mail Voice mail Password ●●● MWI ○ Notify User who Subscribed ○ Force Notify User Outgoing Call Use ✓ SIP1 ✓ SIP2 ✓ SIP3 ✓ SIP4 ✓ SIP5 ✓ SIP6 ✓ ISDN1-TE ✓ ISDN2-TE Answer Mode No answer after 120 sec then Keep Ring Busy then Do Nothing Not on-line Do Nothing

1. Then connect VigorPhone to the network. Each user of VigorPhone can get the extension number/password respectively.
2. The log-in request will be displayed on the screen of the phone. Please input the extension number. Press OK.

Ext Number 911■ 13:12:05 123 Delete Clear OK Exit

1. Next, input the password. Press OK.

Ext Password *** 13:12:05 123 Delete Clear OK Exit

1. VigorPhone can automatically configure itself with settings coming from VigorIPPBX 2820. Successful message will be shown as below. Now, all the configurations have been done.

13:12:06 Auto Configuration Ext 911 Success Icom Missed DND P.Book

1. Now, the extension number has been registered by VigorPhone successfully. (See the number on the right side of the arrow.)

Thursday 13:12:08 Oct 15 911 Icom Missed DND P.Book

4.11 How to configure Hunt Group?

Hunt Group allows a caller to automatically find an available callee from among a group of extensions. You may assign some extensions to a Hunt Group. The incoming call will search for the first available extension. Each extension will be tried until a “free” extension is reached. If an IP phone is busy or hasn’t registered its extension to VigorIPPBX 2820 yet, its extension will be skipped. The caller hears the busy tone only when all lines are engaged.

VigorIPPBX 2820 supports up to 10 Hunt Groups. Up to 20 extensions can be assigned to each Hunt Group. And each extension can be assigned to more than one Hunt Group.

IP PBX >> PBX System

PBX System

SIP Proxy Setting Hunt Group Voice Mail Configuration Office Hours Auto Attendant Wizard Prompt Maintenance Phone Setting

There are two modes (Hunt Rule) supported by VigorIPPBX 2820, Simultaneously and Sequentially.

Simultaneously — If an incoming call rings on a Hunt Group, all extensions belong to this group will ring except for the IP phones which are busy or offline.

Sequentially — If an incoming call rings on a Hunt Group, the first extension in the list is tried. If the call is not answered within 15 seconds, it will move to the next available extension in the list. The IP phones which are busy or offline will be skipped.

Example 1 for Simultaneously

Extension 100 is configured as a Hunt Group's extension number. When someone calls 100, VigorIPPBX 2820 tries to ring 101, 102 and 103 simultaneously at once.

Ext 101 is busy, no ring

Ext 102 rings - answers call

Ext 103 is available for next call - no ring

Example 2 for Sequentially

Extension 200 is configured as a Hunt Group's extension number. When someone calls 200, VigorIPPBX 2820 tries to ring 201 then 202 then 203 then 204.

Ext 201 rings - no answer, then moves to next

Ext 202 is busy, no ring and moves to next

Ext 203 rings - answers call

Ext 204 is available for next call – no ring

How to setup Hunt Group for Example 1 and 2?

1. Configure extensions for IP phones.

IP PBX >> Extension

Internal Phone Extension

Index	Ext.	Name	Email Address	Outgoing Call	Status
1	101	Jacky		SIP1	v
2	102	Stephen		SIP1	v
3	103	Joseph		SIP1	v
4	201	James		SIP1	v
5	202	Kevin		SIP1	v
6	203	Jimmy		SIP1	v
7	204	Fred		SIP1	v
8	---	---		SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 ISDN2-TE	x
9	---	---		SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 ISDN2-TE	x
10	---	---		SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 ISDN2-TE	x

1. Open IP PBX >> PBX System >> Hunt Group. Configure the following two groups.

IP PBX >> PBX System

Hunt Group

Index	Group Name	Group Extension	Hunt List (Max 20 Extension)
1.	Sales	100	101, 102, 103
2.	RD	200	201, 202, 203, 204
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

For the Hunt Group of Sales department, Hunt Group Name is locally significant for identification. Hunt Group Extension must be different from all the other extension numbers. Select Simultaneously as Hunt Rule.

Hunt Groups Index 1

Hunt Group Name Hunt Group Extension Hunt Rule Sales 100 Simultaneously Hunt List (Maximum Of Group Member:20) Available 4 - 201 5 - 202 6 - 203 7 - 204 8 - --- 9 - --- 10 - --- 11 - --- 12 - --- 13 - --- 14 - --- 15 - --- 16 - --- 17 - --- 18 - --- 19 - --- 20 - --- 21 - --- 22 - --- 23 - --- 24 - --- Add >> Add All Remove << Remove All Move Up Move Down Chosen 1 - 101 2 - 102 3 - 103

For the Hunt Group of RD department, Hunt Group Name is locally significant for identification. Hunt Group Extension must be different from all the other extension numbers. Select Sequentially as Hunt Rule. You can use Move Up and Move Down buttons to adjust the sequence of the extensions.

Hunt Groups Index 2

Hunt Group Name RD Hunt Group Extension 200 Hunt Rule Sequentially Hunt List (Maximum Of Group Member:20) Available 1 - 101 2 - 102 3 - 103 8 - --- 9 - --- 10 - --- 11 - --- 12 - --- 13 - --- 14 - --- 15 - --- 16 - --- 17 - --- 18 - --- 19 - --- 20 - --- 21 - --- 22 - --- 23 - --- 24 - --- 25 - --- Add >> Add All Remove <> Remove All Move Up Move Down 4 - 201 5 - 202 6 - 203 7 - 204 Chosen

How to call a Hunt Group?

Method 1:

You may call the VigorIPPBX 2820 first, and dial the Hunt Group Extension number. In the above two examples, when you dial 100, extensions 101, 102 and 103 ring at the same time. When you dial 200, extension 201 rings first, then 202, next 203 and finally 204 rings.

Method 2:

With auto-attendant, after hearing the greeting, you may dial 1. The extensions 101, 102 and 103 ring simultaneously. Or, you may dial 2 and extension 201 ring first, then 202, next 203 and finally 204 rings.

IP PBX >> PBX System

Auto Attendant Wizard - Office Hours

graph LR
    A["Caller calls Auto Attendant"] --> B["Auto Attendant answers the call, plays office hours greeting (prompt 5), and waits for caller input"]
    B --> C["Key"]
    C --> D["Action"]
    D --> E["0"]
    D --> F["1"]
    D --> G["2"]
    D --> H["3"]
    D --> I["4"]
    D --> J["5"]
    D --> K["6"]
    D --> L["7"]
    D --> M["8"]
    D --> N["9"]
    E --> O["Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    F --> P["Ring Hunt Group 1 - 100"]
    G --> Q["Ring Hunt Group 2 - 200"]
    H --> R["Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    I --> S["Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    J --> T["Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    K --> U["Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    L --> V["Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    M --> W["Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    N --> X["Ring Extension 1 - 101"]

Tip: If users in the Hunt Group leave their desks, they would turn on Do Not Disturb at their extensions. Thus, the incoming call will search next available extension immediately.

4.12 How to use Auto Attendant?

IVR, Interactive Voice Response, is a technology that allows callers to interact with the communication system over the telephone.

Auto Attendant is a technology that automates interactions with telephone callers. It allows callers to be automatically transferred to an extension without the intervention from a receptionist or telephone operator.

VigorIPPBX 2820 supports IVR and Auto Attendant. When someone calls in, VigorIPPBX 2820 automatically plays the recorded message like "Thanks for calling Draytek Corporation. For sales, press 1; for support, press 2, etc." After pressing a number, the caller will be transferred to the extension he would like to or an operator. You can customize the auto attendant to play greeting messages based on the time and day settings such as office hours, after office hours, weekends and holidays

Configure Auto Attendant on VigorIPPBX 2820

We will take an example to explain the common configuration. In this example, we will present callers with options so that they can be directed to the proper extension. During the office hours, the system will ask the users to dial 1 for support department, 2 for sales department, 3 for product advertisement and 0 to speak with the receptionist. And, during the non-office hours, the system will play product advertisement.

graph TD
    A["User\nSIP Account: [e-mail]"] --> B["SIP Account: [e-mail]"]
    B --> C["Office Hour greeting"]
    B --> D["Non-Office hours greeting"]
    B --> E["LAN Port"]
    E --> F["Support Dept. Hunt Group 200"]
    E --> G["Benson Ext. 202"]
    E --> H["Sales Dept. Ext. 501"]
    E --> I["Receptionist Ext. 101"]
    F --> J["Graham Ext. 201"]

1. The first step is to record the prompts.

For the office hours greeting:

• Connect a phone to the FXS port on VigorIPPBX 2820 directly.
  ● Dial **** to access IVR system.
• After hearing the prompt, dial 1155# to start recording the Prompt 5 for the office hours greeting. "Thank you for calling Draytek Company. If you know the

extension of the person you'd like to reach, you may dial it now. Otherwise, please choose from the following options. For technical support, press “1”. For sales, press “2”. For new products introduction, press “3”. Otherwise press “0” for the receptionist.”

• When you finish the record, press #
• Dial 1255# to hear the office hours greeting (Prompt 5) that you have recorded. If you are not satisfied with the result, dial 1155# to record it again.

For the non-office hours greeting:

• Connect a phone to the FXS port on VigorIPPBX 2820 directly.
• Dial **** to access IVR system.
• After hearing the prompt, dial 1156# to start recording the Prompt 6 for the non-office hours greeting. “Thank you for calling Draytek Company. We are currently unavailable to take your call. Our business hours are nine to six, Monday through Friday. If you want to leave a message, please press “0” to leave a message for the receptionist. If you want to get new product information, please press 1 through 9”.
  ● When you finish the record, press #.
• Dial 1256# to hear the non-office hours greeting (Prompt 6) that you have recorded.
• If you are not satisfied with the result, dial 1156# to record it again.

For the new product advertisement:

• Connect a phone to the FXS port on VigorIPPBX 2820 directly.
• Dial **** to access IVR system.
• After hearing the prompt, dial 1151# to start recording the Prompt 1 for the new product advertisements. “The VigorIPPBX 2820 is an IP-PBX integrated with DrayTek's fully-featured Vigor2820 ADSL Router...”
  ● When you finish the record, press #.
• Dial 1251# to hear the new product advertisement (Prompt 1) that you have recorded.

• If you are not satisfied with the result, dial 1151# to record it again.

• After the sounds have been recorded, you have to create the extensions that needed in the IVR. Extensions for each phone are configured as follows.

IP PBX >> Extension

Internal Phone Extension

Index	Ext.	Name	Email Address	Outgoing Call	Status
1.	101	receptionist		SIP1	v
2.	501	Jacky		SIP1	v
3.	201	Graham		SIP1	v
4.	202	Benson		SIP1	v
5.	205	Kevin		SIP1	v
6.	203	Jimmy		SIP1	v
7.	204	Fred		SIP1	v
8.	---	---		SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 ISDN2-TE	x
9.	---	---		SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 ISDN2-TE	x
10.	---	---		SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 ISDN2-TE	x

<< 1.10 | 11.20 | 21.30 | 31.40 | 41.50 >> Next >>

Configure extension for the support department. It is a hunt group. If the hunt rule is set with Sequentially, the extension 201 ring first, then 202, 205, 203 and finally 204 rings one by one when someone calls 200. If the hunt rule is set with Simultaneously, extensions 201, 202, 203, 204 and 205 ring at the same time when someone calls 200.

IP PBX >> PBX System

Hunt Groups Index 1

Hunt Group Name	Support
Hunt Group Extension	200
Hunt Rule	Sequentially

1. Choose Auto Attendant for Office hours and Non-office hours for the SIP trunk. In this example, when you call [e-mail] during the office hours, you will hear office hours greeting (Prompt 5): during the non-office hours, you will hear the non-office hours greeting (Prompt 6).

IP PBX >> SIP Trunk List

SIP Trunk Index 1

Profile Name Register via SIP Local Port Domain/Reallm Proxy Proxy Port Display Name Account Number/Name Authentication ID Password Expiry Time Trunk number Office hours answer mode Non-Office hours answer mode iptel.org iptel.org 5070 5060 866669 866669 866669 **** 1 hour 3600 sec 001 Auto Attendant Auto Attendant

Note: SIP Local Port can not be equal to PBX Proxy Port.

1. Make sure the system time is synchronized from the System Maintenance >> Time and Date page.

System Maintenance >> Time and Date

Time Information

Current System Time 2007 Jun 28 Thu 5 : 53 : 42 Inquire Time

Time Setup

Use Browser Time Use Internet Time Client Time Protocol NTP (RFC-1305) Server IP Address pool.ntp.org Time Zone (GMT) Greenwich Mean Time : Dublin Enable Daylight Saving Automatically Update Interval 30 min OK Cancel

1. Configure the Office hours from the IP PBX >> PBX System >> Office Hours setup page. Suppose the holidays are January 1 to January 3, January 20 and February 15. Based on the above configuration, the router will configure the settings for the non-office hours automatically.

IP PBX >> PBX System

Office Hours

Index Enable		Office Hour Start (HHMM)			Office Hour End (HHMM)			Weekdays
1		09	00	00	18	00	00	Sun	Mon	Tue	Wed	Thu	Fri	Sat
2		00	00	00	00	00	00	Sun	Mon	Tue	Wed	Thu	Fri	Sat
3		00	00	00	00	00	00	Sun	Mon	Tue	Wed	Thu	Fri	Sat
4		00	00	00	00	00	00	Sun	Mon	Tue	Wed	Thu	Fri	Sat
5		00	00	00	00	00	00	Sun	Mon	Tue	Wed	Thu	Fri	Sat
6		00	00	00	00	00	00	Sun	Mon	Tue	Wed	Thu	Fri	Sat
7		00	00	00	00	00	00	Sun	Mon	Tue	Wed	Thu	Fri	Sat
8		00	00	00	00	00	00	Sun	Mon	Tue	Wed	Thu	Fri	Sat
9		00	00	00	00	00	00	Sun	Mon	Tue	Wed	Thu	Fri	Sat
10		00	00	00	00	00	00	Sun	Mon	Tue	Wed	Thu	Fri	Sat

Holiday Setting

Month	Date
1	1-3, 20
2	15
3

1. Open Auto Attendant Wizard and configure the Office hours rule. The rule is set as follows:

● Key 1 for support department - Press 1 for technical support.
● Key 2 for sales department - Press 2 for sales.
Key 3 for advertisement - Press 3 to listen to new products' introduction.
● Key 0 for receptionist - Press 0 to speak with an operator.

IP PBX >> PBX System

Auto Attendant Wizard - Office Hours

graph LR
    A["Caller calls Auto Attendant"] --> B["Auto Attendant answers the call, plays office hours greeting (prompt 5), and waits for caller input"]
    B --> C["Key"]
    C --> D["Action"]
    D --> E["0"]
    D --> F["1"]
    D --> G["2"]
    D --> H["3"]
    D --> I["4"]
    D --> J["5"]
    D --> K["6"]
    D --> L["7"]
    D --> M["8"]
    D --> N["9"]
    E --> O["Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    F --> P["Ring Hunt Group 1 - 200"]
    G --> Q["Ring Extension 2 - 501"]
    H --> R["Plays Prompt Prompt 1"]
    I --> S["Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    J --> T["Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    K --> U["Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    L --> V["Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    M --> W["Ring Extension 1 - 101"]

1. Press Next to configure settings for Non-office hours. Key 0 is designated for Ring Extension and here it is set for receptionist. For other keys, we let the users to listen to new product introduction.

IP PBX >> PBX System

Auto Attendant Wizard - Non-Office Hours

graph LR
    A["Caller calls Auto Attendant"] --> B["Auto Attendant answers the call, plays non-office hours greeting (prompt 6), and waits for caller input"]
    B --> C["Key"]
    C --> D["Action"]
    D --> E["0"]
    D --> F["1"]
    D --> G["2"]
    D --> H["3"]
    D --> I["4"]
    D --> J["5"]
    D --> K["6"]
    D --> L["7"]
    D --> M["8"]
    D --> N["9"]
    E --> O["Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    F --> P["Plays Prompt Prompt 1"]
    G --> Q["Plays Prompt Prompt 1"]
    H --> R["Plays Prompt Prompt 1"]
    I --> S["Plays Prompt Prompt 1"]
    J --> T["Plays Prompt Prompt 1"]
    K --> U["Plays Prompt Prompt 1"]
    L --> V["Plays Prompt Prompt 1"]
    M --> W["Plays Prompt Prompt 1"]

1. Then click OK to finish the auto attendant wizard.

IP PBX >> PBX System

Auto Attendant Wizard - Record Prompts

Please enter **** and to XXXX access IVR and auto-attendant message menu.

You can record the office hours and non-office hour greetings or other prompts.

Prompt 5 is used as office hours greeting.

Prompt 6 is used as non-office hours greeting.

Prompt 7 is used as specific purposes.

Note: If a caller dials the wrong extension number, VigorIPPBX 2820 will play the greeting once more to let he/she dials the right extension again.

4.13 How to use Voice Mail?

With voice mail, callers can leave messages when you are busy, unable to answer phone calls, or when the IP phone is off-line. Then, at your leisure time, you can listen to the voice messages. This avoids missing important phone calls.

VigorIPPBX 2820 supports voice mail feature. When someone leaves a message to you, you can listen to it from the IP phone. Furthermore, you can have an email sent to you with a .WAV file for the voice message attached to this mail if you want. Later, you can listen to your voice mail by executing the WAV file.

We will take an example to introduce how to configure voice mail through VigorIPPBX 2820. Also we will introduce how to listen to the voice mail.

Suppose we have the following scenario. VigorIPPBX 2820 is deployed in the office. Both Jacky and Graham use IP phones, and connect them to VigorIPPBX 2820 with extension numbers 211 and 101 registered to VigorIPPBX 2820 respectively. Voice mails are both enabled for these two extension numbers. In addition, Graham requires VigorIPPBX 2820 to send an email to him when there is a voice message.

graph TD
    A["Internet"] --> B["ITSP"]
    B --> C["SIP Account: [e-mail]"]
    B --> D["SIP Account: [e-mail]"]
    B --> E["LAN Port"]
    E --> F["Switch"]
    F --> G["Voice mail"]
    G --> H["Graham"]
    G --> I["Jacky"]
    G --> J["IP Phone"]
    G --> K["IP Phone"]
    G --> L["Ext. 211"]
    G --> M["Ext. 101"]

When Graham is busy, unable to answer the phone calls, or when his IP phone is off-line, Benson will be prompted to leave a message. If a message is leaved, it will be saved in VigorIPPBX 2820. An email with the voice message attached will be sent to Graham. Graham can listen to his voice mail either via his IP phone or via his mail client.

When Jacky is busy, unable to answer the phone calls, or when his IP phone is off-line, Benson will be prompted to leave a message. If a message is leaved, it will be saved in VigorIPPBX 2820. However, no email will be sent to Jacky for such voicemail. Jacky can listen to his voicemail only via his IP phone.

Follow steps below to enable voice mail for Graham and Jacky.

1. Open Graham's extension profile. Below shows the explanation of basic configuration. Graham's Extension Number is 211. Display Name is locally significant for identification. Make sure the Type is SIP. Enable Authentication and type a Password for this extension.

2. Input an E-mail address for Graham to receive voice mails.

IP PBX >> Extension Profile

Internal Phone Extension Index 1

Internal Phone Extension Active Enable Disable Extension Number 211 Display Name Graham Type SIP Authentication Password •••• E-mail Address [e-mail] Send a test e-mail Voice mail Password •••• MWI • Notify User who Subscribed Force Notify User Outgoing Call Use SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 ISDN2-TE Answer Mode No answer after 30 sec then Voice Mail Busy then Voice Mail Not on-line Voice Mail OK Cancel

E-mail Address:

Input Graham's email address for receiving voicemail.

Voice mail Password:

If you want to listen the voice mail by using IP phone, you must a voice mail password. This can prevent someone else to listen to your voice message. Only digit characters (0-9) are accepted as voice mail password.

Answer Mode:

Select Voice Mail. When Graham is busy, unable to answer the phone calls, or when his IP phone is off-line, VigorIPPBX 2820 will ask the caller to leave a message.

1. Open Jacky's extension profile. Below shows the explanation of basic configuration. Jacky's Extension Number is 101. Display Name is locally significant for identification. Make sure the Type is SIP. Enable Authentication and type a Password for this extension.

2. Input an e-mail address for Jacky to receive voice mails. In this case, no e-mail address is specified.

IP PBX >> Extension Profile

Internal Phone Extension Index 1

Internal Phone Extension Active Enable Disable Extension Number 101 Display Name Jacky Type SIP Authentication Password E-mail Address Send a test e-mail Voice mail Password MWI Notify User who Subscribed Force Notify User Outgoing Call Use SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 ISDN2-TE Answer Mode No answer after 30 sec then Voice Mail Busy then Voice Mail Not on-line Voice Mail OK Cancel

E-mail Address:

Don't input any email address here. Jacky will not receive a voice mail via email.

Voice mail Password:

If you want to listen the voice mail by IP phone, you must setup a voice mail password. This can prevent someone else to listen to your voice message. Only digit characters (0-9) are accepted as voice mail password.

Answer Mode:

Select Voice Mail. When Jacky is busy, unable to answer the phone calls, or when his IP phone is off-line, Vigor/PPBX 2820 will ask the caller to leave a message.

Additional Configuration for Voice Mail

Open the IP PBX >> PBX System >> Voice Mail Configuration page and setup the system properties of voice mail.

IP PBX >> PBX System

Voice Mail Configuration

Extension for checking messages 888 (20 ~ 65535) ✓ Send Voice Message by Email Delete Voice Message after Sending Mail Day for keeping voice mail 3 (1~7) Maximum messages time 30 Sec Mail Voice-Mail Setup SMTP Server 211.---.20 ✓ Authentication User Name graham Password ••••••• OK Cancel

Extension for checking message:

If you want to listen to a voice mail, you need to dial the number which is set in the field of Extension for checking messages. The default value is 888. You can change it manually.

Send Voice Message by Email:

Tick it to enable sending voicemail via email.

Delete Voice Message after Sending Mail:

If it is enabled, a voice message will be automatically deleted from VigorIPPBX 2820 after an email containing this message has been sent out successfully. You can't listen to a message from your IP phone after it is deleted from VigorIPPBX 2820.

Day for keeping voice mail:

It means the time for keeping a voice mail in VigorIPPBX 2820. The default value is 3 (days). After the time, this message will be deleted automatically.

Maximum messages time:

The longer the time is, the larger size of a voice message will be. There are three options: 30 seconds, 60 seconds and 90 seconds.

Mail Voice-Mail Setup:

To send a voice mail via email, a SMTP server must be configured. Input the username and password if the SMTP server requires authentication.

Ways to Listen voice messages

Method 1

When there is a voice mail, Graham will receive an email with a WAV file attached. This WAV file records the voice message. By double clicking on the WAV file, Graham can listen to the message leaved by Benson.

New voice mail message from 102 - Unicode (UTF-8) File Edit View Tools Message Help Reply Reply All Forward Print Delete Previous Next Addresses From: @211. .20 Date: Saturday, September 27, 2008 11:50 AM To: [e-mail] Subject: New voice mail message from 102 Attach: Message_from_102.wav (93.5 KB)

Dear Graham

There is a message for you from 102, on Sat, 27 Sep 2008 03:58:57 You might want to check it when you get a chance. Thanks!

Draytek PBX

This message has been scanned for viruses and dangerous content by MailScanner, and is believed to be clean.

Method 2

Graham can listen to his voice messages via his IP phone as follows:

1. Pick up the IP phone which has registered to VigorIPPBX 2820 with the extension number 211.
2. Dial 888. This number is defined in IP PBX >> PBX System >> Voice Mail Configuration page.
3. Enter the Voice mail Password. It is defined in IPPXB>>Extension Profiles.
4. A prompt will be played informing if you have any voice messages or not.
5. Press * to play the first message.
6. Press 0 to play the next message.
7. Press # to hang up the call.
   For more actions, you may refer to the following flow chart.

graph TD
    A["Dial 888"] --> B["Input Voice mail Password"]
    B --> C["*: start play the first message"]
    B --> D["9: option"]
    B --> E["#: exit"]
    C --> F["0: Next"]
    C --> G["1: Repeat"]
    C --> H["2: Delete"]
    C --> I["9: Option"]
    C --> J["#: Exit"]
    D --> K["*: Play"]
    D --> L["4: Delete all messages"]
    D --> M["#: Exit"]
    F --> N["*: sure"]
    G --> O["#: cancel"]
    H --> P["*: sure"]
    I --> Q["#: cancel"]
    K --> R["*: sure"]
    L --> S["#: cancel"]
    M --> T["*: sure"]
    M --> U["#: cancel"]

Since Jacky configures to listen to voice messages from IP Phone, no email will be sent to Jacky.

4.14 How to configure and use the MWI on Vigor/PPBX 2820?

MWI is namely Message Waiting Indication. Messaging Waiting Indication is a common feature of telephone networks. It typically involves an audible or visible indication that messages are waiting, such as playing a special dial tone (which in telephone network is called message-waiting dial tone), lighting a light or indicator on the phone, displaying icons or text, or some combination (draft-ietf-sipping-mwi-04.txt).

VigorIPPBX 2820 supports MWI feature. With this feature, when someone leaves you a voice message, a special tone (MWI tone) will be played while you pick the phone up. This implies that you have a voice message. After listening such special tone, you will hear the normal dial tone. Then you can choose to listen to the voice message or call someone back.

Example for using MWI

Here, we use the following illustration to make an example for using MWI.

Generally, Jacky uses mail client to receive voice mails. But it's not convenient to check voice mail via mail client at all times. Especially there is a possibility that voice mails may be dropped or deleted by an accident due to Antivirus scan. To avoid it, Jacky also uses MWI feature of VigorIPPBX 2820 to inform himself of missed phone calls.

graph TD
    A["User A"] --> B["IP Phone Ext.101"]
    B --> C["Internet"]
    D["Jacky"] --> E["IP Phone Ext.211"]
    E --> F["MWI is enabled on Ext.211"]
    G["ITSP"] --> H["SIP Account: [e-mail]"]
    I["Mike"] --> J["IP Phone"]
    J --> K["SIP Account: [e-mail]"]
    L["LAN Port 192.168.1.1"] --> M["Internet"]
    N["Special tone"] --> E

Configure MWI for Jacky's Extension

1. Open the extension profile for Jacky. Below shows the explanation of basic configuration. Jacky's Extension Number is 211. Display Name is locally significant for identification. Make sure the Type is SIP. Enable Authentication and type a Password for this extension. Input an E-mail address for Jacky to receive voice mails.

2. Select either Notify User who Subscribed or Force Notify User for MWI.

IP PBX >> Extension Profile

Internal Phone Extension Index 1 Internal Phone Extension Active Enable Disable Extension Number 211 Display Name Jacky Type SIP Authentication Password **** E-mail Address [e-mail] Voice mail Password **** MWI Notify User who Subscribed Force Notify User Outgoing Call Use SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 ISDN2-TE Answer Mode No answer after 120 sec then Keep Ring Busy then Do Nothing Not on-line Do Nothing OK Cancel

Voice mail Password:

If you want to listen to the voice mail by phone via Vigor/PPBX 2820, you must configure the voice mail password. It can prevent someone else listening to your voice mail. Namely, users need to input the voice mail password before they listen to the voice mail.

Notify User who Subscribed:

Most IP Phones support MWI feature. You can enable or disable it for your requirement. When Notify User who Subscribed is selected, VigorIPPBX 2820 will send MWI to the IP phone with MWI enabled. However, if the IP phone does not enable MWI function, VigorIPPBX 2820 will not send MWI to that IP phone.

Force Notify User:

When Force Notify User is selected, VigorIPPBX 2820 automatically sends MWI to the clients when there is voice message no matter the IP phone enables MWI function or not.

Additional Configuration for Voice Mail

Go to the IP PBX >> PBX System >> Voice Mail Configuration page and configure the following items.

IP PBX >> PBX System

Voice Mail Configuration

Extension for checking messages 888 (20 ~ 65535) ✓ Send Voice Message by Email Delete Voice Message after Sending Mail Day for keeping voice mail 3 (1~7) Maximum messages time 30 Sec

Mail Voice-Mail Setup

SMTP Server

Authentication

User Name

Password

Extension for checking messages:

If you want to listen to a voice mail, you need to dial the number which is set in the field of Extension for checking messages. The default value is 888. You can change it manually.

Day for keeping voice mail:

It means the time for keeping a voice mail in VigorIPPBX 2820. The default value is 3 (days). After the time, this message will be deleted automatically.

Send Voice Message by Email:

Tick it to enable the voice mail function.

Delete Voice Message after Sending Mail:

If you are using MWI, do not enable such option. No MWI notification will be sent after a voice message is deleted.

Example Explanation

1. Mike calls [e-mail] and dials extension number 211.

2. Jacky is not available at that time.

3. Mike leaves a message to Jacky, then hands up the phone.

4. Jacky is free and picks up his phone.

5. Instead of the normal dial tone, Jacky hears a special tone (MWI tone) which implies that he has a voice message. After listening the special tone, Jacky will hear the normal dial tone.

6. Jacky dials 888 and input the voice mail password to hear his voice message.

4.15 How to register extensions to Vigor/PPBX 2820?

VigorIPPBX 2820 supports Software based SIP phones, Hardware based SIP Phones and Analogue phones attached to ATA (Analog Telephone Adapter). In this document we will introduce how to use these clients to register extensions to VigorIPPBX 2820.

Basic Network Connection for Vigor/PPBX 2820

In this document we will use the scenario illustrated in the following graphic.

graph TD
    A["VigorIPPBX 2820"] -->|Internet| B["Internet"]
    A -->|192.168.1.1| C["IP Phone"]
    A -->|192.168.1.10| D["IP Phone"]
    A -->|192.168.1.12| E["LAN"]
    A -->|218.242.132.26| F["Internet"]
    A -->|202.211.100.61| G["Joseph Ext: 223"]
    A -->|ISDN Phone Mark Ext:204| H["Analog Phone"]
    A -->|Jacky Ext: 101| I["LAN"]

1. VigorIPPBX 2820 acts as an SIP server with WAN IP: 218.242.132.26 and LAN IP: 192.168.1.1.
2. Stephen uses an IP Phone connected/registered to VigorIPPBX 2820 via LAN.
3. Jacky uses the software Phone registered to VigorIPPBX 2820 via LAN.
4. Joseph uses an analogue phone attached to an ATA registered to VigorIPPBX 2820 via WAN.
5. Mandy uses an analog phone connecting to FXS port of VigorIPPBX 2820.
6. Mark uses an ISDN phone connecting to ISDN port of VigorIPPBX 2820.

Setup the extensions on Vigor IPPBX 2820

1. Enter the IP PBX >> Extension Profile setup page and configure the relevant extension profile.

IP PBX >> Extension Profile

Internal Phone Extension Index 1

Internal Phone Extension Active Extension Number 101 Display Name Jacky Type SIP ✓ Authentication Password ●●● E-mail Address Send a test e-mail Voice mail Password ●●●● MWI ✓ Notify User who Subscribed ○ Force Notify User Outgoing Call Use ✓ SIP1 ✓ SIP2 ✓ SIP3 ✓ SIP4 ✓ SIP5 ✓ SIP6 ✓ ISDN2-TE Answer Mode No answer after 5 sec then Keep Ring Busy then Do Nothing Not on-line Do Nothing

1. After finishing the settings, you may have the following table.

IP PBX >> Extension

Internal Phone Extension

Index	Ext.	Name	Email Address	Outgoing Call	Status
1.	101	Jacky		SIP1	v
2.	222	Stephen		SIP1	v
3.	223	Joseph		SIP1	v
4.	204	Mark		SIP1 ISDN2-TE	v
5.	221	Mandy		SIP1	v
6.	---	---		SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 ISDN2-TE	x
7.	---	---		SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 ISDN2-TE	x

Setup the VoIP clients to register extensions

- Software based IP Phone (e.g. DrayTek Soft Phone)

Jacky is using Soft Phone, a VoIP softphone, for registering his extension 101 to VigorIPPBX 2820.

Start the Soft Phone.

DrayTek Soft Phone v1.0.0 Line1: 00:00:00 Ready Line2: 00:00:00 Ready Contact Dial Pad Call History Setting SIP Codec Network FWD General Proxy accounts Account Add Edit Remove Failed to register: no response timeout

Click the Setting>>SIP tab from the DrayTek Soft Phone dialog. Click Add to open the following dialog. Type the information for Jacky.

Configure SIP account Configure a SIP account SIP Proxy address: 192.168.1.1 Registration duration (sec): 3600 Username: 101 Password: •••• OK Cancel

● Software based IP Phone (e.g. SJphone)

Jacky is using SJphone, a VoIP softphone, for registering his extension 101 to VigorIPPBX 2820.

Start the SJphone. Open the Options windows and click the Profiles tab. Create a new profile. Make sure the Profile type is Call through SIP Proxy. Finally, press OK.

192.168.1.11 SIP not registered Host address: 172.17.1.207 NAT/FlowWith: Por Restricted Core NAT Transfer Reset Options Krat Keys Skines Interface Neighborhood IIS Directory Support User Information Call Options Profiles Audio Profile Status 172: 17.1.47 initia... 192: 188.1.11 in usa... bcd initia... draytel initia... sp tel 1 initia... initel initi... limetphone.iinet.net.us initia... sp pbs initia... iptel initia... jte itacou.com.br initia... PC to PC (K323) initia... PC to PC (STP) Initio... Delete Add Initiate Remove Create New Profile Profile none: co IPEX 2820 File name: co IPEX 2830.ni Profile type: Calls through SIP Proxy Important note: Calls through SIP Proxy Profile for a call through a SIP proxy. SIP proxy information is permanently stored in the profile. Calls information can be easily changed by re-inhibiting. OK Cancel Help Rev... Edit... Delete OK Cancel

You will get the Profile Options window. Open the SIP Proxy tab and configure the address of IPPBX. The computer is located in the local network of VigorIPPBX 2820, therefore the LAN IP address (192.168.1.1) of VigorIPPBX 2820 must be input in the Proxy domain field. Here we use the default SIP port 5060. Press OK.

Profile Options General Initialization SIP Proxy Advanced DTMF STUN Proxy domain: 192.168.1.1 : 5060 User domain: ✓ Register with proxy ✓ Proxy is strict outboun Advanced options □ Use separate registrar Registrar domain: : 0 ✓ Unregister contact address only Proxy for NAT: : 0 OK Cancel

Next, the account setup page pops up. Enter the extension in the Account field and its corresponding password in the Password field. The password must be the same as set in VigorIPPBX 2820.

Service: Vigor IP PBX Please enter this information to initialize the service profile Account: 101 Password: *** OK Cancel Help ✓ Save service information permanently

● Hardware based IP Phone (e.g. VigorPhone 350)

Stephen is using VigorPhone 350, a hard IP telephone, for registering his extension 222 to VigorIPPBX 2820. The VigorPhone 350 is connected behind VigorIPPBX 2820, therefore the LAN IP address (192.168.1.1) must be set as Registration Server, Proxy Server and Realm Address. Enter other settings as figure shown below. The password must be the same as set in VigorIPPBX 2820.

VigorPhone 350 IP Phone DrayTei SIP Account Settings This page allows you to set SIP account for this device. Call History Phone Book Phone Settings Alarm Clock Calendar System Settings General SIP Settings SIP Accounts Network SIP Account 1 Registration: Enable Disable Registration ID: 222 Display Name: Stephen Password: *** Registration Server: 192.168.1.1 Expire Time: 60 DTMF Type: RFC2833 Authentication Name: 222 Proxy Server: 192.168.1.1 Realm Address: 192.168.1.1 Voice Mail: 888 Ping Before Register: Disable Send KeepAlive: On Off MM: Disable Overlap dial: Disable Status: registered

● Analogue Phone attached to an ATA (e.g. VigorTalk)

Joseph is using VigorTalk, an analog telephony adapter, for registering his extension 223 to VigorIPPBX 2820. Since he is on the Internet, the WAN IP address (218.242.132.36 in this example) of VigorIPPBX 2820 must be set as Registrar and Proxy addresses. Enter other settings as figure shown below. The password must be the same as set in VigorIPPBX 2820.

VigorTalk Info LAN VoIP DialPlan DrayTek www.draytek.com SIP SIP Port 5060 Registrar 218.242.132.36 Proxy 218.242.132.36 □ Act as outbound proxy Ports Setting ✓ Use Registrar Name 223 Authentication ID 223 Password *** Expiry Time 1 hour NAT Pass Through □ Enable STUN Server Codecs Default Codec G.729A/B (8Kbps) Packet Size 20ms

Monitor the status of extensions on VigorIPPBX 2820

After configuration, please check the status on VigorIPPBX 2820. If the extension registered successfully on VigorIPPBX 2820, the relevant Status will display Online.

IP PBX >> PBX Status

Index	Name	Extension	IP	Status	Peer ID
1	Jacky	101	192.168.1.12	Online
2	Stephen	222	192.168.1.10	Online
3	Joseph	223	202.211.100.61	Online
4	Mark	204		Offline
5	Mandy	221	192.168.1.1	Online
6	---	---		Offline
7	---	---		Offline
8	---	---		Offline
9	---	---		Offline
10	---	---		Offline

4.16 How to configure and use ISDN-S0 MSN on Vigor/PPBX 2820

Why need ISDN-S0 MSN?

The ISDN S0 port of Vigor2820VS/VigorIPPBX 2820 can connect with two ISDN phones or connect to an ISDN PBX with multiple ISDN devices connected.

For there are so many ISDN devices, we can set different MSN numbers for mapping different ISDN devices.

Below shows an example of connection structure for your reference.

graph TD
    A["ISDN Network"] --> B["Vigor/PPBX 2820"]
    B --> C["Internet"]
    B --> D["ISDN S0"]
    D --> E["ISDN PBX Ext:1002 MSN:31"]
    D --> F["ISDN Adapter"]
    F --> G["Jacky Ext:1001 MSN:30"]
    F --> H["LAN"]
    B --> I["IP Phone Joseph Ext:223 (@2820 IP PBX)"]
    D --> J["IP Phone Stephen Ext:222"]
    B --> K["IP Phone"]

Note: ISDN Phone adapter must connect to Vigor Router's ISDN S0 port, otherwise Vigor Router will not provide power/isdn signal to the S0 port.

How to configure ISDN S0 MSN?

1. Access into the web configuration page of VigorIPPBX 2820.
2. Open IPPBX>>Extension and click one of the index links to set extension profile.
3. Select ISDN1-S0 and relevant MSN (from 30-39) for the Type setting.

It means When someone calls ext:1001, VigorIPPBX 2820 will forward such call to the device connected to VigorIPPBX 2820 ISDN S0 port with MSN number “30”.

IP PBX >> Extension Profile

Internal Phone Extension Index 1

Internal Phone Extension Active Extension Number 1001 Display Name 1001 Type ISDN1-SO 30 Authentication Password Send a test e-mail E-mail Address Voice mail Password MWI Notify User who Subscribed Force Notify User Outgoing Call Use SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 ISDN2-TE Answer Mode No answer after 120 sec then Keep Ring Busy then Do Nothing Not on-line Do Nothing

IP PBX >> Extension

Internal Phone Extension

Index	Ext.	Name	Email Address	Outgoing Call	Status
1.	1001	Jacky		SIP1	v
2.	1002	Tom		SIP1	v
3.	1003	Joe		SIP1	v

The MSN number for the connected ISDN device also must be set with 30.

How to dial out through the device connected ISDN port

To dial out an SIP call, please dial the trunk number for SIP Trunk (e.g., dial 001 if you want to use iptel SIP account) first and then dial the SIP number of the peer.

IP PBX >> SIP Trunk List

SIP Trunk List Refresh Seconds: 5 Refresh Index Profile Name Domain/Realm Proxy Account Number/Name Trunk Number Status 1. iptel iptel.org iptel.org 88888123 001 - 2. draytel draytel.org draytel.org 8114345 002 - 3. 4. 5. 6. 003 - 004 - 005 - 006 -

R: Success registered on SIP server
-:Fail to register on SIP server

To dial out an ISDN call, please dial the extension number (e.g., 904) for ISDN TE port first and then the ISDN number of the peer.

IP PBX >> ISDN Trunk
ISDN Trunk

ISDN 1 Trunk Number 903 ISDN 2 Trunk Number 904 Office hours answer mode Auto Attendant Non-Office hours answer mode Auto Attendant □ ISDN Trunk Auto Hunt 666

4.17 Creating an Account for MyVigor

The website of MyVigor (a server located on http://myvigor.draytek.com) provides several useful services (such as Anti-Spam, Web Content Filter, Anti-Intrusion, and etc.) to filter the web pages for protecting your system.

To access into MyVigor for getting more information, please create an account for MyVigor.

4.17.1 Creating an Account via Vigor Router

1. Click CSM>> Web Content Filter Profile. The following page will appear.

Web-Filter License [Status:Not Activated] Activate Setup Query Server auto-selected Find more Setup Test Server auto-selected Find more Web Content Filter Profile Table: Set to Factory Default Profile Name Profile Name 1. Default 5. 2. 6. 3. 7.

Or

Click System Maintenance>>Activation to open the following page.

System Maintenance >> Activation Activate via interface : WAN 1 Web-Filter License [Status:Not Activated] Authentication Message WebFilter, service not activate 2000-01-01 00:00:17

1. Click the Activate link. A login page for MyVigor web site will pop up automatically.

This service is available for MyVigor member only. Please login to access MyVigor. If you are not one of the members of MyVigor, please create an account first.

LOGIN UserName : Password : Auth Code : AYi GXZ If you cannot read the word, click here. Forget password? Login Don't have a MyVigor Account ? Create an account now

If you are having difficulty logging in, contact our customer service. Customer Service : (886) 3 597 2727 or email to :[e-mail]

1. Click the link of Create an account now.

2. Check to confirm that you accept the Agreement and click Accept.

Register Create an account - Please enter personal profile. 1 Agreement 2 Personal Information 3 Preferences 4 Completion MyVigor Agreement 1. Agreement Draytek provides MyVigor(myvigor.draytek.com) service according to this agreement. When you use MyVigor service, it means that you have read, understand and agree to accept the items listed in this agreement. Draytek can modify or change the content of the items without any reasons. It is suggested for you to notice the medications or changes at any time. If you still use MyVigor service after knowing the modifications and changes of this service, it means you have read, understand and agree to accept the modifications and changes. If you do not agree the content of this agreement, please stop using MyVigor service. 2. Registration To use this service, you have to agree the following conditions: (a) Provide your complete and correct information according to the registration steps of this service. (b) If you provide any incorrect or take information here, DrayTek has the right to pause or terminate ✓ I have read and understand the above Agreement. (Use the scroll bar to view the entire agreement) << Back Accept >>

1. Type your personal information in this page and then click Continue.

Register Create an account - Please enter personal profile (Fields marked by (*) are required) Account Information 1 Agreement Username:* Mary (3~20 characters) 2 Personal Information Password:* (4~20 characters: Do not set the same as the username.) Confirm Password:* Personal Information 3 Preferences First Name:* Mary Last Name:* Ted 4 Completion Company Name: Tech Ltd. Email Address:* [e-mail] Please note that a valid E-mail address is required to receive the Subscription Code. You will need this code to activate your account. Tel: 0 - Country:* SWITZERLAND Career:* Supervisor << Back Continue >>

1. Choose proper selection for your computer and click Continue.

Register Create an account - Please enter personal profile. 1 Agreement How did you find out about this website? Internet 2 Personal Information What kind of anti-virus do you use? AntiVir 3 Preferences Please select the mail server for receiving the verification mail. Global Server 4 Completion << Back Continue >>

1. Now you have created an account successfully. Click START.

Register Create an account - Please enter personal profile. 1 Agreement 2 Personal Information 3 Preferences 4 Completion Completion A confirmation email has been sent to [e-mail] Please click on the activation link in the email to activate your account. START

1. Check to see the confirmation email with the title of New Account Confirmation Letter from myvigor.draytek.com.

***** This is an automated message from myvigor.draytek.com. *****

Thank you (Mary) for creating an account.

Please click on the activation link below to activate your account

Link : Activate my Account

1. Click the Activate my Account link to enable the account that you created. The following screen will be shown to verify the register process is finished. Please click Login.

Register Search for this site GO Register Confirm

Thank for your register in VigorPro Web Site The Register process is completed

Close Login

1. When you see the following page, please type in the account and password (that you just created) in the fields of UserName and Password.

This service is available for MyVigor member only. Please login to access MyVigor. If you are not one of the members of MyVigor, please create an account first.

LOGIN UserName : Mary Password : ••••• Auth Code : T4he1C T4he1C If you cannot read the word. click here Forget password? Login Don't have a MyVigor Account ? Create an account now

If you are having difficulty logging in, contact our customer service.

Customer Service : (886) 3 597 2727 or

1. Now, click Login. Your account has been activated. You can access into MyVigor server to activate the service (e.g., WCF) that you want.

4.17.2 Creating an Account via MyVigor Web Site

1. Access into http://myvigor.draytek.com. Find the line of Not registered yet?. Then, click the link Click here! to access into next page.

DrayTek MyVigor Home Search GO About Us Product My Information VigorPro MyVigor for you MyVigor website replaces the VigorPro site as DrayTek's portal site for the latest products and services in network security, including Anti- Virus, Anti-Spam, Web Content Filter... etc. The products and functions that are supported in this site include: VigorPro Unified Security Firewall series: • Activation of Commtouch™ GlobalView Web Content Filter license key • Activation of DT Anti-Virus license key • Activation of Kaspersky Anti-Virus license key • Activation of Commtouch™ Anti-Spam license key and membership Vigor routers (for models that support Commtouch™) • Activation of Commtouch™ GlobalView Web Content Filter license key The MyVigor website contains a trail version of Commtouch™ GlobalView Web Content Filter, which allows the users to set filters to block out undesirable web pages in the Internet jungle. More customer-oriented services are planned for MyVigor site for the near future. Customer Survey Login UserName Password AuthCode: QbkqVd If you can't read the AuthCode .click here Login Forget password? Not registered yet ? Clickhere! Please use IE5.0 or above ( resolution 1424 - 768 ) for best display. © DrayTek Corp.

1. Check to confirm that you accept the Agreement and click Accept.

Register Create an account - Please enter personal profile. 1 Agreement 2 Personal Information 3 Preferences 4 Completion MyVigor Agreement 1. Agreement Draytek provides MyVigor(myvigor.draytek.com) service according to this agreement. When you use MyVigor service, it means that you have read, understand and agree to accept the items listed in this agreement. Draytek can modify or change the content of the items without any reasons. It is suggested for you to notice the medications or changes at any time. If you still use MyVigor service after knowing the modifications and changes of this service, it means you have read, understand and agree to accept the modifications and changes. If you do not agree the content of this agreement, please stop using MyVigor service. 2. Registration To use this service, you have to agree the following conditions: (a) Provide your complete and correct information according to the registration steps of this service. (b) If you provide any incorrect or fake information here. DrayTek has the right to pause or terminate ✓ I have read and understand the above Agreement (Use the scroll bar to view the entire agreement) << Back Accept >>

1. Type your personal information in this page and then click Continue.

Register Create an account - Please enter personal profile.(Fields marked by (*) are required) Account Information 1 Agreement Username:* Mary (3~20 characters) 2 Personal Information Password:* (4~20 characters : Do not set the same as the username.) Confirm Password:* Personal Information 3 Preferences First Name:* Mary Last Name:* Ted 4 Completion Company Name: Tech Ltd Email Address:* [e-mail] Please note that a valid E-mail address is required to receive the Subscription Code. You will need this code to activate your account. Tel: 0 - Country:* SWITZERLAND Career:* Supervisor << Back Continue >>

1. Choose proper selection for your computer and click Continue.

Register Create an account - Please enter personal profile. 1 Agreement How did you find out about this website? Internet What kind of anti-virus do you use? AntiVir 2 Personal Information I would like to subscribe to the MyVigor e-letter. ✓ I would like to receive DrayTek product news. ✓ 3 Preferences Please select the mail server for receiving the verification mail. Global Server 4 Completion << Back Continue >>

1. Now you have created an account successfully. Click START.

Register Create an account - Please enter personal profile. 1 Agreement 2 Personal Information 3 Preferences 4 Completion Completion A confirmation email has been sent to [e-mail] Please click on the activation link in the email to activate your account START

1. Check to see the confirmation email with the title of New Account Confirmation Letter from myvigor.draytek.com.

***** This is an automated message from myvigor.draytek.com. *****

Thank you (Mary) for creating an account.

Please click on the activation link below to activate your account

Link : Activate my Account

1. Click the Activate my Account link to enable the account that you created. The following screen will be shown to verify the register process is finished. Please click Login.

Register	Search for this site
Register Confirm

The Confirm message of New Owner(Mary) maybe timeout Please try again or contact to draytek.com

1. When you see the following page, please type in the account and password (that you just created) in the fields of UserName and Password. Then type the code in the box of Auth Code according to the value displayed on the right side of it.

This service is available for MyVigor member only. Please login to access MyVigor. If you are not one of the members of MyVigor, please create an account first.

LOGIN UserName : Mary Password : ••••• Auth Code : T4he1C T4he1C If you cannot read the word, click here Forget password? Login Don't have a MyVigor Account ? Create an account now

If you are having difficulty logging in, contact our customer service.

Customer Service : (886) 3 597 2727 or

Now, click Login. Your account has been activated. You can access into MyVigor server to activate the service (e.g., WCF) that you want

4.18 How to use mOTP feature through the router and iPhone

Draytek provides one-time password support for build-in PPTP and L2TP connection. All Draytek customers can use one-time password to authenticate VPN connections.

To generate a one-time password, the user has to enter his personal PIN code into the device. The authentication is based on two factors: the token device and the PIN code.

There are many one-time password clients for the iPhone, such as mOTP, iOTP or CitrusOTP. Here we will introduce mOTP (mobile OneTimePasswords), which may be downloaded from the following links.

http://appshopper.com/utilities/motp-mobile-onetimepasswords

http://iphone.wareseeker.com/motp-mobile-onetimepasswords.app/42f14b91b3

Note: The above downloading links may be invalid in the future. Searching “iphone Mobile-OTP” with Google, you may find more resources.

For the user, please perform the steps listed below for one time.

1. Suppose that mOTP has been successfully installed on your iPhone (we will not introduce the installation here). Open it and press the button Generate Secret to initialize your secret key. Don't do this if there already is a secret key existed, otherwise it will re-initialize your secret key.

Done Settings >>> Check out other Apps << Castmarks Signposts One Time Password Do your really want to reinitialize your Secret? Cancel Ok He731bb6b2d439c2e2 1b4838bbe55b8

1. Shake your iPhone to generate a random secret key.

Done Settings >>> Check out other Apps << Castmarks Signposts Generate Secret Your Secret Shake your iPhone until it vibrates.

1. Keep this secret key down and report it to your administrator. In this example the secret key is e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe689ebf00c5202.

Done Settings >>> Check out other Apps << Castmarks Signposts Generate Secret Your Secret e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe 689ebf00c5202

1. Make sure the system time of your iPhone is correct. Once the Secret Key is generated and your system time is synced, mOTP is ready to generate one time password.

For the administrator, please do the following:

1. Setup a remote-dial-in VPN profile and check Enable Mobile One-Time Passwords (mOTP). Setup a username. Setup a PIN code (e.g., 1111) which can be 4 to 7 numbers. Enter the secret key (e.g., e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe689ebf00c5202) which is generated and got from the end user.

VPN and Remote Access >> Remote Dial-in User Index No. 1 User account and Authentication Enable this account Idle Timeout 300 second(s) Allowed Dial-In Type PPTP IPSec Tunnel L2TP with IPSec Policy None Specify Remote Node Remote Client IP or Peer ISDN Number or Peer ID Username test Password Enable Mobile One-Time Passwords(mOTP) PIN Code 1111 Secret e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe689ebf00c5202 IKE Authentication Method Pre-Shared Key IKE Pre-Shared Key Digital Signature(X.509) None

Note: Both the PIN Code and Secret will be hidden with '*' after you press the OK button.

1. Make sure the system time on Draytek router is correct.
2. Inform the end user of the Username and PIN code.

Below steps are for end user to dial the VPN connection. Each time you start a new VPN connection, you must perform the following steps to generate a valid password.

1. Open mOTP. Enter the PIN code. In this example it is 1111. Then press "Generate Password".

Mobile One Time Passwords PIN Generate Password 1 2 3 ABC DEF 4 5 6 GHI JKL MNO 7 8 9

Note: Each time you enter the PIN code you will get a different password.

1. Here the password is 3dcecd.

Mobile One Time Passwords PIN Generate Password Your One Time Password mOTP 3dcecd

1. Enter the password on your VPN client and start the connection as soon as possible. The password is valid only for 1 minute.

Dial To VPN Profile Name : to vigor □ Auto re-dial after disconnect. □ Auto run when system start up. VPN Server IP/HOST Name(such as 123.45.67.89 or draytek.com) 172.17.1.142 User Name : test Password : ******** Input 3dcecd Type of VPN ● PPTP ○ LZTP ○ IPSec Tunnel ○ LZTP over IPSec ○ SSL VPN Tunnel PPTP Encryption ○ No encryption ● Require encryption ○ Maximum strength encryption □ Authentication method PAP □ Use default gateway on remote network More OK Cancel

1. When the connection is dropped, you must generate a new password then redial the connection.

Summary:

1. End user generates a secret key and reports it to the administrator.
2. Administrator enters this secret key in a teleworker profile.
3. Administrator setups a username and PIN code and provides them to the end user.
4. End user uses the PIN code to generate a password.

4.19 How to use call pickup via IPPBX router

Call pickup is a convenient function which allows a user to pick up incoming call of other extension by using his phone. For example, extension A is ringing, a user can pick up this call by using another phone (e.g., extension B).

There are two operation modes for call pickup in practical use:

- Group Call Pickup

There are three extension numbers 201, 202 and 203 for sales department; and there are two extension numbers 204 and 205 for engineering department. When the extension 202 is ringing, people (e.g., 201 and 203) in the same department can pick up the phone call by pressing *1.

graph TD
    A["201"] -->|*1| B["202"]
    B -->|*1| C["203"]
    D["204"] --> E["205"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

Engineering Department

- Direct Call Pickup

If people in engineering department want to pick up the incoming call of the extension 202, they can simply press *1 with the extension number of phone ringing. For example, the one with extension number 204 wants to pick up the incoming call of extension 202, he can press*1202 to pick up the call.

graph TD
    A["Phone 201"] -->|Red Arrow| B["Phone 202"]
    C["Phone 203"] -->|Red Arrow| B["Phone 202"]
    D["Phone 204"] -->|*1202| B["Phone 202"]
    E["Phone 205"] -->|*1202| B["Phone 202"]
    B --> F["Sales Department"]

Engineering Department

The default value for call pickup number is *1 in VigorIPPBX.. Users can modify the number by accessing into IPPBX > PBX System > SIP Proxy Setting whenever they want.

IP PBX >> PBX System

SIP Proxy Setting

SIP Local Port	5060
SIP Proxy Realm	PBX.com
Parking Server Number	777
Call Pickup Number	*1
RTP Local Port Start	15050
RTP Local Port End	20000
Disable registration from WAN
Limit SIP Request WAN	0	Request/Sec (Range: 0~64)

Note1: The Call Pickup Number used for both specific number pickup and group pickup.
Note2: If "Disable registration from WAN" option is selected, you can still enable certain extensions to register from WAN/VPN on individual extension profile page.

4.20 How to Configure Hunt Group in VigorIPPBX Series

VigorIPPBX supports the function of Hunt Group. It can group extensions in the same department with a hunt group that will be represented with a group extension number. When someone dials this number, all the extensions within such group will ring together. For example, there are three extensions, 101, 102 and 103 used for Sales department. They can be grouped within one hunt group represented by 200 (in this case) in VigorIPPBX. When someone dials 200, these three extensions will ring at the same time.

Here, we will introduce how to configure the Hunt Group in VigorIPPBX series. In this document, VigorIPPBX 3510 is taken as an example.

1. Open the web configurator of VigorIPPBX 3510. Access into IPPBX >> PBX System>> Hunt Group.

IP PBX >> PBX System

PBX System

SIP Proxy Setting Hunt Group Voice Mail Configuration Office Hours Auto Attendant Wizard Prompt Maintenance Phone Setting Bank and Extension Configuration Backup

1. Type a name as Hunt Group Name. Give a number (e.g., 200 in this case) as Hunt Group Extension for such group. Then, click "Add" to move the selected extensions (e.g., 101, 102 and 103) from the Available field into the Chosen field.

IP PBX >> PBX System

Hunt Groups Index 1

Hunt Group Name Sales Hunt Group Extension 200 Hunt Rule Simultaneously Timeout 10 Seconds (MUST greater than 10 seconds) Overflow Rule Terminate Hunt List (Maximum Of Group Member:20) Available 4 - 104 5 - 105 6 - --- 7 - --- 8 - --- 9 - --- 10 - --- 11 - --- 12 - --- 13 - --- 14 - --- 15 - --- 16 - --- 17 - --- Add » Chosen 1 - 101 2 - 102 3 - 103 Add All Remove « Remove All Move Up

1. After finished the above steps, the basic configuration of Hunt Group is finished. Now, we have to set the hunt rule for ringing.

2. There are two options, Simultaneously and Sequentially for Hunt Rule.

Simultaneously means when someone dials 200, the three extensions belong to 200 will ring at the same time. If Sequentially is selected, every extensions in such group will ring one by one. The ringing time for each extension is determined by Timeout setting.

1. When no one answers the phone call, the following action will be determined by Overflow Rule. There are five selections for people to choose.

Terminate Terminate Keep Ringing Forward to Group Forward To Extension Voice Mail

• Terminate: Time is up and no one answers, the phone call will be hung up automatically.
• Keep Ringing: If no one answers, the phone call will ring continuously till someone lifts it.
  ● Forward To Group: If no one answers, the phone call will be forwarded to another hunt group.
• Forward To Extension: If no one answers in certain extension, the phone call will be forwarded to another extension in such group.
  ● Voice Mail: If no one answers, the phone call will be forwarded into a voice mail of specified extension.

4.21 How to make a phone call for extensions in different IPP BX routers

A company uses VigorIPPBX 3510 as a telephone system in place A and uses IPPBX 2820 as a telephone system in place B. There are two extensions 202 and 203 registered to VigorIPPBX 3510, and two extensions 102 and 103 registered to VigorIPPBX 2820. Refer to the following figure.

graph TD
    A["White USB network"] -->|VigorIPPBX 2820 SIP trunk 1: 201@3510PBX| B["Internet"]
    C["Black USB network"] -->|VigorIPPBX 3510 SIP trunk 1: 101@2820PBX| B
    A -->|102@2820PBX| D["Telephone"]
    A -->|103@2820PBX| E["Telephone"]
    C -->|202@3510PBX| F["Telephone"]
    C -->|203@3510PBX| G["Telephone"]

From the above figure, if we want to make a phone call among extensions in VigorIPPBX 3510 and IPPBX 2820, we have to register an SIP trunk of VigorIPPBX 3510 to VigorIPPBX 2820 with an account of 101@2820PBX; register an SIP trunk of VigorIPPBX 2820 to VigorIPPBX 3510 with an account of 201@3510PBX.

Configure Settings in VigorIPP BX 3510 / VigorIPPBX 2820

1. Access into the web configuration interface of VigorIPPBX 3510.
2. Open IP PBX > Line Settings.

IP PBX >> Line Setting

Line Setting

SIP Trunk PSTN Trunk

1. Choose SIP Trunk and click any index number to open the detailed setting page.
2. Type a name (e.g., 2820PBX-101 in this case) in the field of Profile Name; type the IP address of VigorIPPBX 2820 in the fields of Domain/Realm and Proxy; type the registered account (e.g., 101 in this case) in the fields of Account Number/Name and Authentication ID; and type the password for registration in the field of Password.

SIP Trunk Index 1

Profile Name 2820PBX-101 (11 char max.) Register via Auto □ Call without Registration SIP Local Port 5070 Domain/Realm 218.160.234.236 (63 char max.) Proxy 218.160.234.236 (63 char max.) Proxy Port 5060 Display Name 101 (23 char max.) Account Number/Name 101 (63 char max.) ✓ Authentication ID 101 (63 char max.) Password ... (63 char max.) Expiry Time 10 mins 600 sec Trunk number 001 (3 char max.) Out-going call CLI Main number ○ Alias number Office hours answer mode Auto Attendant Non-Office hours answer mode Auto Attendant

Note: SIP Local Port can not be equal to PBX Proxy Port.

Cancel

1. After finished the configuration, VigorIPPBX 3510 will be registered to VigorIPPBX 2820 as an extension (101). Press OK to save the settings.
2. If the registration is successfully, the field of Status in IP PBX>>SIP Trunk List will be displayed with R.

IP PBX >> SIP Trunk List

SIP Trunk List Refresh Seconds: 5 | Refresh |
Index	Profile Name	Domain/Realm	Proxy	Account Number/Name	Trunk Number	Status
1.	2820PBX-101	218.160.234.236	218.160.234.236	101	001	R
2.					002	-
3.					003	-
4.					004	-
5.					005	-
6.					006	-

R: Success registered on SIP server
-:Fail to register on SIP server

Alias List

1. VigorIPPBX 2820 also needs to be registered to VigorIPPBX 3510 with extension number 201. The method of registration is the same as used in VigorIPBPX 3510. However, the registration must be done with the web configuration interface of VigorIPPBX 2820.

IP PBX >> SIP Trunk List

SIP Trunk Index 1

Profile Name 3510PBX-201 (11 char max.) Register via Auto Call without Registration SIP Local Port 5070 Domain/Reallm 59.115.247.248 (63 char max.) Proxy 59.115.247.248 (63 char max.) Proxy Port 5060 Display Name 201 (23 char max.) Account Number/Name 201 (63 char max.) ✓ Authentication ID 201 (63 char max.) Password ... (63 char max.) Expiry Time 30 mins 1800 sec Trunk number 001 (3 char max.) Out-going call CLI Main number Alias number Office hours answer mode Auto Attendant Non-Office hours answer mode Auto Attendant

Note: SIP Local Port can not be equal to PBX Proxy Port.
OK Cancel

The Way of Operation

After finished the above configuration, there are three ways to make a phone call between VigorIPPBX 3510 and VigorIPPBX 2820. Take the extension (202) of VigorIPPBX 3510 calling the extension (102) of VigorIPPBX 2820 as an example:

graph TD
    A["Network"] -->|VigorIPPBX 2820\nSIP trunk 1:\n201@3510PBX| B["VigorIPPBX 3510"]
    A -->|102@2820PBX| C["Client"]
    A -->|102@2820PBX| D["Client"]
    A -->|202@3510PBX| E["Client"]
    A -->|203@3510PBX| F["Client"]
    B -->|SIP trunk 1:\n101@2820PBX| G["Server"]

• Dial 201 (the SIP trunk number in VigorIPPBX 2820) from 202 in IPPBX 3510. You will hear a voice reply first. Then, dial 102 and wait for a moment to communicate with 102.
• Dial 101 (the SIP trunk number in VigorIPPBX 3510) from 202 in IPPBX 3510. Then, dial 102 and wait for a moment to communicate with 102.
• Set one digit map rule in VigorIPPBX 3510. Make all the dialing number with prefix number “1” will be dialed out from SIP trunk 1. After finished the digit map setting, simply dial 102 from 202 in IPPBX 3510, both extensions can communicate with each other. Such method will be easier than above two methods for only one step must be taken.

As for the configuration of Digit Map, please open IPPBX >> DialPlan and choose Digit Map.

IP PBX >> Dial Plan

Dial Plan Configuration

Digit MapPhone BookCall Barring

Check Enable to activate the setting; type 1 in the field of Match Prefix; and choose VoIP 1(SIP trunk 1) as Route. After these, phone number with prefix 1 will be dialed out by VoIP 1.

IP PBX >> DialPlan Setup

Digit Map Setup

#	Enable	Match Prefix	Mode	OP Number	Min Len	Max Len	Route	Backup Route
1	☑	1	None		0	0	VolP1-2820PBX-101	None
2	☐		None		0	0	VolP1-2820PBX-101	None
3	☐		None		0	0	VolP1-2820PBX-101	None

4.22 How to enhance the security for extensions' registration

By default, VigorIPPBX 2820 does not allow registration of extensions from WAN or VPN due to security consideration. You may find this option from the IP PBX >> PBX System >> SIP Proxy Setting page.

Note: The network security will be higher for the extension registered from VPN.

IP PBX >> PBX System

SIP Proxy Setting

SIP Local Port 5060 SIP Proxy Realm PBX.com Parking Server Number 777 Call Pickup Number *1 RTP Local Port Start 15050 RTP Local Port End 20000 Disable registration from WAN Limit SIP Request WAN 64 Request/Sec (Range: 0~64)

However, if it is required, please untick the Disable registration from WAN option then register the extension via VPN tunnel for higher security.

You can achieve the following requests:

● Disable registration from WAN and VPN for all extensions.
- Enable registration from WAN and VPN for all extensions.
- Enable registration from WAN and VPN for some extensions; disable it for all the other extensions.
- Enable registration from WAN for an extension; disable registration from VPN for the same extension.
- Enable registration from VPN for an extension; disable registration from WAN for the same extension.

Disable registration from WAN and allow registration from VPN for specific extensions

1. Please uncheck Disable registration from WAN from the IP PBX >> PBX System >> SIP Proxy Setting page.

IP PBX >> PBX System

SIP Proxy Setting

SIP Local Port 5060 SIP Proxy Realm PBX.com Parking Server Number 777 Call Pickup Number *1 RTP Local Port Start 15050 RTP Local Port End 20000 □ Disable registration from WAN □ Limit SIP Request WAN 0 Request/Sec (Range: 0~64)

1. Then open IP PBX>>Extension. Click any one of the index numbers.
2. Now, you will get the following setup page for an extension. Note that the Allow Registration from option has two check boxes, one for WAN and the other for VPN. These two options are disabled by default, which means this extension is not allowed registration from the interface you choose (e.g., WAN, VPN). This is applied to all extensions by default.

IP PBX >> Extension Profile

Internal Phone Extension Index 2

Internal Phone Extension Active Enable Disable Allow Registration from WAN VPN Type SIP Extension Number --- Display Name --- Authentication Use Display Name as authentication ID Password Enable PPTP VPN Dial-In for this Number/Password E-mail Address Send a test e-mail Voice mail Password MWI Notify User who Subscribed Force Notify User Outgoing Call Use SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 PSTN1 PSTN2 PSTN3 PSTN4 Answer Mode No answer after 60 sec then Keep Ring Busy then Do Nothing Not on-line Do Nothing

For getting the highest network security, please check VPN only.

This page is left blank.

Chapter 5: Reference - Advanced Web Configuration

After finished basic configuration of the router, you can access Internet with ease. For the people who want to adjust more setting for suiting his/her request, please refer to this chapter for getting detailed information about the advanced configuration of this router. As for other examples of application, please refer to chapter 4.

5.1 WAN

Quick Start Wizard offers user an easy method to quick setup the connection mode for the router. Moreover, if you want to adjust more settings for different WAN modes, please go to WAN group and click the Internet Access link.

5.1.1 Basics of Internet Protocol (IP) Network

IP means Internet Protocol. Every device in an IP-based Network including routers, print server, and host PCs, needs an IP address to identify its location on the network. To avoid address conflicts, IP addresses are publicly registered with the Network Information Centre (NIC). Having a unique IP address is mandatory for those devices participated in the public network but not in the private TCP/IP local area networks (LANs), such as host PCs under the management of a router since they do not need to be accessed by the public. Hence, the NIC has reserved certain addresses that will never be registered publicly. These are known as private IP addresses, and are listed in the following ranges:

From 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255

From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255

From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255

What are Public IP Address and Private IP Address

As the router plays a role to manage and further protect its LAN, it interconnects groups of host PCs. Each of them has a private IP address assigned by the built-in DHCP server of the Vigor router. The router itself will also use the default private IP address: 192.168.1.1 to communicate with the local hosts. Meanwhile, Vigor router will communicate with other network devices through a public IP address. When the data flow passing through, the Network Address Translation (NAT) function of the router will dedicate to translate public/private addresses, and the packets will be delivered to the correct host PC in the local area network. Thus, all the host PCs can share a common Internet connection.

Get Your Public IP Address from ISP

In ADSL deployment, the PPP (Point to Point)-style authentication and authorization is required for bridging customer premises equipment (CPE). Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) connects a network of hosts via an access device to a remote access concentrator or aggregation concentrator. This implementation provides users with significant ease of use. Meanwhile it provides access control, billing, and type of service according to user requirement.

When a router begins to connect to your ISP, a serial of discovery process will occur to ask for a connection. Then a session will be created. Your user ID and password is authenticated

via PAP or CHAP with RADIUS authentication system. And your IP address, DNS server, and other related information will usually be assigned by your ISP.

5.1.2 Network Connection by 3G USB Modem

For 3G mobile communication through Access Point is popular more and more, VigorIPPBX 2820 adds the function of 3G network connection for such purpose. By connecting 3G USB Modem to the USB port of VigorIPPBX 2820, it can support

HSDPA/UMTS/EDGE/GPRS/GSM and the future 3G standard (HSUPA, etc). VigorIPPBX 2820 with 3G USB Modem allows you to receive 3G signals at any place such as your car or certain location holding outdoor activity and share the bandwidth for using by more people. Users can use four LAN ports on the router to access Internet. Also, they can access Internet via 802.11n wireless function of VigorIPPBX 2820n, and enjoy the powerful firewall, bandwidth management, VPN, VoIP features of VigorIPPBX 2820 series.

Mobile Coffee shop Internet VoIP Web surfing, E-Mail, Instant messaging etc. VPN Vigor2820 Series 3.5G HSDPA USB Modern

After connecting into the router, 3G USB Modem will be regarded as the second WAN port. However, the original Ethernet WAN1 still can be used and Load-Balance can be done in the router. Besides, 3G USB Modem in WAN2 also can be used as backup device. Therefore, when WAN1 is not available, the router will use 3.5G for supporting automatically. The supported 3G USB Modem will be listed on DrayTek web site. Please visit www.draytek.com for more detailed information.

Below shows the menu items for Internet Access.

WAN ► General Setup ► Internet Access ► Multi-PVCs ► Load-Balance Policy

5.1.3 General Setup

This section will introduce some general settings of Internet and explain the connection modes for WAN1 and WAN2 in details.

This router supports dual WAN function. It allows users to access Internet and combine the bandwidth of the dual WAN to speed up the transmission through the network. Each WAN port can connect to different ISPs, Even if the ISPs use different technology to provide telecommunication service (such as DSL, Cable modem, etc.). If any connection problem occurred on one of the ISP connections, all the traffic will be guided and switched to the normal communication port for proper operation. Please configure WAN1 and WAN2 settings.

This webpage allows you to set general setup for WAN1 and WAN respectively.

Note: In default, WAN1 and WAN2 are enabled.

General Setup

WAN1 Enable: Yes Display Name: Physical Mode: ADSL Physical Type: Auto negotiation Load Balance Mode: Auto Weight Line Speed(Kbps): DownLink 0 UpLink 0 Active Mode: Always On Active on demand: ○ WAN2 Fail ● WAN2 Upload speed exceed 0 Kbps WAN2 Download speed exceed 0 Kbps WAN2 WAN2 Enable: Yes Display Name: Physical Mode: Ethernet Physical Type: Auto negotiation Load Balance Mode: Auto Weight Line Speed(Kbps): DownLink 0 UpLink 0 Active Mode: Always On Active on demand: ○ WAN1 Fail ● WAN1 Upload speed exceed 0 Kbps WAN1 Download speed exceed 0 Kbps

OK

Enable

Choose Yes to invoke the settings for this WAN interface. Choose No to disable the settings for this WAN interface.

Display Name

Type the description for the WAN1/WAN2 interface.

Physical Mode

For WAN1, the physical connection is done through ADSL port; yet the physical connection for WAN2 is done through an Ethernet port (P1) or USB port. You cannot change it.

Physical Mode:

To use 3G network connection through 3G USB Modem,

choose 3G USB Modem as the physical mode in WAN2. Next, go to WAN>> Internet Access. 3G USB Modem is available for WAN2. You can enable PPP as the access mode and complete further configuration.

WAN >> Internet Access

WAN 2 PPP Client Mode Enable Disable SIM PIN code Modem Initial String AT&FEOV1X1&D2&C1SD=0 (Default:AT&FEOV1X1&D2&C1SD=0) APH Name Apply Modem Dial String ATDT*99# (Default:ATDT*99#) PPP Username (Optional) PPP Password (Optional) Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup => , , , , OK Cancel Default

Physical Type

This setting is available for WAN2 only. You can change the physical type for WAN2 or choose Auto negotiation for determined by the system.

Physical Type:

Auto negotiation Auto negotiation 10M half duplex 10M full duplex 100M half duplex 100M full duplex

Load Balance Mode

If you know the practical bandwidth for your WAN interface, please choose the setting of According to Line Speed. Otherwise, please choose Auto Weigh to let the router reach the best load balance.

Load Balance Mode:

Auto Weigh Auto Weigh According to Line Speed

Line Speed

If your choose According to Line Speed as the Load Balance Mode, please type the line speed for downloading and uploading through WAN1/WAN2. The unit is kbps.

Active Mode

Choose Always On to make the WAN connection (WAN1/WAN2) being activated always; or choose Active on demand to make the WAN connection (WAN1/WAN2) activated if it is necessary.

Active Mode:

If you choose Active on demand, the Idle Timeout will be available for you to set for PPPoE and PPTP access modes in the Details Page of WAN>>Internet Access. In addition, there are three selections for you to choose for different purposes.

WAN2 Fail – It means the connection for WAN1 will be activated when WAN2 is failed.

WAN2 Upload speed exceed XX kbps – It means the connection for WAN1 will be activated when WAN2 Upload speed exceed certain value that you set in this box for 15 seconds.

WAN2 Download speed exceed XX kbps— It means the connection for WAN1 will be activated when WAN2 Download speed exceed certain value that you set in this box for 15 seconds.

WAN1 Fail – It means the connection for WAN2 will be activated when WAN1 is failed.

WAN1 Upload speed exceed XX kbps – It means the connection for WAN2 will be activated when WAN1 Upload speed exceed certain value that you set in this box for 15 seconds.

WAN1 Download speed exceed XX kbps– It means the connection for WAN2 will be activated when WAN1 Download speed exceed certain value that you set in this box

for 15 seconds.

5.1.4 Internet Access

For the router supports dual WAN function, the users can set different WAN settings (for WAN1/WAN2) for Internet Access. Due to different physical mode for WAN1 and WAN2, the Access Mode for these two connections also varies slightly.

WAN >> Internet Access

Internet Access

Index	Display Name	Physical Mode	Config Information
WAN1		ADSL	Channel: 1, VPI: 0, VCI: 33, Protocol: PPPoE/LLC/SNAP, Modulation: Multimode, Dynamic IP
WAN2		Ethernet	IP Address: 172.16.3.229, Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0, Gateway IP: 172.16.3.4

Index	It shows the WAN modes that this router supports. WAN1 is the default WAN interface for accessing into the Internet. WAN2 is the optional WAN interface for accessing into the Internet when WAN 1 is inactive for some reason.
Display Name	It shows the name of the WAN1/WAN2 that entered in general setup.
Physical Mode	It shows the physical port for WAN1/WAN2.
Config Information	It shows brief configuration information for WAN1/WAN2 interface.

WAN1 and WAN2 support different protocols. WAN1 supports PPPoE/PPPoA and MPoA. WAN2 supports PPPoE, Static or Dynamic IP and PPTP. According to physical connection of your router, please choose suitable WAN interface link to set detailed information.

PPPoE/PPPoA for WAN1

To use PPPoE/PPPoA as the accessing protocol of the Internet, select PPPoE/PPPoA mode. The following web page will appear.

WAN >> Internet Access

WAN 1

PPPoE / PPPoA MPoA (RFC1483/2684) Enable Disable DSL Modem Settings Multi-PVC channel Channel 1 VPI 8 VCI 35 Encapsulating Type VC MUX Protocol PPPoA Modulation Multimode IPPoE Pass-through For Wired LAN For Wireless LAN ISDN Dial Backup Setup Dial Backup Mode None WAN Connection Detection Mode ARP Detect Ping IP TTL: ISP Access Setup Username Password PPP Authentication PAP or CHAP Idle Timeout -1 second(s) IP Address From ISP WAN IP Alias Fixed IP Yes No (Dynamic IP) Fixed IP Address Default MAC Address Specify a MAC Address MAC Address: 00 50 7F 94 E7 81 Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: => , , , , ,

Enable/Disable

Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable, this function will be closed and all the settings that you adjusted in this page will be invalid.

DSL Modem Settings

Set up the DSL parameters required by your ISP. These are vital for building DSL connection to your ISP.

Multi-PVC channel - The selections displayed here are determined by the page of Internet Access – Multi PVCs. Select M-PVCs Channel means no selection will be chosen.

VPI - Type in the value provided by ISP.

VCI - Type in the value provided by ISP.

Encapsulating Type - Drop down the list to choose the type provided by ISP.

Protocol - Drop down the list to choose the one provided by ISP.

If you have already used Quick Start Wizard to set the

protocol, then it is not necessary for you to change any settings in this group.

Modulation - Default setting is Multimode. Choose the one that fits the requirement of your router.

Modulation

Multimode T1.413 G.Lite G.DMT ADSL2(G.992.3) ADSL2 annex M ADSL2+(G.992.5) ADSL2+ annex M Multimode

PPPoE Pass-through

The router offers PPPoE dial-up connection. Besides, you also can establish the PPPoE connection directly from local clients to your ISP via the Vigor router. When PPPoA protocol is selected, the PPPoE package transmitted by PC will be transformed into PPPoA package and sent to WAN server. Thus, the PC can access Internet through such direction.

For Wired LAN – If you check this box, PCs on the same network can use another set of PPPoE session (different with the Host PC) to access into Internet.

For Wireless LAN – If you check this box, PCs on the same wireless network can use another set of PPPoE session (different with the Host PC) to access into Internet.

ISDN Dial Backup Setup

This setting is available for the routers supporting ISDN function only. Before utilizing the ISDN dial backup feature, you must create a dial backup profile first. Please click ISDN > Dialing to a Single ISP to create the backup profile.

Dial Backup Mode

Note: This feature is available for ISDN 2 port only.

None - Disable the backup function.

Packet Trigger -The backup line is not on until a packet from a local host triggers the router to establish a connection.

Always On - If the broadband connection is no longer available, the backup line will be activated automatically and always on until the broadband connection is restored. We recommend you to enable this feature if you host a web server for your customers' access.

WAN Connection Detection

Such function allows you to verify whether network connection is alive or not through ARP Detect or Ping Detect.

Mode – Choose ARP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection.

Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field for pinging.

TTL (Time to Live) – Displays value for your reference. TTL

value is set by telnet command.

ISP Access Setup

Enter your allocated username, password and authentication parameters according to the information provided by your ISP. If you want to connect to Internet all the time, you can check Always On.

Username – Type in the username provided by ISP in this field.

Password - Type in the password provided by ISP in this field.

PPP Authentication – Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for PPP.

Idle Timeout – Set the timeout for breaking down the Internet after passing through the time without any action. This setting is active only when the Active on demand option for Active Mode is selected in WAN>> General Setup page.

IP Address From ISP

Usually ISP dynamically assigns IP address to you each time you connect to it and request. In some case, your ISP provides service to always assign you the same IP address whenever you request. In this case, you can fill in this IP address in the Fixed IP field. Please contact your ISP before you want to use this function.

WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 8 public IP addresses other than the current one you are using. Notice that this setting is available for WAN1 only. Type the additional WAN IP address and check the Enable box. Then click OK to exit the dialog.

http://192.168.1.1 - WAN IP Alias - Microsoft Internet Explorer WAN IP Alias ( Multi-NAT ) Index Enable Aux. WAN IP Join NAT IP Pool 1. v --- v 2. □ □ 3. □ □ 4. □ □ 5. □ □ 6. □ □ 7. □ □ 8. □ □ OK Clear All Close

Fixed IP – Click Yes to use this function and type in a fixed IP address in the box of Fixed IP Address.

Default MAC Address – You can use Default MAC Address or specify another MAC address by typing on the boxes of MAC Address for the router.

Specify a MAC Address - Type the MAC address for the router manually.

Index (1-15) in Schedule Setup - You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in Applications >> Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page.

After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them.

MPoA for WAN1

MPoA is a specification that enables ATM services to be integrated with existing LANs, which use either Ethernet, token-ring or TCP/IP protocols. The goal of MPoA is to allow different LANs to send packets to each other via an ATM backbone.

To use MPoA as the accessing protocol of the Internet, select MPoA mode. The following web page will appear.

WAN >> Internet Access

WAN 1

PPPoE / PPPoA MPoA (RFC1483/2684) Enable Disable DSL Modem Settings Multi-PVC channel Channel 2 Encapsulation 1483 Bridged IP LLC VPI 0 VCI 88 Modulation Multimode ISDN Dial Backup Setup Dial Backup Mode None WAN Connection Detection Mode ARP Detect Ping IP TTL: RIP Protocol Enable RIP Bridge Mode Enable Bridge Mode WAN IP Network Settings WAN IP Alias Obtain an IP address automatically Router Name * Domain Name * : Required for some ISPs Specify an IP address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address Default MAC Address Specify a MAC Address MAC Address: 00 50 7F 94 E7 D1 DNS Server IP Address Primary IP Address Secondary IP Address OK Cancel

DSL Modem Settings

Set up the DSL parameters required by your ISP. These are vital for building DSL connection to your ISP.

Multi-PVC channel - The selections displayed here are

determined by the page of Internet Access – Multi PVCs. Select M-PVCs Channel means no selection will be chosen. Encapsulating Type - Drop down the list to choose the type provided by ISP.

VPI - Type in the value provided by ISP.

VCI - Type in the value provided by ISP.

Modulation -Default setting is Multimode. Choose the one that fits the requirement of your router.

Modulation

Multimode T1.413 G.Lite G.DMT ADSL2(G.992.3) ADSL2 annex M ADSL2+(G.992.5) ADSL2+ annex M Multimode

ISDN Dial Backup Setup

This setting is available for the routers supporting ISDN function only. Before utilizing the ISDN dial backup feature, you must create a dial backup profile first. Please click ISDN > Dialing to a Single ISP to create the backup profile.

Dial Backup Mode

Note: This feature is available for ISDN 2 port only.

None - Disable the backup function.

Packet Trigger -The backup line is not on until a packet from a local host triggers the router to establish a connection.

Always On - If the broadband connection is no longer

available, the backup line will be activated automatically and always on until the broadband connection is restored. We recommend you to enable this feature if you host a web server for your customers' access.

WAN Connection Detection

Such function allows you to verify whether network connection is alive or not through ARP Detect or Ping Detect.

Mode – Choose ARP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection.

Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field for pinging.

TTL (Time to Live) – Displays value for your reference. TTL value is set by telnet command.

RIP Protocol

Routing Information Protocol is abbreviated as RIP (RFC1058) specifying how routers exchange routing tables information. Click Enable RIP for activating this function.

Bridge Mode

If you choose Bridged IP as the protocol, you can check this box to invoke the function. The router will work as a bridge modem.

WAN IP Network Settings

This group allows you to obtain an IP address automatically and allows you type in IP address manually.

Obtain an IP address automatically – Click this button to obtain the IP address automatically.

Router Name – Type in the router name provided by ISP.

Domain Name – Type in the domain name that you have assigned.

Specify an IP address – Click this radio button to specify some data.

WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 8 public IP addresses other than the current one you are using. Notice that this setting is available for WAN1 only. Type the additional WAN IP address and check the Enable box. Then click OK to exit the dialog.

http://192.168.1.1 - WAN IP Alias - Microsoft Internet Explorer WAN IP Alias ( Multi-NAT ) Index Enable Aux. WAN IP Join NAT IP Pool 1. v --- v 2. □ 3. □ 4. □ 5. □ 6. □ 7. □ 8. □ OK Clear All Close

IP Address – Type in the private IP address.

Subnet Mask - Type in the subnet mask.

Gateway IP Address – Type in gateway IP address.

Default MAC Address - Type in MAC address for the router. You can use Default MAC Address or specify another MAC address for your necessity.

MAC Address – Type in the MAC address for the router manually.

DNS Server IP Address

Type in the primary IP address for the router. If necessary, type in secondary IP address for necessity in the future.

After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them.

PPPoE for WAN2

To use PPPoE as the accessing protocol of the Internet, select PPPoE mode. The following web page will appear.

WAN >> Internet Access

WAN 2

PPPoE Static or Dynamic IP PPTP Enable Disable ISP Access Setup Username Password Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: => , , , , , ISDN Dial Backup Setup Dial Backup Mode None WAN Connection Detection Mode ARP Detect Ping IP TTL: PPP/MP Setup PPP Authentication PAP or CHAP Idle Timeout -1 second(s) IP Address Assignment Method (IPCP) WAN IP Alias Fixed IP: Yes No (Dynamic IP) Fixed IP Address Default MAC Address Specify a MAC Address MAC Address: 00 .50 .7F :94 .E7 .D2

Enable/Disable

Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable, this function will be closed and all the settings that you adjusted in this page will be invalid.

ISP Access Setup

Enter your allocated username, password and authentication parameters according to the information provided by your ISP. If you want to connect to Internet all the time, you can check Always On.

Username – Type in the username provided by ISP in this field.

Password - Type in the password provided by ISP in this field.

Index (1-15) in Schedule Setup - You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in Application – Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page.

ISDN Dial Backup Setup

This setting is available for the routers supporting ISDN function only. Before utilizing the ISDN dial backup feature, you must create a dial backup profile first. Please click ISDN > Dialing to a Single ISP to create the backup profile.

Note: This feature is available for ISDN 2 port only.

None - Disable the backup function.

	Packet Trigger -The backup line is not on until a packet from a local host triggers the router to establish a connection.
WAN Connection Detection	Such function allows you to verify whether network connection is alive or not through ARP Detect or Ping Detect. Mode – Choose ARP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection. Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field for pinging.
TTL (Time to Live) – Displays value for your reference. TTL value is set by telnet command.
PPP/MP Setup	PPP Authentication – Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for PPP. Idle Timeout – Set the timeout for breaking down the Internet after passing through the time without any action. This setting is active only when the Active on demand option for Active Mode is selected in WAN>> General Setup page.
IP Address Assignment Method (IPCP)	Usually ISP dynamically assigns IP address to you each time you connect to it and request. In some case, your ISP provides service to always assign you the same IP address whenever you request. In this case, you can fill in this IP address in the Fixed IP field. Please contact your ISP before you want to use this function. WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 8 public IP addresses other than the current one you are using. Notice that this setting is available for WAN1 only. Type the additional WAN IP address and check the Enable box. Then click OK to exit the dialog.

http://192.168.1.1 - WAN IP Alias - Microsoft Internet Explorer WAN IP Alias ( Multi-NAT ) Index Enable Aux. WAN IP Join NAT IP Pool 1. v --- v 2. □ □ 3. □ □ 4. □ □ 5. □ □ 6. □ □ 7. □ □ 8. □ □ OK Clear All Close

Fixed IP - Click Yes to use this function and type in a fixed IP address in the box of Fixed IP Address.

Fixed IP Address -Type a fixed IP address.

Default MAC Address – You can use Default MAC Address or specify another MAC address by typing on the boxes of MAC Address for the router.

Specify a MAC Address - Type the MAC address for the router manually.

After finishing all the settings here, please click OK to activate them.

Static or Dynamic IP for WAN2

For static IP mode, you usually receive a fixed public IP address or a public subnet, namely multiple public IP addresses from your DSL or Cable ISP service providers. In most cases, a Cable service provider will offer a fixed public IP, while a DSL service provider will offer a public subnet. If you have a public subnet, you could assign an IP address or many IP address to the WAN interface.

To use static or dynamic IP as the accessing protocol of the Internet, select Static or Dynamic IP mode. The following web page will appear.

WAN 2

PPPoE Static or Dynamic IP PPTP Enable Disable ISDN Dial Backup Setup Dial Backup Mode None Keep WAN Connection Enable PING to keep alive PING to the IP PING Interval 0 minute(s) WAN Connection Detection Mode ARP Detect Ping IP TTL: RIP Protocol Enable RIP WAN IP Network Settings WAN IP Alias Obtain an IP address automatically Router Name * Domain Name * *: Required for some ISPs Specify an IP address IP Address 172.16.3.229 Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0 Gateway IP Address 172.16.3.4 Default MAC Address Specify a MAC Address MAC Address: 00 50 7F 94 E7 D2 DNS Server IP Address Primary IP Address Secondary IP Address

Enable/ Disable

Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable, this function will be closed and all the settings that you adjusted in this page will be invalid.

ISDN Dial Backup Setup

This setting is available for the routers supporting ISDN function only. Before utilizing the ISDN dial backup feature, you must create a dial backup profile first. Please click ISDN > Dialing to a Single ISP to create the backup profile.

Dial Backup Mode

Note: This feature is available for ISDN 2 port only.

None - Disable the backup function.

Packet Trigger -The backup line is not on until a packet from a local host triggers the router to establish a connection.

Always On - If the broadband connection is no longer

available, the backup line will be activated automatically and always on until the broadband connection is restored. We recommend you to enable this feature if you host a web server for your customers' access.

Keep WAN Connection

Normally, this function is designed for Dynamic IP environments because some ISPs will drop connections if there is no traffic within certain periods of time. Check Enable PING to keep alive box to activate this function.

	PING to the IP - If you enable the PING function, please specify the IP address for the system to PING it for keeping alive.
	PING Interval - Enter the interval for the system to execute the PING operation.
WAN Connection Detection	Such function allows you to verify whether network connection is alive or not through ARP Detect or Ping Detect.
	Mode – Choose Always On, ARP Detect or Ping Detect for the system to execute for WAN detection.
	Ping IP – If you choose Ping Detect as detection mode, you have to type IP address in this field for pinging.

TTL (Time to Live) – Displays value for your reference. TTL value is set by telnet command.

RIP Protocol Routing Information Protocol is abbreviated as RIP (RFC1058) specifying how routers exchange routing tables information. Click Enable RIP for activating this function.

WAN IP Network Settings This group allows you to obtain an IP address automatically and allows you type in IP address manually.

WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 8 public IP addresses other than the current one you are using. Notice that this setting is available for WAN1 only. Type the additional WAN IP address and check the Enable box. Then click OK to exit the dialog.

http://192.168.1.1 - WAN IP Alias - Microsoft Internet Explorer WAN IP Alias ( Multi-NAT ) Index Enable Aux. WAN IP Join NAT IP Pool 1. v --- v 2. □ □ 3. □ □ 4. □ □ 5. □ □ 6. □ □ 7. □ □ 8. □ □ OK Clear All Close

Obtain an IP address automatically – Click this button to obtain the IP address automatically if you want to use Dynamic IP mode.

Router Name: Type in the router name provided by ISP.

Domain Name: Type in the domain name that you have assigned.

Specify an IP address – Click this radio button to specify some data if you want to use Static IP mode.

IP Address: Type the IP address.

Subnet Mask: Type the subnet mask.

Gateway IP Address: Type the gateway IP address.

Default MAC Address: Click this radio button to use default MAC address for the router.

Specify a MAC Address: Some Cable service providers specify a specific MAC address for access authentication. In such cases you need to click the Specify a MAC Address and enter the MAC address in the MAC Address field.

DNS Server IP Address

Type in the primary IP address for the router if you want to use Static IP mode. If necessary, type in secondary IP address for necessity in the future.

PPTP/L2TP for WAN2

To use PPTP/L2TP as the accessing protocol of the Internet, select PPTP/L2TP mode. The following web page will appear.

WAN >> Internet Access

WAN 2

PPPoE Static or Dynamic IP Enable PPTP Enable L2TP Disable Server Address Specify Gateway IP Address 192.168.5.1 ISP Access Setup Username Password Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: =>, , , , ISDN Dial Backup Setup Dial Backup Mode None PPP Setup PPP Authentication PAP or CHAP Idle Timeout -1 second(s) IP Address Assignment Method (IPCP) WAN IP Alias Fixed IP: Yes No (Dynamic IP) Fixed IP Address WAN IP Network Settings Obtain an IP address automatically Specify an IP address IP Address 192.168.5.10 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 OK Cancel

Enable PPTP/Enable L2TP

Click Enable PPTP/Enable L2TP for activating this function.

Disable

If you click Disable, this function will be closed and all the settings that you adjusted in this page will be invalid.

Server Address

Specify the IP address of the PPTP/L2TP server.

Specify Gateway IP Address

Specify the gateway IP address for the server.

ISP Access Setup

Username -Type in the username provided by ISP in this field.

Password -Type in the password provided by ISP in this field.

Index (1-15) in Schedule Setup - You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in Application >>Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page.

ISDN Dial Backup Setup

This setting is available for the routers supporting ISDN function only. Before utilizing the ISDN dial backup feature, you must create a dial backup profile first. Please click ISDN > Dialing to a Single ISP to create the backup profile.

Dial Backup Mode

Note: This feature is available for ISDN 2 port only.

None - Disable the backup function.

PPP Setup

Packet Trigger -The backup line is not on until a packet from a local host triggers the router to establish a connection.

PPP Authentication - Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for PPP.

Idle Timeout - Set the timeout for breaking down the Internet after passing through the time without any action. This setting is active only when the Active on demand option for Active Mode is selected in WAN>> General Setup page.

IP Address Assignment Method(IPCP)

Usually ISP dynamically assigns IP address to you each time you connect to it and request. In some case, your ISP provides service to always assign you the same IP address whenever you request. In this case, you can fill in this IP address in the Fixed IP field. Please contact your ISP before you want to use this function.

WAN IP Alias - If you have multiple public IP addresses and would like to utilize them on the WAN interface, please use WAN IP Alias. You can set up to 8 public IP addresses other than the current one you are using. Notice that this setting is available for WAN1 only. Type the additional WAN IP address and check the Enable box. Then click OK to exit the dialog.

http://192.168.1.1 - WAN IP Alias - Microsoft Internet Explorer WAN IP Alias ( Multi-NAT ) Index Enable Aux. WAN IP Join NAT IP Pool 1. v --- v 2. □ 3. □ 4. □ 5. □ 6. □ 7. □ 8. □ OK Clear All Close

Click Yes to use this function and type in a fixed IP address in the box.

Fixed IP - Click Yes to use this function and type in a fixed IP address in the box of Fixed IP Address.

Fixed IP Address -Type a fixed IP address.

WAN IP Network Settings

Obtain an IP address automatically – Click this button to obtain the IP address automatically.

Specify an IP address – Click this radio button to specify some data.

IP Address – Type the IP address.

Subnet Mask - Type the subnet mask.

PPP for WAN2

Such mode is active only 3G USB Modem was chosen as the physical mode in General Setup.

WAN >> Internet Access

WAN 2

PPP Client Mode Enable Disable SIM PIN code Modem Initial String AT&FE0V1X1&D2&C1S0=0 (Default:AT&FE0V1X1&D2&C1S0=0) APN Name Apply Modem Dial String ATDT*99# (Default:ATDT*99#) PPP Username (Optional) PPP Password (Optional) Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: => , , , , , OK Cancel Default

PPP Client Mode

Click Enable to activate this mode for WAN2.

SIM PIN code

Type PIN code of the SIM card that will be used to access Internet.

Modem Initial String

Such value is used to initialize USB modem. Please use the default value. If you have any question, please contact to your ISP.

APN Name

APN(Access Point Name) is provided by your ISP for identifying different access points. Simply click Apply to apply such name. Finally, you have to click OK to save the setting.

Apply - Activate the function of identification.

Modem Dial String

Such value is used to dial through USB mode. Please use the default value. If you have any question, please contact to your ISP.

PPP Username

Type the PPP username (optional).

PPP Password

Type the PPP password (optional).

Index (1-15)

Set the PCs on LAN to work at certain time interval only. You may choose up to 4 schedules out of the 15 schedules pre-defined in Applications >> Schedule setup. The default setting of this filed is blank and the function will always work.

5.1.5 Multi-PVCs

This router allows you to create multi-PVCs for different data transferring for using. Simply go to Internet Access and select Multi-PVC Setup page.

General

The system allows you to set up to eight channels which are ready for choosing as the first PVC line that will be used as multi-PVCs.

WAN >> Multi-PVCs

Multi-PVCs

General		ATM QoS		Port-based Bridge
Channel		Enable	VPI	VCI	QoS Type	Protocol	Encapsulation
1.		√	0	33	UBR	PPPoE	LLC/SNAP
2.		√	0	88	UBR	MPoA	1483 Bridged IP LLC
3.	WAN	□	1	43	UBR	PPPoA	VC MUX
4.	WAN	□	1	44	UBR	PPPoA	VC MUX
5.	WAN	□	1	45	UBR	PPPoA	VC MUX
6.		□	1	46	UBR	PPPoA	VC MUX
7.		□	1	47	UBR	PPPoA	VC MUX
8.		□	1	48	UBR	PPPoA	VC MUX

Note: VPI/VCI must be unique for each channel!

Enable

Check this box to enable that channel. The channels that you enabled here will be shown in the Multi-PVC channel drop down list on the web page of Internet Access. Though you can enable eight channels in this page, yet only one channel can be chosen on the web page of Internet Access.

VPI

Type in the value provided by your ISP.

VCI

Type in the value provided by your ISP.

QoS Type

Select a proper QoS type for the channel.

Protocol

Select a proper protocol for this channel.

Encapsulation

Choose a proper type for this channel. The types will be different according to the protocol setting that you choose.

Encapsulation 1483 Route IP LLC 1483 Bridged IP LLC 1483 Route IP LLC 1483 Bridged IP VC-Mux 1483 Routed IP VC-Mux(IPoA) 1483 Bridged IP(IPoE) Encapsulation VC MUX VC MUX LLC/SNAP

WAN link for Channel 3, 4, 5 are provided for router-borne application such as TR069 and VoIP. The settings must be applied and obtained from your ISP. For your special request, please contact with your ISP and then click WAN link of Channel 3, 4 or 5 to configure your router.

WAN >> Multi-PVCs >> PVC Channel 3

WAN for Router-borne Application: Management Enable Disable DSL Modem Settings VPI 1 QoS Type UBR VCI 43 Protocol PPPoA Encapsulation VC MUX PPPoE/PPPoA Client ISP Access Setup ISP Name Username Password PPP Authentication PAP or CHAP Always On Idle Timeout -1 second(s) IP Address From ISP Fixed IP Yes No (Dynamic IP) Fixed IP Address MPoA (RFC1483/2684) Obtain an IP address automatically Router Name * Domain Name * *: Required for some ISPs Specify an IP address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address DNS Server IP Address Primary IP Address Secondary IP Address OK Cancel

WAN for Router-borne Application

Choose the router service for channel 3, 4 or 5.

Management - It can be specified for general management (Web configuration/telnet/TR069). If you choose Management, the configuration for this PVC will be effective for Web configuration/telnet/TR069.

VoIP - It can be specified for VoIP only. If you choose VoIP, the configuration for this PVC will be effective for VoIP data transmitting and receiving.

Enable/Disable Click Enable for activating this function. If you click Disable,

this function will be closed and all the settings that you adjusted in this page will be invalid.

DSL Modem Settings

Set up the DSL parameters required by your ISP. These are vital for building DSL connection to your ISP.

VPI - Type in the value provided by ISP.

VCI - Type in the value provided by ISP.

QoS Type -Select a proper QoS type for the channel.

Protocol - Select a proper protocol for this channel. There are three options, PPPoE, PPPoA and MPoA for you to select. The following settings will be changed according to the protocol selected here.

Encapsulating Type - Drop down the list to choose the type provided by ISP.

ISP Access Setup

Enter your allocated username, password and authentication parameters according to the information provided by your ISP. If you want to connect to Internet all the time, you can check Always On.

Username – Type in the username provided by ISP in this field.

Password - Type in the password provided by ISP in this field.

PPP Authentication – Select PAP only or PAP or CHAP for PPP.

Idle Timeout - Set the timeout for breaking down the Internet after passing through the time without any action. This setting is active only when the Always On option is note selected.

IP Address from ISP

Fixed IP - Click Yes to use this function and type in a fixed IP address in the box of Fixed IP Address.

Fixed IP Address -Type a fixed IP address.

Obtain an IP address automatically

Click this button to obtain the IP address automatically.

Router Name - Type in the router name provided by ISP.

Domain Name - Type in the domain name that you have assigned.

Specify an IP address

Click this radio button to specify some data.

IP Address – Type in the private IP address.

Subnet Mask - Type in the subnet mask.

Gateway IP Address - Type in gateway IP address.

DNS Server IP Address

Type in the primary IP address for the router. If necessary, type in secondary IP address for necessity in the future.

ATM QoS

Such configuration is applied to upstream packets. Such information will be provided by ISP. Please contact with your ISP for detailed information.

WAN >> Multi-PVCs

Multi-PVCs

General	ATM QoS	Port-based Bridge
Channel	QoS Type	PCR	SCR	MBS
1.	UBR	0	0	0
2.	UBR	0	0	0
3.	UBR	0	0	0
4.	UBR	0	0	0
5.	UBR	0	0	0
6.	UBR	0	0	0
7.	UBR	0	0	0
8.	UBR	0	0	0

Note: 1. Set 0 means default value.
2.PCR(max) = ADSL Up Speed / 53 / 8.

QoS Type

Select a proper QoS type for the channel according to the information that your ISP provides.

QoS Type

PCR

It represents Peak Cell Rate. The default setting is "0".

SCR

It represents Sustainable Cell Rate. The value of SCR must be smaller than PCR.

MBS

It represents Maximum Burst Size. The range of the value is 10 to 50.

Port-based Bridge

General page lets you set the first PVC. As to set the second PVC line, please click the Port-based Bridge tab to open Bridge configuration page.

WAN >> Multi-PVCs

Multi-PVCs

General	ATM QoS		Port-based Bridge
Channel	Enable	P1	P2	P3	P4	Service Type	Add Tag
1.						Normal
2.						Normal
3.						Normal
4.						Normal
5.						NormalIGMP
6.						Normal
7.						Normal
8.						Normal

Note: 1. Channel 1 to 2 are reserved for Nat/Route use.
2.P1 is reserved for Nat/Route use.

Enable

Check this box to enable that channel. Only channel 3 to 8 can be set in this page, for channel 1 to 4 are reserved for NAT using.

P1 to P4

It means the LAN port 1 to 4. Check the box to designate the LAN port for channel 3 to 8.

Service Type

Normally, service type is used for the service of video stream (e.g., IPTV). It can divide the packets from remote control and from video stream into different PVC. In general, the protocol used by remote control is IGMP.

Normal – It means that the PVC can accept all packets except IGMP.

IGMP - It means that the PVC can accept packets of IGMP only.

Add Tag

To identify the usage of PVC, check this box to invoke this setting. And type the number for VLAN ID (number).

Click Clear to remove all the configurations in this page if you do not satisfy it. When you finish the configuration, please click OK to save and exit this page. Or click Cancel to abort the configuration and exit this page.

5.1.6 Load-Balance Policy

This router supports the function of load balancing. It can assign traffic with protocol type, IP address for specific host, a subnet of hosts, and port range to be allocated in WAN1 or WAN2 interface. The user can assign traffic category and force it to go to dedicate network interface based on the following web page setup. Twenty policies of load-balance are supported by this router.

Note: Load-Balance Policy is running only when both WAN1 and WAN2 are activated.

WAN >> Load-Balance Policy

Load-Balance Policy

Index	Enable	Protocol	WAN	Src IP Start	Src IP End	Dest IP Start	Dest IP End	Dest Port Start	Dest Port End	Move Up	Move Down
1		any	WAN1								Down
2		any	WAN1							UP	Down
3		any	WAN1							UP	Down
4		any	WAN1							UP	Down
5		any	WAN1							UP	Down
6		any	WAN1							UP	Down
7		any	WAN1							UP	Down
8		any	WAN1							UP	Down
9		any	WAN1							UP	Down
10		any	WAN1							UP	Down

OK

Index

Click the number of index to access into the load-balance policy configuration web page.

Enable

Check this box to enable this policy.

Protocol

Use the drop-down menu to change the protocol for the WAN interface.

any any TCP UDP TCP/UDP ICMP IGMP

WAN

Use the drop-down menu to change the WAN interface.

Src IP Start

Displays the IP address for the start of the source IP.

Src IP End Displays the IP address for the end of the source IP.

Dest IP Start Displays the IP address for the start of the destination IP.

Dest IP End Displays the IP address for the end of the destination IP.

Dest Port Start Displays the IP address for the start of the destination port.

Dest Port End Displays the IP address for the end of the destination port.

Move UP/Move Down Use Up or Down link to move the order of the policy.

Click Index 1 to access into the following page for configuring load-balance policy.

WAN >> Load-Balance Policy

Index: 1

Enable Protocol any Binding WAN Interface WAN1 Auto failover to the other WAN Src IP Start Src IP End Dest IP Start Dest IP End Dest Port Start Dest Port End

Enable Check this box to enable this policy.

Protocol Use the drop-down menu to choose a proper protocol for the WAN interface.

Protocol

any any TCP UDP TCP/UDP ICMP IGMP

Binding WAN Choose the WAN interface (WAN1 or WAN2) for binding. interface

Auto failover to other WAN - Check this button to lead the data passing through other WAN automatically when the selected WAN interface is disconnected.

Src IP Start Type the source IP start for the specified WAN interface.

Src IP End Type the source IP end for the specified WAN interface. If this field is blank, it means that all the source IPs inside the LAN

will be passed through the WAN interface.

Dest IP Start

Type the destination IP start for the specified WAN interface.

Dest IP End

Type the destination IP end for the specified WAN interface. If this field is blank, it means that all the destination IPs will be passed through the WAN interface.

Dest Port Start

Type the destination port start for the destination IP.

Dest Port End

Type the destination port end for the destination IP. If this field is blank, it means that all the destination ports will be passed through the WAN interface.

5.2 LAN

Local Area Network (LAN) is a group of subnets regulated and ruled by router. The design of network structure is related to what type of public IP addresses coming from your ISP.

LAN ► General Setup ► Static Route ► VLAN ► Bind IP to MAC

5.2.1 Basics of LAN

The most generic function of Vigor router is NAT. It creates a private subnet of your own. As mentioned previously, the router will talk to other public hosts on the Internet by using public IP address and talking to local hosts by using its private IP address. What NAT does is to translate the packets from public IP address to private IP address to forward the right packets to the right host and vice versa. Besides, Vigor router has a built-in DHCP server that assigns private IP address to each local host. See the following diagram for a briefly understanding.

graph TD
    A["Internet"] --> B["NAT"]
    B --> C["DHCP Server"]
    C --> D["Private Subnet Router IP Address:192.168.1.1"]
    D --> E["192.168.1.10"]
    D --> F["192.168.1.11"]
    D --> G["192.168.1.12"]
    D --> H["192.168.1.13"]

In some special case, you may have a public IP subnet from your ISP such as 220.135.240.0/24. This means that you can set up a public subnet or call second subnet that each host is equipped with a public IP address. As a part of the public subnet, the Vigor router will serve for IP routing to help hosts in the public subnet to communicate with other public hosts or servers outside. Therefore, the router should be set as the gateway for public hosts.

graph TD
    A["Internet"] --> B["Router"]
    B --> C["Public Subnet"]
    C --> D["192.168.1.22"]
    C --> E["192.168.1.11"]
    C --> F["220.135.240.210"]
    C --> G["220.135.240.209"]
    H["NAT"] --> B
    I["Public IP Address: 220.135.240.207"] -.-> B

What is Routing Information Protocol (RIP)

Vigor router will exchange routing information with neighboring routers using the RIP to accomplish IP routing. This allows users to change the information of the router such as IP address and the routers will automatically inform for each other.

What is Static Route

When you have several subnets in your LAN, sometimes a more effective and quicker way for connection is the Static routes function rather than other method. You may simply set rules to forward data from one specified subnet to another specified subnet without the presence of RIP.

What are Virtual LANs

You can group local hosts by physical ports and create up to 4 virtual LANs. To manage the communication between different groups, please set up rules in Virtual LAN (VLAN) function and the rate of each.

graph TD
    A["Internet"] --> B["DRayTek 2820"]
    B --> C["VLAN0"]
    B --> D["VLAN1"]
    B --> E["VLAN0"]
    B --> F["VLAN1"]
    B --> G["VLAN0"]
    B --> H["VLAN1"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#ffc,stroke:#333

5.2.2 General Setup

This page provides you the general settings for LAN.

Click LAN to open the LAN settings page and choose General Setup.

LAN >> General Setup

Ethernet TCP / IP and DHCP Setup

LAN IP Network Configuration

For NAT Usage

1st IP Address

1st Subnet Mask

192.168.1.1

255.255.255.0

For IP Routing Usage

2nd IP Address

2nd Subnet Mask

Enable

192.168.2.1

255.255.255.0

2nd Subnet DHCP Server

RIP Protocol Control

Disable

DHCP Server Configuration

Enable Server Disable Server

Relay Agent: ○ 1st Subnet ○ 2nd Subnet

Start IP Address 192.168.1.10

IP Pool Counts 50

Gateway IP Address 192.168.1.1

DHCP Server IP Address for Relay Agent

DNS Server IP Address

□ Force DNS manual setting

Primary IP Address

Secondary IP Address

1st IP Address

Type in private IP address for connecting to a local private network (Default: 192.168.1.1).

1st Subnet Mask

Type in an address code that determines the size of the network. (Default: 255.255.255.0/24)

For IP Routing Usage

Click Enable to invoke this function. The default setting is Disable.

2^nd IP Address

Type in secondary IP address for connecting to a subnet. (Default: 192.168.2.1/24)

2 ^nd Subnet Mask

An address code that determines the size of the network.

(Default: 255.255.255.0/24)

2^nd DHCP Server

You can configure the router to serve as a DHCP server for the 2nd subnet.

http://192.168.1.1 - Router Web Configurator - Microsoft Internet Explorer 2nd DHCP Server Start IP Address IP Pool Counts 0 (max. 10) Index Matched MAC Address given IP Address MAC Address : Add Delete Edit Cancel OK Clear All Close

Start IP Address: Enter a value of the IP address pool for the DHCP server to start with when issuing IP addresses. If the 2nd IP address of your router is 220.135.240.1, the starting IP address must be 220.135.240.2 or greater, but smaller than 220.135.240.254.

IP Pool Counts: Enter the number of IP addresses in the pool. The maximum is 10. For example, if you type 3 and the 2nd IP address of your router is 220.135.240.1, the range of IP address by the DHCP server will be from 220.135.240.2 to 220.135.240.4.

MAC Address: Enter the MAC Address of the host one by one and click Add to create a list of hosts to be assigned, deleted or edited IP address from above pool. Set a list of MAC Address for 2^nd DHCP server will help router to assign the correct IP address of the correct subnet to the correct host. So those hosts in 2^nd subnet won't get an IP address belonging to 1^st subnet.

RIP Protocol Control

Disable deactivates the RIP protocol. It will lead to a stoppage of the exchange of routing information between routers. (Default)

RIP Protocol Control

1st Subnet - Select the router to change the RIP information of the 1st subnet with neighboring routers.

2nd Subnet - Select the router to change the RIP information of the 2nd subnet with neighboring routers.

DHCP Server Configuration

DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. The router by factory default acts a DHCP server for your network so it automatically dispatch related IP settings to any local user

configured as a DHCP client. It is highly recommended that you leave the router enabled as a DHCP server if you do not have a DHCP server for your network.

If you want to use another DHCP server in the network other

than the Vigor Router's, you can let Relay Agent help you to redirect the DHCP request to the specified location.

Enable Server - Let the router assign IP address to every host in the LAN.

Disable Server – Let you manually assign IP address to every host in the LAN.

Relay Agent - (1

^st subnet/2 ^nd subnet) Specify which subnet

that DHCP server is located the relay agent should redirect the DHCP request to.

Start IP Address - Enter a value of the IP address pool for the DHCP server to start with when issuing IP addresses. If the 1st IP address of your router is 192.168.1.1, the starting IP address must be 192.168.1.2 or greater, but smaller than 192.168.1.254.

IP Pool Counts - Enter the maximum number of PCs that you want the DHCP server to assign IP addresses to. The default is 50 and the maximum is 253.

Gateway IP Address - Enter a value of the gateway IP address for the DHCP server. The value is usually as same as the 1st IP address of the router, which means the router is the default gateway.

DHCP Server IP Address for Relay Agent - Set the IP address of the DHCP server you are going to use so the Relay Agent can help to forward the DHCP request to the DHCP server.

DNS Server

Configuration

DNS stands for Domain Name System. Every Internet host must have a unique IP address, also they may have a human-friendly, easy to remember name such as www.yahoo.com. The DNS server converts the user-friendly name into its equivalent IP address.

Force DNS manual setting -

Force Vigor router to use DNS

servers in this page instead of DNS servers given by the Internet Access server (PPPoE, PPTP, L2TP or DHCP server).

Primary IP Address - You must specify a DNS server IP address here because your ISP should provide you with usually more than one DNS Server. If your ISP does not provide it, the router will automatically apply default DNS Server IP address: 194.109.6.66 to this field.

Secondary IP Address - You can specify secondary DNS server IP address here because your ISP often provides you more than one DNS Server. If your ISP does not provide it, the router will automatically apply default secondary DNS Server IP address: 194.98.0.1 to this field.

The default DNS Server IP address can be found via Online

Status:

System Status		System Uptime: 2:10:17
LAN Status	Primary DNS: 194.109.6.66		Secondary DNS: 168.95.1.1
IP Address	TX Packets	RX Packets
192.168.1.1	7508	175019

If both the Primary IP and Secondary IP Address fields are left

empty, the router will assign its own IP address to local users as a DNS proxy server and maintain a DNS cache.

If the IP address of a domain name is already in the DNS

cache, the router will resolve the domain name immediately. Otherwise, the router forwards the DNS query packet to the external DNS server by establishing a WAN (e.g. DSL/Cable) connection.

There are two common scenarios of LAN settings that stated in

Chapter 4. For the configuration examples, please refer to that chapter to get more information for your necessity.

5.2.3 Static Route

Go to LAN to open setting page and choose Static Route.

LAN >> Static Route Setup

Static Route Configuration			Set to Factory Default	View Routing Table
Index	Destination Address	Status	Index	Destination Address
1.	???	?	6.	???
2.	???	?	7.	???
3.	???	?	8.	???
4.	???	?	9.	???
5.	???	?	10.	???

Status: v --- Active, x --- Inactive, ? --- Empty

Index

The number (1 to 10) under Index allows you to open next page to set up static route.

Destination Address

Displays the destination address of the static route.

Status

Displays the status of the static route.

Viewing Routing Table

Displays the routing table for your reference.

Diagnostics >> View Routing Table

Current Running Routing Table				Refresh
Key: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, * - default, ~ - private
*	0.0.0.0/	0.0.0.0 via 172.16.3.4,	VAN2
C~	192.168.1.0/	255.255.255.0 is directly connected,	LAN
C	172.16.0.0/	255.255.0.0 is directly connected,	VAN2

Add Static Routes to Private and Public Networks

Here is an example of setting Static Route in Main Router so that user A and B locating in different subnet can talk to each other via the router. Assuming the Internet access has been configured and the router works properly:

● use the Main Router to surf the Internet.
● create a private subnet 192.168.10.0 using an internal Router A (192.168.1.2)
● create a public subnet 211.100.88.0 via an internal Router B (192.168.1.3).
● have set Main Router 192.168.1.1 as the default gateway for the Router A 192.168.1.2.

Before setting Static Route, user A cannot talk to user B for Router A can only forward recognized packets to its default gateway Main Router.

graph TD
    A["Internet"] --> B["Router C 192.168.1.1"]
    B --> C["Router A 192.168.1.2 (Gateway: 192.168.1.1)"]
    B --> D["Router B 192.168.1.3"]
    C --> E["Private subnet 192.168.10.0/24"]
    D --> F["Private subnet 211.10.88.0/24"]
    G["Set Static Route"] --> B

1. Go to LAN page and click General Setup, select 1st Subnet as the RIP Protocol Control. Then click the OK button.

Note: There are two reasons that we have to apply RIP Protocol Control on 1st Subnet. The first is that the LAN interface can exchange RIP packets with the neighboring routers via the 1st subnet (192.168.1.0/24). The second is that those hosts on the internal private subnets (ex. 192.168.10.0/24) can access the Internet via the router, and continuously exchange of IP routing information with different subnets.

1. Click the LAN - Static Route and click on the Index Number 1. Check the Enable box. Please add a static route as shown below, which regulates all packets destined to 192.168.10.0 will be forwarded to 192.168.1.2. Click OK.

LAN >> Static Route Setup

Index No. 1

Enable Destination IP Address 192.168.10.0 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Gateway IP Address 192.168.1.2 Network Interface LAN OK Cancel

1. Return to Static Route Setup page. Click on another Index Number to add another static route as show below, which regulates all packets destined to 211.100.88.0 will be forwarded to 192.168.1.3.

LAN >> Static Route Setup

Index No. 2

Enable Destination IP Address 211.100.88.0 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0 Gateway IP Address 192.168.1.3 Network Interface LAN OK Cancel

1. Go to Diagnostics and choose Routing Table to verify current routing table.

Diagnostics >> View Routing Table

Current Running Routing Table Key: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, * - default, ~ - private S~ 192.168.10.0/ 255.255.255.0 via 192.168.1.2, LAN C~ 192.168.1.0/ 255.255.255.0 is directly connected, LAN S~ 211.100.88.0/ 255.255.255.0 via 192.168.1.3, LAN

5.2.4 VLAN

Virtual LAN function provides you a very convenient way to manage hosts by grouping them based on the physical ports. You can also manage the in/out rate of each port. Go to LAN page and select VLAN. The following page will appear. Click Enable to invoke VLAN function.

LAN >> VLAN Configuration

VLAN Configuration

	P1	P2	P3	P4	SSID1	SSID2	SSID3	SSID4
VLAN0
VLAN1
VLAN2
VLAN3
VLAN4
VLAN5
VLAN6
VLAN7

To add or remove a VLAN, please refer to the following example.

1. If, VLAN 0 is consisted of hosts linked to P1 and P2 and VLAN 1 is consisted of hosts linked to P3 and P4.

DroyTek VigorIPPBX 2820 Factory Reset ACT USB VLAN Line DSL Phone GPs ISDN1 ISDN2 Phone Line 1 (log1) 2 3 4 +LAN DSL WAN2 USB VLAN0 VLAN1

1. After checking the box to enable VLAN function, you will check the table according to the needs as shown below.

LAN >> VLAN Configuration

VLAN Configuration

To remove VLAN, uncheck the needed box and click OK to save the results.

5.2.5 Bind P to MAC

This function is used to bind the IP and MAC address in LAN to have a strengthening control in network. When this function is enabled, all the assigned IP and MAC address binding together cannot be changed. If you modified the binding IP or MAC address, it might cause you not access into the Internet.

Click LAN and click Bind IP to MAC to open the setup page.

LAN >> Bind IP to MAC

Bind IP to MAC

Note: IP-MAC binding presets DHCP Allocations. If you select Strict Bind, unspecified LAN clients cannot access the Internet. Enable Disable Strict Bind ARP Table | Select All | Sort | Refresh | IP Bind List | Select All | Sort | IP Address Mac Address 192.168.1.10 00-0E-A6-2A-D5-A1 Index IP Address Mac Address Add and Edit IP Address Mac Address : : : : : : : : Add Edit Delete OK

Enable

Click this radio button to invoke this function. However, IP/MAC which is not listed in IP Bind List also can connect to

	Internet.
Disable	Click this radio button to disable this function. All the settings on this page will be invalid.
Strict Bind	Click this radio button to block the connection of the IP/MAC which is not listed in IP Bind List.
ARP Table	This table is the LAN ARP table of this router. The information for IP and MAC will be displayed in this field. Each pair of IP and MAC address listed in ARP table can be selected and added to IP Bind List by clicking Add below.
Add and Edit	IP Address - Type the IP address that will be used for the specified MAC address.Mac Address - Type the MAC address that is used to bind with the assigned IP address.
Refresh	It is used to refresh the ARP table. When there is one new PC added to the LAN, you can click this link to obtain the newly ARP table information.
IP Bind List	It displays a list for the IP bind to MAC information.
Add	It allows you to add the one you choose from the ARP table or the IP/MAC address typed in Add and Edit to the table of IP Bind List.
Edit	It allows you to edit and modify the selected IP address and MAC address that you create before.
Remove	You can remove any item listed in IP Bind List. Simply click and select the one, and click Remove. The selected item will be removed from the IP Bind List.

Note: Before you select Strict Bind, you have to bind one set of IP/MAC address for one PC. If not, no one of the PCs can access into Internet. And the web configurator of the router might not be accessed.

5.3 NAT

Usually, the router serves as an NAT (Network Address Translation) router. NAT is a mechanism that one or more private IP addresses can be mapped into a single public one. Public IP address is usually assigned by your ISP, for which you may get charged. Private IP addresses are recognized only among internal hosts.

When the outgoing packets destined to some public server on the Internet reach the NAT router, the router will change its source address into the public IP address of the router, select the available public port, and then forward it. At the same time, the router shall list an entry in a table to memorize this address/port-mapping relationship. When the public server response, the incoming traffic, of course, is destined to the router's public IP address and the router will do the inversion based on its table. Therefore, the internal host can communicate with external host smoothly.

The benefit of the NAT includes:

- Save cost on applying public IP address and apply efficient usage of IP address. NAT allows the internal IP addresses of local hosts to be translated into one public IP address, thus you can have only one IP address on behalf of the entire internal hosts.

● Enhance security of the internal network by obscuring the IP address. There are many attacks aiming victims based on the IP address. Since the attacker cannot be aware of any private IP addresses, the NAT function can protect the internal network.

On NAT page, you will see the private IP address defined in RFC-1918. Usually we use the 192.168.1.0/24 subnet for the router. As stated before, the NAT facility can map one or more IP addresses and/or service ports into different specified services. In other words, the NAT function can be achieved by using port mapping methods.

Below shows the menu items for NAT.

NAT

▶ Port Redirection
DMZ Host
▶ Open Ports
Address Mapping
▶ Port Trigger

5.3.1 Port Redirection

Port Redirection is usually set up for server related service inside the local network (LAN), such as web servers, FTP servers, E-mail servers etc. Most of the case, you need a public IP address for each server and this public IP address/domain name are recognized by all users. Since the server is actually located inside the LAN, the network well protected by NAT of the router, and identified by its private IP address/port, the goal of Port Redirection function is to forward all access request with public IP address from external users to the mapping private IP address/port of the server.

graph TD
    A["Internet"] -->|Destined to 220.135.240.207 Port 213| B((NAT))
    B --> C["Server"]
    C --> D["192.168.1.22"]
    C --> E["DMZ 192.168.1.11"]
    C --> F["FTP Server 192.168.1.12 Port 21"]
    C --> G["Web Server 192.168.1.13 Port 80"]

The port redirection can only apply to incoming traffic.

To use this function, please go to NAT page and choose Port Redirection web page. The Port Redirection Table provides 20 port-mapping entries for the internal hosts.

Port Redirection
Set to Factory Default

Index	Service Name	Public Port	Private IP	Status
1.				x
2.				x
3.				x
4.				x
5.				x
6.				x
7.				x
8.				x
9.				x
10.				x

Press any number under Index to access into next page for configuring port redirection.

NAT >> Port Redirection

Index No. 1

Enable Mode Service Name Protocol WAN IP Public Port Private IP Private Port Range Single Range ... 1.All 0 0 0

Note: In "Range" Mode the End IP will be calculated automatically once the Public Port and Start IP have been entered.

Enable Check this box to enable such port redirection setting.

Mode Two options (Single and Range) are provided here for you to choose. To set a range for the specific service, select Range. In Range mode, if the public port (start port and end port) and the starting IP of private IP had been entered, the system will calculate and display the ending IP of private IP automatically.

Service Name Enter the description of the specific network service.

Protocol Select the transport layer protocol (TCP or UDP).

WAN IP Select the WAN IP used for port redirection. There are eight WAN IP alias that can be selected and used for port redirection. The default setting is All which means all the incoming data from any port will be redirected to specified range of IP address and port.

Public Port Specify which port can be redirected to the specified Private IP and Port of the internal host. If you choose Range as the port redirection mode, you will see two boxes on this field. Simply type the required number on the first box. The second

	one will be assigned automatically later.
Private IP	Specify the private IP address of the internal host providing the service. If you chooseRangeas the port redirection mode, you will see two boxes on this field. Type a complete IP address in the first box (as the starting point) and the fourth digits in the second box (as the end point).
Private Port	Specify the private port number of the service offered by the internal host.
Active	Check this box to activate the port-mapping entry you have defined.

Note that the router has its own built-in services (servers) such as Telnet, HTTP and FTP etc. Since the common port numbers of these services (servers) are all the same, you may need to reset the router in order to avoid confliction.

For example, the built-in web configurator in the router is with default port 80, which may conflict with the web server in the local network, http://192.168.1.13:80. Therefore, you need to change the router's http port to any one other than the default port 80 to avoid conflict, such as 8080. This can be set in the System Maintenance >>Management Setup. You then will access the admin screen of by suffixing the IP address with 8080, e.g., http://192.168.1.1:8080 instead of port 80.

System Maintenance >> Management

Management Setup

Management Access Control Allow management from the Internet FTP Server HTTP Server HTTPS Server Telnet Server SSH Server Disable PING from the Internet Access List List IP Subnet Mask 1 2 3 Management Port Setup User Define Ports Default Ports Telnet Port 23 (Default: 23) HTTP Port 80 (Default: 80) HTTPS Port 443 (Default: 443) FTP Port 21 (Default: 21) SSH Port 22 (Default: 22) SNMP Setup Enable SNMP Agent Get Community public Set Community private Manager Host IP Trap Community public Notification Host IP Trap Timeout 10 seconds

OK

5.3.2 DMZ Host

As mentioned above, Port Redirection can redirect incoming TCP/UDP or other traffic on particular ports to the specific private IP address/port of host in the LAN. However, other IP protocols, for example Protocols 50 (ESP) and 51 (AH), do not travel on a fixed port. Vigor router provides a facility DMZ Host that maps ALL unsolicited data on any protocol to a single host in the LAN. Regular web surfing and other such Internet activities from other clients will continue to work without inappropriate interruption. DMZ Host allows a defined internal user to be totally exposed to the Internet, which usually helps some special applications such as Netmeeting or Internet Games etc.

graph TD
    A["Internet"] -->|NAT| B["Internet"]
    B --> C["192.168.1.22"]
    B --> D["DMZ 192.168.1.11"]
    B --> E["FTP Server 192.168.1.12 Port 21"]
    B --> F["Web Server 192.168.1.13 Port 80"]
    G["Destination: 220.135.240.207\nProtocol: Any\nPort: Any"] --> A

The inherent security properties of NAT are somewhat bypassed if you set up DMZ host. We suggest you to add additional filter rules or a secondary firewall.

Click DMZ Host to open the following page:

NAT >> DMZ Host Setup

DMZ Host Setup

WAN 1

Private IP

MAC Address of the True IP DMZ Host

Note: When a True-IP DMZ host is turned on, it will force the router's WAN connection to be always on.

WAN 2

Enable

Private IP

Choose PC

OK

If you previously have set up WAN Alias for PPPoE/PPPoA or MPoA mode, you will find them in Aux. WAN IP for your selection.

NAT >> DMZ Host Setup

DMZ Host Setup

WAN 1
Index	Enable	Aux. WAN IP	Private IP
1.	☐	192.168.1.88		Choose PC
WAN 2
	Enable		Private IP
	☐			Choose PC

Enable

Check to enable the DMZ Host function.

Private IP

Enter the private IP address of the DMZ host, or click Choose PC to select one.

Choose PC

Click this button and then a window will automatically pop up, as depicted below. The window consists of a list of private IP addresses of all hosts in your LAN network. Select one private IP address in the list to be the DMZ host.

192.168.1.10 192.168.1.18

When you have selected one private IP from the above

dialog, the IP address will be shown on the following screen.

Click OK to save the setting.

NAT >> DMZ Host Setup

DMZ Host Setup

WAN 1 Index Enable Aux. WAN IP Private IP 1. ✓ 192.168.1.68 192.168.1.10 Choose PC WAN 2 Enable Private IP Choose PC

5.3.3 Open Ports

Open Ports allows you to open a range of ports for the traffic of special applications. Common application of Open Ports includes P2P application (e.g., BT, KaZaA, Gnutella, WinMX, eMule and others), Internet Camera etc. Ensure that you keep the application involved up-to-date to avoid falling victim to any security exploits.

Click Open Ports to open the following page:

NAT >> Open Ports

Open Ports Setup				Set to Factory Default
Index	Comment	WAN Interface	Local IP Address	Status
1.				x
2.				x
3.				x
4.				x
5.				x
6.				x
7.				x
8.				x
9.				x
10.				x

Index	Indicate the relative number for the particular entry that you want to offer service in a local host. You should click the appropriate index number to edit or clear the corresponding entry.
Comment	Specify the name for the defined network service.
WAN Interface	Display the WAN interface for the entry.
Local IP Address	Display the private IP address of the local host offering the service.
Status	Display the state for the corresponding entry. X or V is to represent the Inactive or Active state.

To add or edit port settings, click one index number on the page. The index entry setup page will pop up. In each index entry, you can specify 10 port ranges for diverse services.

Index No. 1

Enable Open Ports Comment P2P WAN Interface WAN1 Local Computer 192.168.1.10 Choose PC Protocol Start Port End Port Protocol Start Port End Port 1. TCP 4500 4700 6. ---- 0 0 2. TCP 4500 4700 7. ---- 0 0 3. ---- 0 0 8. ---- 0 0 4. ---- 0 0 9. ---- 0 0 5. ---- 0 0 10. ---- 0 0

Enable Open Ports

Check to enable this entry.

Comment

Make a name for the defined network application/service.

WAN Interface

Specify the WAN interface that will be used for this entry.

Local Computer

Enter the private IP address of the local host or click Choose PC to select one.

Choose PC

Click this button and, subsequently, a window having a list of private IP addresses of local hosts will automatically pop up. Select the appropriate IP address of the local host in the list.

Protocol

Specify the transport layer protocol. It could be TCP, UDP, or ---- (none) for selection.

Start Port

Specify the starting port number of the service offered by the local host.

End Port

Specify the ending port number of the service offered by the local host.

5.3.4 Address Mapping

This page is used to map specific private IP to specific WAN IP address.

If you have "a group of IP Addresses" and want to apply to the router, please use WAN IP alias function to record these IPs first. Then, use address mapping function to map specific private IP to specific WAN IP alias.

For example, you have IP addresses ranging from 86.123.123.1 \~ 86.123.123.8. However, your router uses 86.123.123.1, and the rest of the IPs are recorded in WAN IP alias. You want that private IP 192.168.1.10 can use 86.123.123.2 as source IP when it sends packet out to Internet. You can use address mapping function to achieve this demand. Simply type 192.168.1.10 as the Private IP; and type 86.123.123.2 as the WAN IP.

NAT >> Address Mapping

Address Mapping Setup				Set to Factory Default
Index	Protocol	Public IP	Private IP	Mask	Status
1.	ALL	---		/32	x
2.	ALL	---		/32	x
3.	ALL	---		/32	x
4.	ALL	---		/32	x
5.	ALL	---		/32	x
6.	ALL	---		/32	x
7.	ALL	---		/32	x
8.	ALL	---		/32	x
9.	ALL	---		/32	x
10.	ALL	---		/32	x

Protocol Display the protocol used for this address mapping.

Public IP Display the public IP address selected for this entry, e.g., 86.123.123.2.

Private IP Display the private IP set for this address mapping, e.g., 192.168.1.10

Mask Display the subnet mask selected for this address mapping.

Status Display the status for the entry, enable or disable.

Click the index number link to open the configuration page.

NAT >> Address Mapping

Index No. 1

Enable Protocol: ALL WAN Interface WAN1 WAN IP Private IP: Subnet Mask: /32 OK Clear Cancel

Enable Check to enable this entry.

Protocol	Specify the transport layer protocol. It could be TCP, UDP, or ALL for selection.
	ALLALLTCPUDP
WAN Interface	Specify the WAN interface that will be used for this entry.
WAN IP	Select an IP address (the selections provided here are set in IP Alias List of WAN>>Internet Access). Local host can use this IP to connect to Internet.If you want to choose any on of the Public IP settings, you must specify some IP addresses in the IP Alias List of the Static/DHCP Configuration page first. If you did not type in any IP address in the IP Alias List, the Public IP setting will be empty in this field.When you clickApply, a message will appear to inform you.
Private IP	Assign an IP address (e.g., 192.168.1.10) or a subnet to be compared with the Public IP address for incoming packets.

Subnet Mask Select a value of subnet mask for private IP address.

5.3.5 Port Trigger

Port Trigger is a variation of open ports function; the difference is that the port trigger has the dynamic characteristics. It is more secure comparing to open ports.

In Open Ports setting, once we setup the ports be opened, all traffic can go through these open ports into LAN device; with Port Trigger function, the ports will be opened only when specific application triggers the specific ports, and then the needed ports will be opened automatically.

NAT >> Port Trigger

Port Trigger					Set to Factory Default
Index	Comment	Trigger Protocol	Trigger Port	Incoming Protocol	Incoming Port	Status
1.						×
2.						×
3.						×
4.						×
5.						×
6.						×
7.						×
8.						×
9.						×
10.						×

Comment Display the text which memorizes the application of this rule.

Trigger Protocol Display the protocol of the trigger packets.

Trigger Port Display the port of the trigger packets.

Incoming Protocol Display the protocol for the incoming data of such trigger profile.

Incoming Port Display the port for the incoming data of such trigger profile.

Status Display if the rule is active or inactive.

Click the index number link to open the configuration page.

NAT >> Port Trigger

No. 1

Enable Service User Defined Comment Trigger Protocol --- Trigger Port Incoming Protocol --- Incoming Port Note: The Trigger Port and Incoming Port should be input like this ; 123-456,777-789 (legal),123-456,789 (legal), but 123-456-789 (illegal).

Enable Check to enable this entry.

Service

Choose the predefined service to apply for such trigger profile.

User Defined User Defined Real Player QuickTime WMP IRC AIM Talk ICQ PalTalk BitTorrent

Comment Type the text to memorize the application of this rule.

Trigger Protocol

Select the protocol (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) for such trigger profile.

Trigger Port Type the port or port range for such trigger profile.

Incoming Protocol

When the trigger packets received, it is expected the incoming packets will use the selected protocol. Select the protocol (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) for the incoming data of such trigger profile.

Incoming Port Type the port or port range for the incoming packets.

5.4 Firewall

5.4.1 Basics for Firewall

While the broadband users demand more bandwidth for multimedia, interactive applications, or distance learning, security has been always the most concerned. The firewall of the Vigor router helps to protect your local network against attack from unauthorized outsiders. It also restricts users in the local network from accessing the Internet. Furthermore, it can filter out specific packets that trigger the router to build an unwanted outgoing connection.

Firewall Facilities

The users on the LAN are provided with secured protection by the following firewall facilities:

• User-configurable IP filter (Call Filter/ Data Filter).
  ● Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI): tracks packets and denies unsolicited incoming data
• Selectable Denial of Service (DoS) /Distributed DoS (DDoS) attacks protection

IP Filters

Depending on whether there is an existing Internet connection, or in other words “the WAN link status is up or down”, the IP filter architecture categorizes traffic into two: Call Filter and Data Filter.

• Call Filter - When there is no existing Internet connection, Call Filter is applied to all traffic, all of which should be outgoing. It will check packets according to the filter rules. If legal, the packet will pass. Then the router shall “initiate a call” to build the Internet connection and send the packet to Internet.
  ● Data Filter - When there is an existing Internet connection, Data Filter is applied to incoming and outgoing traffic. It will check packets according to the filter rules. If legal, the packet will pass the router.

The following illustrations are flow charts explaining how router will treat incoming traffic and outgoing traffic respectively.

graph TD
    A["Outgoing Traffic"] --> B{WAN link status}
    B -->|down| C["Call Filter"]
    B -->|up| D["Data Filter"]
    C -->|pass| E["Initiate a call"]
    C -->|block| F["Drop packet"]
    D -->|pass| G["Send packet to WAN"]
    D -->|block| H["Drop packet"]

graph TD
    A["Send packet to LAN"] -->|pass| B["Data Filter"]
    B -->|block| C["Drop packet"]
    C --> D["LAN Link"]
    D --> E["Incoming Traffic"]

Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI)

Stateful inspection is a firewall architecture that works at the network layer. Unlike legacy static packet filtering, which examines a packet based on the information in its header, stateful inspection builds up a state machine to track each connection traversing all interfaces of the firewall and makes sure they are valid. The stateful firewall of Vigor router not just examine the header information also monitor the state of the connection.

Denial of Service (DoS) Defense

The DoS Defense functionality helps you to detect and mitigate the DoS attack. The attacks are usually categorized into two types, the flooding-type attacks and the vulnerability attacks. The flooding-type attacks will attempt to exhaust all your system's resource while the vulnerability attacks will try to paralyze the system by offending the vulnerabilities of the protocol or operation system.

The DoS Defense function enables the Vigor router to inspect every incoming packet based on the attack signature database. Any malicious packet that might duplicate itself to paralyze the host in the secure LAN will be strictly blocked and a Syslog message will be sent as warning, if you set up Syslog server.

Also the Vigor router monitors the traffic. Any abnormal traffic flow violating the pre-defined parameter, such as the number of thresholds, is identified as an attack and the Vigor router will activate its defense mechanism to mitigate in a real-time manner.

The below shows the attack types that DoS/DDoS defense function can detect:

1. SYN flood attack 8. Trace route
2. UDP flood attack 9. SYN fragment
3. ICMP flood attack 10. Fraggle attack
4. Port Scan attack 11. TCP flag scan
5. IP options 12. Tear drop attack
6. Land attack 13. Ping of Death attack
7. Smurf attack 14. ICMP fragment
8. Unknown protocol

Below shows the menu items for Firewall.

Firewall

▶ General Setup

Filter Setup

DoS Defense

5.4.2 General Setup

General Setup allows you to adjust settings of IP Filter and common options. Here you can enable or disable the Call Filter or Data Filter. Under some circumstance, your filter set can be linked to work in a serial manner. So here you assign the Start Filter Set only. Also you can configure the Log Flag settings, and Accept large incoming fragmented UDP or ICMP packets.

Click Firewall and click General Setup to open the general setup page.

Firewall >> General Setup

General Setup

Call Filter

Enable

Start Filter Set

Disable

Data Filter

Enable

Start Filter Set

○ Disable

Actions for default rule:

Application

Filter

APP Enforcement

URL Content Filter

Web Content Filter

Advance Setting

Action/Profile

Pass

None

None

None

Edit

Syslog

□

□

□

□

√ Accept large incoming fragmented UDP or ICMP packets ( for some games, ex. CS )

Enable Strict Security Firewall

Call Filter

Check Enable to activate the Call Filter function. Assign a start filter set for the Call Filter.

Data Filter

Check Enable to activate the Data Filter function. Assign a start filter set for the Data Filter.

Action/Profile

Select Pass or Block for the packets that do not match with the filter rules.

APP Enforcement

Select one of the APP Enforcement Profile settings (created in CSM>> APP Enforcement Profile) for applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for choosing in CSM>> APP Enforcement Profile web page first. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record information for APP Enforcement Profile by checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section System Maintenance>> Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.

URL Content Filter

Select one of the URL Content Filter Profile settings (created in CSM>> URL Content Filter Profile) for applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for choosing in CSM>> URL Content Filter Profile web page first. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record information for URL Content Filter by checking the Log box. It will be

sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section System Maintenance>>Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.

Web Content Filter

Select one of the Web Content Filter Profile settings (created in CSM>> Web Content Filter Profile) for applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for anti-virus in CSM>> Web Content Filter Profile web page first. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record information for Web Content Filter Profile by checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section System Maintenance>> Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.

Syslog

For troubleshooting needs you can specify the filter log and/or CSM log here by checking the box. The log will be displayed on Draytek Syslog window.

Advance Setting

Click Edit to open the following window. However, it is strongly recommended to use the default settings here.

http://192.168.1.1/proc/spfgenadv.htm - Microsoft Internet Explorer Firewall >> General Setup Advance Setting Codepage ANS(1253)-Greek Window size: 65535 Session timeout: 1440 Minute OK Close

Codepage - This function is used to compare the characters

among different languages. Choose correct codepage can help the system obtaining correct ASCII after decoding data from URL and enhance the correctness of URL Content Filter. The default value for this setting is ANSI 1252 Latin I. If you do not choose any codepage, no decoding job of URL will be processed. Please use the drop-down list to choose a codepage.

DrayTek Sying 3.9.1 Controls 192.168.1.1 Vigor series LAN Status TX Packets RX Packets 28489 15285 WAN Information WAN1 IP (Fixed) 172.16.2.213 WAN2 IP (Fixed) Setup Tool Setup Telnet Read-out Setup Codepage Information Codepage To Select Windows Version: 5.01.2600 RECOMMENDED CODEPAGE: 950 (ANSIOEM - Traditional Chinese Big5) 00a1:21 00a6:7c 00a9:63 00aa:61 00ad:2d 00ae:52 00b2:32 00b3:33 00b9:31 00ba:6f

If you do not have any idea of choosing suitable codepage,

please open Syslog. From Codepage Information of Setup dialog, you will see the recommended codepage listed on the dialog box.

Window size - It determines the size of TCP protocol

(0\~65535). The more the value is, the better the performance will be. However, if the network is not stable, small value will be proper.

Session timeout—Setting timeout for sessions can make the best utilization of network resources. However, Queue timeout is configured for TCP protocol only; session timeout is configured for the data flow which matched with the firewall rule.

Some on-line games (for example: Half Life) will use lots of fragmented UDP packets to transfer game data. Instinctively as a secure firewall, Vigor router will reject these fragmented packets to prevent attack unless you enable “Accept Incoming Fragmented UDP Packets”. By checking this box, you can play these kinds of on-line games. If security concern is in higher priority, you cannot enable “Accept Incoming Fragmented UDP Packets”.

5.4.3 Filter Setup

Click Firewall and click Filter Setup to open the setup page.

Firewall >> Filter Setup

Filter Setup			Set to Factory Default
Set	Comments	Set	Comments
1.	Default Call Filter	7.
2.	Default Data Filter	8.
3.		9.
4.		10.
5.		11.
6.		12.

To edit or add a filter, click on the set number to edit the individual set. The following page will be shown. Each filter set contains up to 7 rules. Click on the rule number button to edit each rule. Check Active to enable the rule.

Firewall >> Filter Setup >> Edit Filter Set

Filter Rule	Active	Comments	Move Up	Move Down
1	☑	Block NetBios		Down
2	☐		UP	Down
3	☐		UP	Down
4	☐		UP	Down
5	☐		UP	Down
6	☐		UP	Down
7	☐		UP

Filter Rule	Click a button numbered (1 ~ 7) to edit the filter rule. Click the button will open Edit Filter Rule web page. For the detailed information, refer to the following page.
Active	Enable or disable the filter rule.
Comment	Enter filter set comments/description. Maximum length is 23-character long.
Move Up/Down	Use Up or Down link to move the order of the filter rules.
Next Filter Set	Set the link to the next filter set to be executed after the current filter run. Do not make a loop with many filter sets.

To edit Filter Rule, click the Filter Rule index button to enter the Filter Rule setup page.

Firewall >> Edit Filter Set >> Edit Filter Rule

Filter Set 1 Rule 1

Check to enable the Filter Rule Comments: Block NetBios Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: Direction: LAN -> WAN Source IP: Any Edit Destination IP: Any Edit Service Type: TCP/UDP, Port: from 137~139 to undefined Edit Fragments: Don't Care Application Action/Profile Syslog Filter: Block Immediately Branch to Other Filter Set: None APP Enforcement: None URL Content Filter: None Web Content Filter: None Advance Setting Edit

Check to enable the Filter Rule Check this box to enable the filter rule.

Comments Enter filter set comments/description. Maximum length is 14-character long.

Index(1-15) Set PCs on LAN to work at certain time interval only. You may choose up to 4 schedules out of the 15 schedules pre-defined in Applications >> Schedule setup. The default setting of this filed is blank and the function will always work.

Direction Set the direction of packet flow (LAN->WAN/WAN->LAN). It is for Data Filter only. For the Call Filter, this setting is not available since Call Filter is only applied to outgoing traffic.

Source/Destination IP Click Edit to access into the following dialog to choose the source/destination IP or IP ranges.

http://192.168.1.1 - IP Address Edit - Microsoft Internet Explorer IP Address Edit Address Type Group and Objects Start IP Address 0.0.0 End IP Address 0.0.0 Subnet Mask 0.0.0 Invert Selection IP Group or IP Object None None or IP Object None 1-RD Department 2-Financial Dept. or IP Object 3-HR Department OK Close

To set the IP address manually, please choose Any

Address/Single Address/Range Address/Subnet Address as the Address Type and type them in this dialog. In addition, if you want to use the IP range from defined groups or objects, please choose Group and Objects as the Address Type.

Group and Objects Any Address Single Address Range Address Subnet Address Group and Objects

From the IP Group drop down list, choose the one that you want to apply. Or use the IP Object drop down list to choose the object that you want.

Service Type

Click Edit to access into the following dialog to choose a suitable service type.

http://192.168.1.1 - Service Type Edit - Microsoft Internet Explorer Service Type Edit Service Type Group and Objects Protocol TCP/UDP Source Port = 137 ~ 139 Destination Port = 1 ~ 65535 Service Group None or Service Object None or Service Object None or Service Object None OK Close 1-SIP 2-RTP

To set the service type manually, please choose User defined as the Service Type and type them in this dialog. In addition, if you want to use the service type from defined groups or objects, please choose Group and Objects as the Service

Type.

Protocol - Specify the protocol(s) which this filter rule will apply to.

Source/Destination Port -

(=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates one port; when the first and last values are different, it indicates a range for the port and available for this service type.
(!=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates all the ports except the port defined here; when the first and last values are different, it indicates that all the ports except the range defined here are available for this service type.
(>) – the port number greater than this value is available.
(<) – the port number less than this value is available for this profile.

Service Group/Object - Use the drop down list to choose the one that you want.

Fragments

Specify the action for fragmented packets. And it is used for Data Filter only.

Don't care - No action will be taken towards fragmented packets.

Unfragmented -Apply the rule to unfragmented packets.

Fragmented - Apply the rule to fragmented packets.

Too Short - Apply the rule only to packets that are too short to contain a complete header.

Filter

Specifies the action to be taken when packets match the rule.

Block Immediately - Packets matching the rule will be dropped immediately.

Pass Immediately - Packets matching the rule will be passed immediately.

Block If No Further Match - A packet matching the rule, and that does not match further rules, will be dropped.

Pass If No Further Match - A packet matching the rule, and that does not match further rules, will be passed through.

Branch to other Filter Set

If the packet matches the filter rule, the next filter rule will branch to the specified filter set. Select next filter rule to branch from the drop-down menu. Be aware that the router will apply the specified filter rule for ever and will not return to previous filter rule any more.

APP Enforcement

Select one of the APP Enforcement Profile settings (created in CSM>> APP Enforcement Profile) for applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for choosing in CSM>>

	APP Enforcement Profile web page first. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record information for APP Enforcement Profile by checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section System Maintenance>> Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.
URL Content Filter	Select one of the URL Content Filter profile settings (created in CSM>> URL Content Filter) for applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for choosing in CSM>> URL Content Filter web page first. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record information for URL Content Filter by checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section System Maintenance>>Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.
Web Content Filter	Select one of the Web Content Filter profile settings (created in CSM>> Web Content Filter) for applying with this router. Please set at least one profile for anti-virus in CSM>> Web Content Filter web page first. For troubleshooting needs, you can specify to record information for Web Content Filter by checking the Log box. It will be sent to Syslog server. Please refer to section System Maintenance>> Syslog/Mail Alert for more detailed information.
SysLog	For troubleshooting needs you can specify the filter log and/or CSM log here. Check the corresponding box to enable the log function. Then, the filter log and/or CSM log will be shown on Draytek Syslog window.
Advance Setting	Click Edit to open the following window. However, it is strongly recommended to use the default settings here.

http://192.168.1.1/los/spedrady.htm - Microsoft Internet Explorer Firewall >> Edit Filter Set >> Edit Filter Rule Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Advance Setting Codepage ANSI(1252)-Latin I Window size: 65535 Session timeout: 1440 Minute DrayTek Banner: ✓ Strict Security Checking □ APP Enforcement OK Close

Codepage - This function is used to compare the characters among different languages. Choose correct codepage can help the system obtaining correct ASCII after decoding data from URL and enhance the correctness of URL Content Filter. The default value for this setting is ANSI 1252 Latin I. If you do not choose any codepage, no decoding job of URL will be processed. Please use the drop-down list to choose a codepage.

If you do not have any idea of choosing suitable codepage, please open Syslog. From Codepage Information of Setup dialog, you will see the recommended codepage listed on the

dialog box.

DusyTek Synlog 3.9.1 Controls 192.168.1.1 Vigor series LAN Status TX Packets RX Packets 28489 15285 WAN Information WAN1 IP (Fixed) 172.16.2.213 WAN2 IP (Fixed) Setup Tool Setup Telnet Read-out Setup Codepage Information Codepage To Select Windows Version: 5.01.2600 RECOMMENDED CODEPAGE: 950 (ANSIOEM - Traditional Chinese Big5) 00a1:21 00a6:7c 00a9:63 00aa:61 00ad:2d 00ae:52 00b2:32 00b3:33 00b9:31 00ba:6f

Window size - It determines the size of TCP protocol

(0\~65535). The more the value is, the better the performance will be. However, if the network is not stable, small value will be proper.

Session timeout—Setting timeout for sessions can make the best utilization of network resources. However, Queue timeout is configured for TCP protocol only; session timeout is configured for the data flow which matched with the firewall rule.

DrayTek Banner – Please uncheck this box and the following screen will not be shown for the unreachable web page. The default setting is Enabled.

Strict Security Checking - All the packets, while transmitting through Vigor router, will be filtered by firewall settings configured by Vigor router if Strict Security Firewall is enabled. If the firewall system does not have any response (pass or block) for these packets, such as no response coming from Anti-Spam server, then the router's firewall will block the packets directly.

In addition, you can restrict the strict security checking just be done by specified server and conditions such as Anti-Virus, Anti-Spam, In-Sequence and APP Enforcement. Thus, the packets not only must be filtered by general rules by Firewall, but also must be filtered by the items selected in Strict Security Checking. Such work can ensure the data security transferring via network.

APP Enforcement – Check this box to execute the critical checking for all the files transferred via IM/P2P.

Example

As stated before, all the traffic will be separated and arbitrated using on of two IP filters: call filter or data filter. You may preset 12 call filters and data filters in Filter Setup and even link them in a serial manner. Each filter set is composed by 7 filter rules, which can be further defined. After that, in General Setup you may specify one set for call filter and one set for data filter to execute first.

Firewall >> General Setup General Setup Call Filter Enable Disable Data Filter Enable Disable Start Filter Set Start Filter Set Start Filter Set Set Actions for default rule: Application Action/Profile Filter Pass APP Enforcement None URL Content Filter None Web Content Filter Note Advance Setting Edit Firewall >> Filter Setup Accept large incoming fragmented DDR or TDM packets (for some games, or... Enable Ctrlar Security Firewall UK Cancel Firewall >> Filter Setup >> Edit Filter Set Filter Set 1 Comments: Default Ctrlar Filter Active Comments Move Up Move Down Block Holdings Down Down UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP OK Clear Cancel Firewall >> Filter Setup >> Edit Filter Set Firewall >> Edit Filter Set >> Edit Filter Rule Filter Set 1 Rule 1 Check to enable the Filter Rule Comments: Block NetDis View(1=15) in Schedule Setup. Direction: LAN->WALL Source IP: Any Destination IP: Any Service Type: TCP/IPD, Split from 137=139 to undefined Fragments: Don't Case Application Action/Profile Filter: Block Immediately Branch: None Branch to Other Filter Set: APP Reference: URL Content Filter: Web Content Filter: Advance Setting Edit OK Clear Cancel

5.4.4 DoS Defense

As a sub-functionality of IP Filter/Firewall, there are 15 types of detect/ defense function in the DoS Defense setup. The DoS Defense functionality is disabled for default.

Click Firewall and click DoS Defense to open the setup page.

Firewall >> DoS defense Setup

DoS defense Setup

Enable DoS Defense Enable SYN flood defense Threshold 50 packets / sec Timeout 10 sec Enable UDP flood defense Threshold 150 packets / sec Timeout 10 sec Enable ICMP flood defense Threshold 50 packets / sec Timeout 10 sec Enable Port Scan detection Threshold 150 packets / sec Block IP options Block TCP flag scan Block Land Block Tear Drop Block Smurf Block Ping of Death Block trace route Block ICMP fragment Block SYN fragment Block UnknownProtocol Block Fraggle Attack Enable DoS defense function to prevent the attacks from hacker or crackers.

Enable Dos Defense

Enable SYN flood defense

Check the box to activate the DoS Defense Functionality.

Check the box to activate the SYN flood defense function. Once detecting the Threshold of the TCP SYN packets from the Internet has exceeded the defined value, the Vigor router will start to randomly discard the subsequent TCP SYN packets for a period defined in Timeout. The goal for this is prevent the TCP SYN packets' attempt to exhaust the limited-resource of Vigor router. By default, the threshold and timeout values are set to 50 packets per second and 10 seconds, respectively.

Enable UDP flood defense

Check the box to activate the UDP flood defense function. Once detecting the Threshold of the UDP packets from the Internet has exceeded the defined value, the Vigor router will start to randomly discard the subsequent UDP packets for a period defined in Timeout. The default setting for threshold and timeout are 150 packets per second and 10 seconds, respectively.

Enable ICMP flood defense

Check the box to activate the ICMP flood defense function. Similar to the UDP flood defense function, once if the Threshold of ICMP packets from Internet has exceeded the defined value, the router will discard the ICMP echo requests coming from the Internet. The default setting for threshold and timeout are 50 packets per second and 10 seconds, respectively.

Enable PortScan detection	Port Scan attacks the Vigor router by sending lots of packets to many ports in an attempt to find ignorant services would respond. Check the box to activate the Port Scan detection. Whenever detecting this malicious exploration behavior by monitoring the port-scanning Threshold rate, the Vigor router will send out a warning. By default, the Vigor router sets the threshold as 150 packets per second.
Block IP options	Check the box to activate the Block IP options function. The Vigor router will ignore any IP packets with IP option field in the datagram header. The reason for limitation is IP option appears to be a vulnerability of the security for the LAN because it will carry significant information, such as security, TCC (closed user group) parameters, a series of Internet addresses, routing messages...etc. An eavesdropper outside might learn the details of your private networks.
Block Land	Check the box to enforce the Vigor router to defense the Land attacks. The Land attack combines the SYN attack technology with IP spoofing. A Land attack occurs when an attacker sends spoofed SYN packets with the identical source and destination addresses, as well as the port number to victims.
Block Smurf	Check the box to activate the Block Smurf function. The Vigor router will ignore any broadcasting ICMP echo request.
Block trace router	Check the box to enforce the Vigor router not to forward any trace route packets.
Block SYN fragment	Check the box to activate the Block SYN fragment function. The Vigor router will drop any packets having SYN flag and more fragment bit set.
Block Fraggle Attack	Check the box to activate the Block fraggle Attack function. Any broadcast UDP packets received from the Internet is blocked.
Activating the DoS/DDoS defense functionality might block some legal packets. For example, when you activate the fragile attack defense, all broadcast UDP packets coming from the Internet are blocked. Therefore, the RIP packets from the Internet might be dropped.
Block TCP flag scan	Check the box to activate the Block TCP flag scan function. Any TCP packet with anomaly flag setting is dropped. Those scanning activities include no flag scan, FIN without ACK scan, SYN FINscan, Xmas scan and full Xmas scan.
Block Tear Drop	Check the box to activate the Block Tear Drop function. Many machines may crash when receiving ICMP datagrams (packets) that exceed the maximum length. To avoid this type of attack, the Vigor router is designed to be capable of discarding any fragmented ICMP packets with a length greater than 1024 octets.
Block Ping of Death	Check the box to activate the Block Ping of Death function. This attack involves the perpetrator sending overlapping packets to the target hosts so that those target hosts will hang once they re-construct the packets. The Vigor routers will

Block ICMP Fragment

block any packets realizing this attacking activity.

Check the box to activate the Block ICMP fragment function. Any ICMP packets with more fragment bit set are dropped.

Block Unknown Protocol

Check the box to activate the Block Unknown Protocol function. Individual IP packet has a protocol field in the datagram header to indicate the protocol type running over the upper layer. However, the protocol types greater than 100 are reserved and undefined at this time. Therefore, the router should have ability to detect and reject this kind of packets.

Warning Messages

We provide Syslog function for user to retrieve message from Vigor router. The user, as a Syslog Server, shall receive the report sending from Vigor router which is a Syslog Client.

All the warning messages related to DoS Defense will be sent to user and user can review it through Syslog daemon. Look for the keyword DoS in the message, followed by a name to indicate what kind of attacks is detected.

System Maintenance >> SysLog / Mail Alert Setup

SysLog / Noll Alert Setup SysLog Access Setup Enable Syslog Save to: Syslog Server USB Disk Router Name Server IP Address 192.160.1.115 Destination Port 514 Enable syslog message: Firewall Log VPN Log User Access Log Call Log WAN Log Router/DSL information Mail Alert Setup Enable SMTP Server Mail To Return-Path Authentication User Name Password Enable E-Mail Alert: DOS Attack IM-P2P Send a text e-mail OK Clear Refresh

DasyTek Sialog 2.7.0 Controls 192.168.1.1 Vign 2000 Series LAN Status Tx Packets RX Packets 41.75 3666 WAN Status Gateway IP (Fixed) 172.16.2.4 TX Packets 340 TX Rate WAN IP (Fixed) 172.16.5.229 RX Packets 2556 RX Rate 126 Runwall Log Vign Log User Address Log Call Log WAN Log Other Network Information Net Data Traffic Graph Time Host Message Jan 1 00 00:42 Vign Dell eye_flood Block(100x 192.168.1.115,10005 -> 192.168.1.23 PR C(log) Jan 20 40 -2 984375 Jan 1 00 00:34 Vign Dell knap_flood Block(100x 192.168.1.115 -> 192.168.1.23 PR C(log) Jan 20 40 -2 984375 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - + - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ACSL Status Name Stage Unsured Circuit Number PVH Number Last Set

5.5 Objects Settings

For IPs in a range and service ports in a limited range usually will be applied in configuring router's settings, therefore we can define them with objects and bind them with groups for using conveniently. Later, we can select that object/group that can apply it. For example, all the IPs in the same department can be defined with an IP object (a range of IP address).

Objects Setting ► IP Object ► IP Group ► Service Type Object ► Service Type Group ► Keyword Object ► Keyword Group ► File Extension Object

5.5.1 IP Object

You can set up to 192 sets of IP Objects with different conditions.

Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.

Click the number under Index column for settings in detail.

Objects Setting >> IP Object

Profile Index : 1

Name: RD Department Interface: Any Address Type: Range Address Start IP Address: 192.168.1.64 End IP Address: 192.168.1.75 Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0 Invert Selection: OK Clear Cancel

Name

Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are

	allowed.
Interface	Choose a proper interface (WAN, LAN or Any).
	Interface: [IMAGE]
	For example, theDirectionsetting inEdit Filter Rulewill ask you specify IP or IP range for WAN or LAN or any IP address. If you choose LAN as theInterfacehere, and choose LAN as the direction setting inEdit Filter Rule, then all the IP addresses specified with LAN interface will be opened for you to choose inEdit Filter Rulepage.
Address Type	Determine the address type for the IP address.
	SelectSingle Addressif this object contains one IP only.
	SelectRange Addressif this object contains several IPs within a range.
	SelectSubnet Addressif this object contains one subnet for IP address.
	SelectAny Addressif this object contains any IP address.
Start IP Address	Type the start IP address for Single Address type.
End IP Address	Type the end IP address if the Range Address type is selected.
Subnet Mask	Type the subnet mask if the Subnet Address type is selected.
Invert Selection	If it is checked, all the IP addresses except the ones listed above will be applied later while it is chosen.

Below is an example of IP objects settings.

Objects Setting >> IP Object

IP Object Profiles:

Index	Name
1.	RD Department
2.	Finanical Dept.
3.	HR Department
4.

5.5.2 IP Group

This page allows you to bind several IP objects into one IP group.

Objects Setting >> IP Group

Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.

Click the number under Index column for settings in detail.

Objects Setting >> IP Group

Profile Index : 1 Name: Administration Interface: Any Available IP Objects 1-RD Department 2-Financial Dept. 3-HR Department Selected IP Objects OK Clear Cancel

Name	Type a name for this profile. Maximum 15 characters are allowed.
Interface	Choose WAN, LAN or Any to display all the available IP objects with the specified interface.
Available IP Objects	All the available IP objects with the specified interface chosen above will be shown in this box.
Selected IP Objects	Click >> button to add the selected IP objects in this box.

5.5.3 Service Type Object

You can set up to 96 sets of Service Type Objects with different conditions.

Objects Setting >> Service Type Object

Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.

Click the number under Index column for settings in detail.

Objects Setting >> Service Type Object Setup

Profile Index : 1

Name www Protocol TCP 6 Source Port = 1 ~ 65535 Destination Port = 70 ~ 80 OK Clear Cancel

Name

Protocol

Type a name for this profile.

Specify the protocol(s) which this profile will apply to.

TCP Any ICMP IGMP TCP UDP TCP/UDP Other

Source/Destination Port

Source Port and the Destination Port column are available for TCP/UDP protocol. It can be ignored for other protocols. The filter rule will filter out any port number.

(=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates one port; when the first and last values are different, it indicates a range for the port and available for this profile.

(!=) – when the first and last value are the same, it indicates all the ports except the port defined here; when the first and last values are different, it indicates that all the ports except the range defined here are available for this service type.

(>) – the port number greater than this value is available.

(<) – the port number less than this value is available for this profile.

Below is an example of service type objects settings.

Service Type Object Profiles:

Index	Name
1.	SIP
2.	RTP
3.
4.

5.5.4 Service Type Group

This page allows you to bind several service types into one group.

Objects Setting >> Service Type Group

Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.

Click the number under Index column for settings in detail.

Profile Index : 1

Name: VoIP Available Service Type Objects 1-SIP 2-RTP Selected Service Type Objects OK Clear Cancel

Name

Available Service Type Objects

Selected Service Type Objects

Type a name for this profile.

All the available service objects that you have added on Objects Setting>>Service Type Object will be shown in this box.

Click >> button to add the selected IP objects in this box.

5.5.5 Keyword Object

You can set 200 keyword object profiles for choosing as black /white list in CSM >>URL Web Content Filter Profile.

Objects Setting >> Keyword Object

Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.

Click the number under Index column for setting in detail.

Profile Index : 13

Name

Contents

Limit of Contents: Max 3 Words and 63 Characters. Each word should be separated by a single space.

You can replace a character with %HEX. Example: Contents: backdoo%72 virus keep%20out

Result:

1. backdoor
2. virus
3. keep out

OK

Clear

Cancel

Name

Type a name for this profile, e.g., game.

Contents

Type the content for such profile. For example, type gambling as Contents. When you browse the webpage, the page with gambling information will be watched out and be passed/blocked based on the configuration on Firewall settings.

5.5.6 Keyword Group

This page allows you to bind several keyword objects into one group. The keyword groups set here will be chosen as black /white list in CSM >>URL Web Content Filter Profile.

Objects Setting >> Keyword Group

Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.

Click the number under Index column for setting in detail.

Profile Index : 1

Name: Available Keyword Objects 1-Keyword-1 2-keyword-2 Selected Keyword Objects(Max 16 Objects) OK Clear Cancel

Name

Available Keyword Objects

Selected Keyword Objects

Type a name for this group.

You can gather keyword objects from Keyword Object page within one keyword group. All the available Keyword objects that you have created will be shown in this box.

Click >> button to add the selected Keyword objects in this box.

5.5.7 File Extension Object

This page allows you to set eight profiles which will be applied in CSM>>URL Content Filter. All the files with the extension names specified in these profiles will be processed according to the chosen action.

Objects Setting >> File Extension Object

Profile	Name	Profile	Name
1.		5.
2.		6.
3.		7.
4.		8.

Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.

Click the number under Profile column for configuration in details.

Profile Index: 1 Profile Name: Categories File Extensions Image Select All Clear All .bmp .dib .gif .jpeg .jpg .jpg2 .jp2 .pct .pcx .pic .pict .png .tif .tiff Video Select All Clear All .asf .avi .mov .mpe .mpeg .mpg .mp4 .qt .rm .wmv .3gp .3gpp2 .3g2 .aac .aiff .au .mp3 .m4a .m4p .ogg .ra .ram .vox .wav .wma Java Select All Clear All .class .jad .jar .jav .java .jcm .js .jse .jsp .jtk .alx .apb .axs .ocx .olb .ole .tlb .viv .vrm .ace .arj .bzip2 .bz2 .cab .gz .gzip .rar .sit .zip .bas .bat .com .exe .inf .pif .reg .scr OK Clear Cancel

Profile Name Type a name for this profile.

Type a name for such profile and check all the items of file extension that will be processed in the router. Finally, click OK to save this profile.

5.6 CSM

CSM is an abbreviation of Content Security Management which is used to control APP enforcement, filter the web content and URL content to reach a goal of security management.

APP Enforcement

As the popularity of all kinds of instant messenger application arises, communication cannot become much easier. Nevertheless, while some industry may leverage this as a great tool to connect with their customers, some industry may take reserve attitude in order to reduce employee misusage during office hour or prevent unknown security leak. It is similar situation for corporation towards peer-to-peer applications since file-sharing can be convenient but insecure at the same time. To address these needs, we provide CSM functionality.

URL Content Filter

To provide an appropriate cyberspace to users, Vigor router equips with URL Content Filter not only to limit illegal traffic from/to the inappropriate web sites but also prohibit other web feature where malicious code may conceal.

Once a user type in or click on an URL with objectionable keywords, URL keyword blocking facility will decline the HTTP request to that web page thus can limit user's access to the website. You may imagine URL Content Filter as a well-trained convenience-store clerk who won't sell adult magazines to teenagers. At office, URL Content Filter can also provide a job-related only environment hence to increase the employee work efficiency. How can URL Content Filter work better than traditional firewall in the field of filtering? Because it checks the URL strings or some of HTTP data hiding in the payload of TCP packets while legacy firewall inspects packets based on the fields of TCP/IP headers only.

On the other hand, Vigor router can prevent user from accidentally downloading malicious codes from web pages. It’s very common that malicious codes conceal in the executable objects, such as ActiveX, Java Applet, compressed files, and other executable files. Once downloading these types of files from websites, you may risk bringing threat to your system. For example, an ActiveX control object is usually used for providing interactive web feature. If malicious code hides inside, it may occupy user’s system.

Web Content Filter

We all know that the content on the Internet just like other types of media may be inappropriate sometimes. As a responsible parent or employer, you should protect those in your trust against the hazards. With Web filtering service of the Vigor router, you can protect your business from common primary threats, such as productivity, legal liability, network and security threats. For parents, you can protect your children from viewing adult websites or chat rooms.

Once you have activated your Web Filtering service in Vigor router and chosen the categories of website you wish to restrict, each URL address requested (e.g.www.bbc.co.uk) will be checked against our server database. This database is updated as frequent as daily by a global team of Internet researchers. The server will look up the URL and return a category to your router. Your Vigor router will then decide whether to allow access to this site according to the categories you have selected. Please note that this action will not introduce any delay in your Web surfing because each of multiple load balanced database servers can handle millions of requests for categorization.

Note: The priority of URL Content Filter is higher than Web Content Filter.

CSM

▶ APP Enforcement Profile
▶ URL Content Filter Profile
▶ Web Content Filter Profile

5.6.1 APP Enforcement Profile

You can define policy profiles for different policy of IM (Instant Messenger)/P2P (Peer to Peer)/Protocol and miscellaneous application. Such profile will be used in Firewall>>General Setup and Firewall>>Filter Setup pages.

CSM >> APP Enforcement Profile

APP Enforcement Profile Table: Set to Factory Default
Profile	Name	Profile	Name
1.		17.
2.		18.
3.		19.
4.		20.
5.		21.
6.		22.
7.		23.
8.		24.
9.		25.
10.		26.
11.		27.
12.		28.
13.		29.
14.		30.
15.		31.
16.		32.

Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles.

Profile Display the number of the profile which allows you to click to set different policy.

Name

Display the name of the APP Enforcement Profile.

Click the number under Index column for settings in detail.

There are four tabs IM, P2P, Protocol and Misc displayed on this page. Each tab will bring out different items that you can choose to disallow people using.

Below shows the items which are categorized under IM.

CSM >> APP Enforcement Profile

Profile Index : 1 Profile Name: Action: Block IM P2P Protocol Misc Select All Advanced Management Activity / Application MSN YahooIM AIM(<= v5.9) ICQ Login □ □ □ □ Message □ □ □ □ File Transfer □ □ □ □ Game □ □ □ □ Conference(Video/Voice) □ □ □ □ Other Activities □ □ □ IM Application VoIP □AIM6 □QQ □iChat □Jabber/GoogleTalk □Skype □GoogleChat □XFire □GaduGadu □Paltalk □Kubao □Qnext □POCO/PP365 □AresChat □AliWW □Gizmo □KC □Lava-Lava □ICU2 □iSpQ □SIP □UC □MobileMSN □BaiduHi □TelTel Web IM (* = more than one address) □WebIM URLs eMessenger WebMSN meebo* eBuddy ILoveIM* ICQ Java* ICQ Flash* goowy* IMhaha* getMessenger IMUnitive* Wablet* mabber* MSN2GO* KoolIM MessengerFX* MessengerAdictos WebYahooIM OK Cancel

Profile Name Type a name for the CSM profile.

Action Block - All the items selected i Users will not access into related web pages or use the applications.

Pass - All the items selected in this page will not be blocked.

User can access into related web pages or use the applications.

Select All Click it to choose all of the items in this page.

The profiles configured here can be applied in the Firewall>>General Setup and Firewall>>Filter Setup pages as the standard for the host(s) to follow.

The items categorized under P2P .....

CSM >> APP Enforcement Profile

Profile Index : 1 Profile Name: Action: Block

IM	P2P	Protocol	Misc
Select All

Protocol	Applications
☐ SoulSeek	SoulSeek
☐ eDonkey	eDonkey, eMule, Shareaza
☐ FastTrack	KazaA, BearShare, iMesh
☐ OpenFT	KCeasy, FilePipe
☐ Gnutella	BearShare, Limewire, Shareaza, Foxy, KCeasy
☐ OpenNap	Lopster, XNap, WinLop
☐ BitTorrent	BitTorrent, BitSpirit, BitComet
☐ Winny	Winny, WinMX, Share

Other P2P Applications
Xunlei	Vagaa	PP365	POCO	Clubbox
Ares	ezPeer	Pando	Huntmine	Kuwo

OK Cancel

Below shows the items which are categorized under Protocol

CSM >> APP Enforcement Profile

Profile Index : 1 Profile Name: Action: Block

IM P2P Protocol Misc Select All Protocol □DNS □FTP □HTTP □IMAP □IRC □NNTP □POP3 □SMB □SMTP □SNMP □SSH □SSL/TLS □TELNET □MSSQL □MySQL □Oracle □PostgreSQL □Sybase □DB2 □Informix

OK Cancel

The items categorized under Misc ----

CSM >> APP Enforcement Profile

Profile Index : 1 Profile Name: Action: Block IM P2P Protocol Misc Select All Tunneling Socks4/5 PGPNet HTTP Proxy Tor VNN SoftEther MS TEREDO Wujie/UltraSurf Hamachi HTTP Tunnel Ping Tunnel TinyVPN RealTunnel DynaPass UltraVPN FreeU Skyfire Streaming MMS RTSP TVAnts PPStream PPlive FeiDian UUSee NSPlayer PCAST TVKoo SopCast UDLiveX TVUPlayer MySee Joost FlashVideo SilverLight Slingbox QVOD Remote Control VNC Radmin SpyAnywhere ShowMyPC LogMeIn TeamViewer Gogrok RemoteControlPro CrossLoop WindowsRDP pcAnywhere Timbuktu WindowsLiveSync SharedView Web HD HTTP Upload HiNet SafeBox MS SkyDrive GDoc Uploader ADrive MyOtherDrive Mozy BoxNet OfficeLive OK Cancel

5.6.2 URL Content Filter Profile

To provide an appropriate cyberspace to users, Vigor router equips with URL Content Filter not only to limit illegal traffic from/to the inappropriate web sites but also prohibit other web feature where malicious code may conceal.

Once a user type in or click on an URL with objectionable keywords, URL keyword blocking facility will decline the HTTP request to that web page thus can limit user's access to the website. You may imagine URL Content Filter as a well-trained convenience-store clerk who won't sell adult magazines to teenagers. At office, URL Content Filter can also provide a job-related only environment hence to increase the employee work efficiency. How can URL Content Filter work better than traditional firewall in the field of filtering? Because it checks the URL strings or some of HTTP data hiding in the payload of TCP packets while legacy firewall inspects packets based on the fields of TCP/IP headers only.

On the other hand, Vigor router can prevent user from accidentally downloading malicious codes from web pages. It's very common that malicious codes conceal in the executable objects, such as ActiveX, Java Applet, compressed files, and other executable files. Once downloading these types of files from websites, you may risk bringing threat to your system. For example, an ActiveX control object is usually used for providing interactive web feature. If malicious code hides inside, it may occupy user's system.

For example, if you add key words such as "sex", Vigor router will limit web access to web sites or web pages such as "www.sex.com", "www.backdoor.net/images/sex/p_386.html". Or you may simply specify the full or partial URL such as "www.sex.com" or "sex.com".

Also the Vigor router will discard any request that tries to retrieve the malicious code.

Click CSM and click URL Content Filter Profile to open the profile setting page.

CSM >> URL Content Filter Profile

URL Content Filter Profile Table:			Set to Factory Default
Profile	Name	Profile	Name
1.		5.
2.		6.
3.		7.
4.		8.

Administration Message (Max 255 characters)

OK

You can set eight profiles as URL content filter. Simply click the index number under Profile to open the following web page.

CSM >> URL Content Filter Profile

Profile Index: 1

Profile Name: Priority: Both : Pass Log: None 1.URL Access Control Enable URL Access Control Prevent web access from IP address Action: Group/Object Selections Pass Edit 2.Web Feature Enable Restrict Web Feature Action: Pass Cookie Proxy File Extension Profile: None OK Clear Cancel

Profile Name

Priority

Type the name for such profile.

It determines the action that this router will apply.

Both: Pass – The router will let all the packages that match with the conditions specified in URL Access Control and Web Feature below passing through. When you choose this setting, both configuration set in this page for URL Access

Control and Web Feature will be inactive.

Both: Block –The router will block all the packages that match with the conditions specified in URL Access Control and Web Feature below. When you choose this setting, both configuration set in this page for URL Access Control and Web Feature will be inactive.

Either: URL Access Control First – When all the

packages matching with the conditions specified in URL Access Control and Web Feature below, such function can determine the priority for the actions executed. For this one, the router will process the packages with the conditions set below for URL first, then Web feature second.

Either: Web Feature First –When all the packages

matching with the conditions specified in URL Access Control and Web Feature below, such function can determine the priority for the actions executed. For this one, the router will process the packages with the conditions set below for web feature first, then URL second.

Both : Pass Both : Pass Both : Block Either : URL Access Control First Either : Web Feature First

Log

None - There is no log file will be recorded for this profile.

Pass - Only the log about Pass will be recorded in Syslog.

Block - Only the log about Block will be recorded in Syslog.

All - All the actions (Pass and Block) will be recorded in Syslog.

URL Access Control

Enable URL Access Control - Check the box to activate URL Access Control. Note that the priority for URL

Access Control is higher than Restrict Web Feature. If the web content match the setting set in URL Access Control, the router will execute the action specified in this field and ignore the action specified under Restrict Web Feature.

Prevent web access from IP address - Check the box to

deny any web surfing activity using IP address, such as http://202.6.5.2. The reason for this is to prevent someone dodges the URL Access Control. You must clear your browser cache first so that the URL content filtering facility operates properly on a web page that you visited before.

Action – This setting is available only when Either : URL Access Control First or Either : Web Feature First is selected. Pass - Allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with the keywords listed on the box below.

Block - Restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage with the keywords listed on the box below.

If the web pages do not match with the keyword set here, it will be processed with reverse action.

Group/Object Selections – The Vigor router provides

several frames for users to define keywords and each frame supports multiple keywords. The keyword could be a noun, a partial noun, or a complete URL string. Multiple keywords within a frame are separated by space, comma, or semicolon. In addition, the maximal length of each frame is 32-character long. After specifying keywords, the Vigor router will decline the connection request to the website whose URL string matched to any user-defined keyword. It should be noticed that the more simplified the blocking keyword list, the more efficiently the Vigor router perform.

http://192.168.1.1 - Group/Object Edit - Microsoft Internet Explorer Object/Group Edit Keyword Object None or Keyword Object None or Keyword Object None or Keyword Object None or Keyword Object None or Keyword Object None or Keyword Object None or Keyword Object None or Keyword Group None or Keyword Group None or Keyword Group None or Keyword Group None or Keyword Group None or Keyword Group None OR OK Close

Web Feature

Enable Restrict Web Feature - Check this box to make the keyword being blocked or passed.

Action - This setting is available only when Either : URL Access Control First or Either : Web Feature Firs is selected. Pass allows accessing into the corresponding webpage with the keywords listed on the box below.

Pass - Allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with the keywords listed on the box below.

Block - Restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage with the keywords listed on the box below.

If the web pages do not match with the specified feature set here, it will be processed with reverse action.

Cookie - Check the box to filter out the cookie transmission from inside to outside world to protect the local user's privacy.

Proxy - Check the box to reject any proxy transmission. To control efficiently the limited-bandwidth usage, it will be of great value to provide the blocking mechanism that filters out the multimedia files downloading from web pages.

File Extension Profile – Choose one of the profiles that you configured in Object Setting>> File Extension Objects previously for passing or blocking the file downloading.

5.6.3 Web Content Filter Profile

Note: Web Content Filter (WCF) service is powered by Commtouch GlobalView, the partner of DrayTek.

There are three ways to activate WCF on vigor router, using Service Activation Wizard, by means of CSM>>Web Content Filter Profile or via System Maintenance>>Activation.

Service Activation Wizard allows you to use trial version or update the license of WCF directly without accessing into the server (MyVigor) located on http://myvigor.draytek.com.

However, if you use the Web Content Filter Profile page to activate WCF feature, it is necessary for you to access into the server (MyVigor) located on http://myvigor.draytek.com. Therefore, you need to register an account on http://myvigor.draytek.com for using corresponding service. Please refer to section of creating MyVigor account for more information.

Note: If you have used Service Activation Wizard to activate WCF service, you can skip this section.

WCF adopts the mechanism developed and offered by certain service provider. No matter activating WCF feature or getting a new license for web content filter, you have to click Activate to satisfy your request. Be aware that service provider matching with VigorIPPBX 2820 currently offers a period of time for trial version for users to experiment. If you want to purchase a formal edition, simply contact with the channel partner or your dealer.

Click CSM and click Web Content Filter Profile to open the profile setting page. The default setting for Setup Query Server /Setup Test Server is auto-selected. You can choose another server for your necessity by clicking Find more to open http://myvigor.draytek.com for searching another qualified and suitable one.

Web-Filter License

[Status: Not Activated]

Activate

Setup Query Server	auto-selected	Find more
Setup Test Server	auto-selected	Find more

Web Content Filter Profile Table:
Set to Factory Default

Profile	Name	Profile	Name
1.	Default	5.
2.		6.
3.		7.
4.		8.

Administration Message (Max 255 characters)

The requested Web page
from %SIP%
to %URL%
that is categorized with %CL%
has been blocked by %RNAME% Web Content Filter.

Please contact your system administrator for further information.

OK

Activate

Click it to access into MyVigor for activating WCF service.

Setup Query Server

It is recommended for you to use the default setting, auto-selected. You need to specify a server for categorize searching when you type URL in browser based on the web content filter profile.

Setup Test Server

It is recommended or you to use the default setting, auto-selected. By the way, you can click the link of Test a site to verify whether it is categorized to access into the test server selected.

Find more

Click it to open http://myvigor.draytek.com for searching another qualified and suitable server.

Set to Factory Default

Click this link to retrieve the factory settings.

Cache

None – the router will check the URL that the user wants to access via WCF precisely, however, the processing rate is normal. Such item can provide the most accurate URL matching.

L1 – the router will check the URL that the user wants to access via WCF. If the URL has been accessed previously, it will be stored for a short time (about 1 second) in the router to be accessed quickly if required. Such item can provide accurate URL matching with faster rate.

L2 – the router will check the URL that the user wants to access via WCF. If the data has been accessed previously, the IP addresses of source and destination IDs will be memorized for a short time (about 1 second) in the router. When the user tries to access the same destination ID, the router will check it by comparing the record stored. If it matches, the page will be retrieved quickly. Such item can provide URL matching with

the fastest rate.

L1+L2 Cache – the router will check the URL with fast processing rate combining the feature of L1 and L2.

Eight profiles are provided here as Web content filters. Simply click the index number under Profile to open the following web page. The items listed in Categories will be changed according to the different service providers. If you have and activate another web content filter license, the items will be changed simultaneously. All of the configuration made for web content filter will be deleted automatically. Therefore, please backup your data before you change the web content filter license.

CSM >> Web Content Filter Profile

Profile Index: 1 Profile Name: Default Log: Block Black/White List Enable Action: Group/Object Selections Block Edit Action: Block Groups Categories Child Protection Select All Clear All ✓ Alcohol & Tobacco ✓ Criminal Activity ✓ Gambling ✓ Hate & Intolerance ✓ Illegal Drug ✓ Nudity ✓ Pom & Sexually ✓ Violence ✓ Weapons ✓ School Cheating ✓ Sex Education ✓ Tasteless ✓ Child Abuse Images Leisure Select All Clear All ✓ Entertainment ✓ Games ✓ Sports ✓ Travel ✓ Leisure & Recreation ✓ Fashion & Beauty Business Select All Clear All ✓ Business ✓ Job Search ✓ Web-based Mail Chating Select All Clear All ✓ Chat ✓ Instant Messaging Computer-Internet Select All Clear All ✓ Anonymizers ✓ Forums & Newsgroups ✓ Computers ✓ Download Sites ✓ Streaming, Downloads ✓ Phishing & Fraud ✓ Search Engine,Portals ✓ Social Networking ✓ Spam Sites ✓ Malware ✓ Botnets ✓ Hacking ✓ Illegal Software ✓ Information Security ✓ Peer-to-Peer Other Select All Clear All ✓ Adv & Pop-Ups ✓ Arts ✓ Transportation ✓ Compromised ✓ Dating & Personals ✓ Education ✓ Finance ✓ Government ✓ Health & Medicine ✓ News ✓ Non-profits & NGOs ✓ Personal Sites ✓ Politics ✓ Real Estate ✓ Religion ✓ Restaurants & Dining ✓ Shopping ✓ Translators ✓ General ✓ Cults ✓ Greeting cards ✓ Image Sharing ✓ Network Errors ✓ Parked Domains ✓ Private IP Addresses ✓ Uncategorized Sites OK Cancel

If the Web Content Filter (WCF) powered by Commtouch is not activated, the above settings will not be valid.

Profile Name

Type a name for such profile.

Log

None – There is no log file will be recorded for this profile.

Pass - Only the log about Pass will be recorded in Syslog.

Block - Only the log about Block will be recorded in Syslog.

All - All the actions (Pass and Block) will be recorded in Syslog.

White/Black List

Enable - Activate white/black list function for such profile.

Group/Object Selections – Click Edit to choose the group or object profile as the content of white/black list.

Pass - allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with the characters listed on Group/Object Selections. If the web pages do not match with the specified feature set here, they will be processed with the categories listed on the box below.

Block - block accessing into the corresponding webpage with the characters listed on Group/Object Selections. If the web pages do not match with the specified feature set here, they will be processed with the categories listed on the box below.

Action

Pass - allow accessing into the corresponding webpage with the categories listed on the box below.

Block - restrict accessing into the corresponding webpage with the categories listed on the box below.

If the web pages do not match with the specified feature set here, it will be processed with reverse action.

5.7 Bandwidth Management

Below shows the menu items for Bandwidth Management.

Bandwidth Management

▶ Sessions Limit
Bandwidth Limit
Quality of Service

5.7.1 Sessions Limit

A PC with private IP address can access to the Internet via NAT router. The router will generate the records of NAT sessions for such connection. The P2P (Peer to Peer) applications (e.g., BitTorrent) always need many sessions for procession and also they will occupy over resources which might result in important accesses impacted. To solve the problem, you can use limit session to limit the session procession for specified Hosts.

In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Sessions Limit to open the web page.

Bandwidth Management >> Sessions Limit

Sessions Limit

Enable Disable Default Max Sessions: 100 Limitation List Index Start IP End IP Max Sessions Specific Limitation Start IP: End IP: Maximum Sessions: Add Edit Delete

Time Schedule

Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup:

Note: Action and Idle Timeout settings will be ignored.

To activate the function of limit session, simply click Enable and set the default session limit.

Enable Click this button to activate the function of limit session.

Disable Click this button to close the function of limit session.

Default session limit Defines the default session number used for each computer in LAN.

Limitation List Displays a list of specific limitations that you set on this web page.

Start IP Defines the start IP address for limit session.

End IP	Defines the end IP address for limit session.
Maximum Sessions	Defines the available session number for each host in the specific range of IP addresses. If you do not set the session number in this field, the system will use the default session limit for the specific limitation you set for each index.
Add	Adds the specific session limitation onto the list above.
Edit	Allows you to edit the settings for the selected limitation.
Remove	Remove the selected settings existing on the limitation list.
Index (1-15) in Schedule Setup	You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in Application >> Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page.

5.7.2 Bandwidth Limit

The downstream or upstream from FTP, HTTP or some P2P applications will occupy large of bandwidth and affect the applications for other programs. Please use Limit Bandwidth to make the bandwidth usage more efficient.

In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Bandwidth Limit to open the web page.

Bandwidth Management >> Bandwidth Limit

Bandwidth Limit

Enable Apply to 2nd Subnet Disable Default TX Limit: 200 Kbps Default RX Limit: 800 Kbps Limitation List Index Start IP End IP TX limit RX limit Specific Limitation Start IP: End IP: TX Limit: Kbps RX Limit: Kbps Add Edit Delete

Time Schedule

Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: □, □, □, □ Note: Action and Idle Timeout settings will be ignored.

To activate the function of limit bandwidth, simply click Enable and set the default upstream and downstream limit.

Enable

Click this button to activate the function of limit bandwidth. Apply to 2^nd Subnet - if bandwidth limit function is enabled, please check this box to apply to

	second subnet.
Disable	Click this button to close the function of limit bandwidth.
Default TX limit	Define the default speed of the upstream for each computer in LAN.
Default RX limit	Define the default speed of the downstream for each computer in LAN.
Limitation List	Display a list of specific limitations that you set on this web page.
Start IP	Define the start IP address for limit bandwidth.
End IP	Define the end IP address for limit bandwidth.
TX limit	Define the limitation for the speed of the upstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the system will use the default speed for the specific limitation you set for each index.
RX limit	Define the limitation for the speed of the downstream. If you do not set the limit in this field, the system will use the default speed for the specific limitation you set for each index.
Add	Add the specific speed limitation onto the list above.
Edit	Allows you to edit the settings for the selected limitation.
Delete	Remove the selected settings existing on the limitation list.
Index (1-15) in Schedule Setup	You can type in four sets of time schedule for your request. All the schedules can be set previously in Application>> Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page.

5.7.3 Quality of Service

Deploying QoS (Quality of Service) management to guarantee that all applications receive the service levels required and sufficient bandwidth to meet performance expectations is indeed one important aspect of modern enterprise network.

One reason for QoS is that numerous TCP-based applications tend to continually increase their transmission rate and consume all available bandwidth, which is called TCP slow start. If other applications are not protected by QoS, it will detract much from their performance in the overcrowded network. This is especially essential to those are low tolerant of loss, delay or jitter (delay variation).

Another reason is due to congestions at network intersections where speeds of interconnected circuits mismatch or traffic aggregates, packets will queue up and traffic can be throttled back to a lower speed. If there's no defined priority to specify which packets should be discarded (or in another term "dropped") from an overflowing queue, packets of sensitive applications mentioned above might be the ones to drop off. How this will affect application performance?

There are two components within Primary configuration of QoS deployment:

- Classification: Identifying low-latency or crucial applications and marking them for high-priority service level enforcement throughout the network.

- Scheduling: Based on classification of service level to assign packets to queues and associated service types

The basic QoS implementation in Vigor routers is to classify and schedule packets based on the service type information in the IP header. For instance, to ensure the connection with the headquarter, a teleworker may enforce an index of QoS Control to reserve bandwidth for HTTPS connection while using lots of application at the same time.

One more larger-scale implementation of QoS network is to apply DSCP (Differentiated Service Code Point) and IP Precedence disciplines at Layer 3. Compared with legacy IP Precedence that uses Type of Service (ToS) field in the IP header to define 8 service classes, DSCP is a successor creating 64 classes possible with backward IP Precedence compatibility. In a QoS-enabled network, or Differentiated Service (DiffServ or DS) framework, a DS domain owner should sign a Service License Agreement (SLA) with other DS domain owners to define the service level provided toward traffic from different domains. Then each DS node in these domains will perform the priority treatment. This is called per-hop-behavior (PHB). The definition of PHB includes Expedited Forwarding (EF), Assured Forwarding (AF), and Best Effort (BE). AF defines the four classes of delivery (or forwarding) classes and three levels of drop precedence in each class.

Vigor routers as edge routers of DS domain shall check the marked DSCP value in the IP header of bypassing traffic, thus to allocate certain amount of resource execute appropriate policing, classification or scheduling. The core routers in the backbone will do the same checking before executing treatments in order to ensure service-level consistency throughout the whole QoS-enabled network.

graph LR
    A["Private Network"] -->|AF class 2 (medium drop)| B["SLA"]
    B --> C["DS domain 1"]
    C <--> D["SLA"]
    D <--> E["DS domain 2"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333

However, each node may take different attitude toward packets with high priority marking since it may bind with the business deal of SLA among different DS domain owners. It's not easy to achieve deterministic and consistent high-priority QoS traffic throughout the whole network with merely Vigor router's effort.

In the Bandwidth Management menu, click Quality of Service to open the web page.

Bandwidth Management >> Quality of Service

General Setup
Index	Status	Bandwidth	Direction	Class 1	Class 2	Class 3	Others	UDP Bandwidth Control	Online Statistics
WAN1	Enable	--Kbps/--Kbps	Outbound	25%	25%	25%	25%	Inactive	Status	Setup
WAN2	Enable	10000Kbps/10000Kbps	Outbound	25%	25%	25%	25%	Inactive	Status	Setup

Class Rule

Index	Name	Rule	Service Type
Class 1		Edit
Class 2		Edit	Edit
Class 3		Edit

This page displays the QoS settings result of the WAN interface. Click the Setup link to access into next page for the general setup of WAN interface. As to class rule, simply click the Edit link to access into next for configuration.

You can configure general setup for the WAN interface, edit the Class Rule, and edit the Service Type for the Class Rule for your request.

General Setup for WAN Interface

When you click Setup, you can configure the bandwidth ratio for QoS of the WAN interface. There are four queues allowed for QoS control. The first three (Class 1 to Class 3) class rules can be adjusted for your necessity. Yet, the last one is reserved for the packets which are not suitable for the user-defined class rules.

Bandwidth Management >> Quality of Service

WAN1 General Setup

Enable the QoS Control Index Class Name Reserved_bandwidth Ratio Class 1 25 % Class 2 25 % Class 3 25 % Others 25 % Enable UDP Bandwidth Control Limited_bandwidth Ratio 5 % Outbound TCP ACK Prioritize Online Statistics OK Clear Cancel

WAN 1

Bandwidth Management >> Quality of Service

Backup WAN General Setup

Enable the QoS Control OUT WAN Inbound Bandwidth 10000 Kbps WAN Outbound Bandwidth 10000 Kbps Index Class Name Reserved_bandwidth Ratio Class 1 25 % Class 2 25 % Class 3 25 % Others 25 % Enable UDP Bandwidth Control Limited_bandwidth Ratio 25 % Outbound TCP ACK Prioritize Online Statistics OK Clear Cancel

WAN2

Enable the QoS Control The factory default for this setting is checked.

Please also define which traffic the QoS Control settings will apply to.

IN- apply to incoming traffic only.

OUT-apply to outgoing traffic only.

BOTH- apply to both incoming and outgoing traffic.

Check this box and click OK, then click Setup link again.

	You will see the Online Statistics link appearing on this page.
WAN Inbound Bandwidth	It allows you to set the connecting rate of data input for WAN. For example, if your ADSL supports 1M of downstream and 256K upstream, please set 1000kbps for this box. The default value is 1000kbps.
WAN Outbound Bandwidth	It allows you to set the connecting rate of data output for WAN. For example, if your ADSL supports 1M of downstream and 256K upstream, please set 256kbps for this box. The default value is 1000kbps.
Reserved Bandwidth Ratio	It is reserved for the group index in the form of ratio of reserved bandwidth to upstream speed and reserved bandwidth to downstream speed.
Enable UDP Bandwidth Control	Check this and set the limited bandwidth ratio on the right field. This is a protection of TCP application traffic since UDP application traffic such as streaming video will exhaust lots of bandwidth.
Outbound TCP ACK Prioritize	The difference in bandwidth between download and upload are great in ADSL2+ environment. For the download speed might be impacted by the uploading TCP ACK, you can check this box to push ACK of upload faster to speed the network traffic.
Limited_bandwidth Ratio	The ratio typed here is reserved for limited bandwidth of UDP application.
Online Statistics	Display an online statistics for quality of service for your reference. This link will be seen only if you click OK in WAN1/Backup WAN General Setup web page and click Setup again (for WAN1/ Backup WAN) on the Bandwidth Management>>Quality of Service.

Bandwidth Management >> Quality of Service

Index	Direction	Class Name	Reserved-bandwidth Ratio	Outbound Throughput (Bytes/sec)
1	OUT		25%	0
2	OUT		25%	0
3	OUT		25%	0
4	OUT	Others	25%	0

Edit the Class Rule for QoS

The first three (Class 1 to Class 3) class rules can be adjusted for your necessity. To add, edit or delete the class rule, please click the Edit link of that one.

Bandwidth Management >> Quality of Service

General Setup								Set to Factory Default
Index	Status	Bandwidth	Direction	Class 1	Class 2	Class 3	Others	UDP Bandwidth Control	Online Statistics
WAN1	Enable	--Kbps/--Kbps	Outbound	25%	25%	25%	25%	Inactive	Status Setup
WAN2	Enable	10000Kbps/10000Kbps	Outbound	25%	25%	25%	25%	Inactive	Status Setup

Class Rule

Index	Name	Rule	Service Type
Class 1		Edit
Class 2		Edit	Edit
Class 3		Edit

After you click the Edit link, you will see the following page. Now you can define the name for that Class. In this case, "Test" is used as the name of Class Index #1.

Bandwidth Management >> Quality of Service
Class Index #1

NO	Status	Local Address	Remote Address	DiffServ CodePoint	Service Type
1	Empty	-	-	-	-
			Add	Edit	Delete
			OK	Cancel

For adding a new rule, click Add to open the following page.

Bandwidth Management >> Quality of Service
Rule Edit

ACT
Local Address	Any	Edit
Remote Address	Any	Edit
DiffServ CodePoint	ANY
Service Type	ANY
Note: Please choose/setup the Service Type first.

ACT

Check this box to invoke these settings.

Local Address

Click the Edit button to set the local IP address (on LAN) for the rule.

Remote Address

Click the Edit button to set the remote IP address (on LAN/WAN) for the rule.

Edit

It allows you to edit source address information.

http://192.168 1.1/Moc/QostpEdit.htm - Microsoft Internet Explorer Address Type Subnet Address Start IP Address 0.0.0.0 End IP Address 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0 OK Close

Address Type - Determine the address type for the source address.

For Single Address, you have to fill in Start IP address.

For Range Address, you have to fill in Start IP address and End IP address.

For Subnet Address, you have to fill in Start IP address and Subnet Mask.

DiffServ CodePoint

All the packets of data will be divided with different levels and will be processed according to the level type by the system. Please assign one of the levels of the data for processing with QoS control.

Service Type

It determines the service type of the data for processing with QoS control. It can also be edited. You can choose the predefined service type from the Service Type drop down list. Those types are predefined in factory. Simply choose the one that you want for using by current QoS.

By the way, you can set up to 20 rules for one Class. If you want to edit an existed rule, please select the radio button of that one and click Edit to open the rule edit page for modification.

Bandwidth Management >> Quality of Service

Class Index #1

NO	Status	Local Address	Remote Address	DiffServ CodePoint	Service Type
1 ○	Active		Any	ANY	ANY
2 ○	Active	~	Any	AF Class4 (High Drop)	TELNET(TCP:23)

Edit the Service Type for Class Rule

To add a new service type, edit or delete an existed service type, please click the Edit link under Service Type field.

Bandwidth Management >> Quality of Service

General Setup								Set to Factory Default
Index	Status	Bandwidth	Direction	Class 1	Class 2	Class 3	Others	UDP Bandwidth Control	Online Statistics
WAN1	Enable	--Kbps/--Kbps	Outbound	25%	25%	25%	25%	Inactive	Status Setup
WAN2	Enable	10000Kbps/10000Kbps	Outbound	25%	25%	25%	25%	Inactive	Status Setup

Class Rule

Index	Name	Rule	Service Type
Class 1		Edit
Class 2		Edit	Edit
Class 3		Edit

After you click the Edit link, you will see the following page.

Bandwidth Management >> Quality of Service

User Defined Service Type

NO	Name	Protocol		Port
1	Empty	-		-
		Add	Edit	Delete
		Cancel

For adding a new service type, click Add to open the following page.

Bandwidth Management >> Quality of Service

Service Type Edit

Service Name
Service Type	TCP 6
Port Configuration
Type	Single Range
Port Number	0 - 0

Service Name

Type in a new service for your request.

Service Type

Choose the type (TCP, UDP or TCP/UDP) for the new service.

Port Configuration

Click Single or Range as the Type. If you select Range, you have to type in the starting port number and the end porting number on the boxes below.

Port Number - Type in the starting port number and the end porting number here if you choose Range as the type.

By the way, you can set up to 40 service types. If you want to edit/delete an existed service type, please select the radio button of that one and click Edit/Edit for modification.

5.8 Applications

Below shows the menu items for Applications.

The ISP often provides you with a dynamic IP address when you connect to the Internet via your ISP. It means that the public IP address assigned to your router changes each time you access the Internet. The Dynamic DNS feature lets you assign a domain name to a dynamic WAN IP address. It allows the router to update its online WAN IP address mappings on the specified Dynamic DNS server. Once the router is online, you will be able to use the registered domain name to access the router or internal virtual servers from the Internet. It is particularly helpful if you host a web server, FTP server, or other server behind the router.

Before you use the Dynamic DNS feature, you have to apply for free DDNS service to the DDNS service providers. The router provides up to three accounts from three different DDNS service providers. Basically, Vigor routers are compatible with the DDNS services supplied by most popular DDNS service providers such as www.dyndns.org, www.no-ip.com, www.dtdns.com, www.changeip.com, www.dynamic- nameserver.com. You should visit their websites to register your own domain name for the router.

Enable the Function and Add a Dynamic DNS Account

1. Assume you have a registered domain name from the DDNS provider, say hostname.dyndns.org, and an account with username: test and password: test.

2. In the DDNS setup menu, check Enable Dynamic DNS Setup.

Applications >> Dynamic DNS Setup Dynamic DNS Setup Enable Dynamic DNS Setup Auto-Update interval 14400 Min(s) (1~14400) Set to Factory Default View Log Force Update Accounts: Index WAN Interface Domain Name Active 1. WAN1 First . x 2. WAN1 First . x 3. WAN1 First . x OK Clear All

Set to Factory

Clear all profiles and recover to factory settings.

Default

Enable Dynamic Check this box to enable DDNS function.

DNS Setup

Index Click the number below Index to access into the setting page of DDNS setup to set account(s).

WAN Interface Display current WAN interface used for accessing Internet.

Domain Name Display the domain name that you set on the setting page of DDNS setup.

Active Display if this account is active or inactive.

View Log Display DDNS log status.

Force Update Force the router updates its information to DDNS server.

1. Select Index number 1 to add an account for the router. Check Enable Dynamic DNS Account, and choose correct Service Provider: dyndns.org, type the registered hostname: hostname and domain name suffix: dyndns.org in the Domain Name block.

Applications >> Dynamic DNS Setup >> Dynamic DNS Account Setup

Index : 1

Enable Dynamic DNS Account WAN Interface WAN1 First Service Provider dyndns.org (www.dyndns.org) Service Type Dynamic Domain Name chronic6633 dyndns.org dyndns.org Login Name chronic6633 (max. 64 characters) Password ••••••••••••• (max. 23 characters) □ Wildcards □ Backup MX Mail Extender

Enable Dynamic Check this box to enable the current account. If you did check the box, you will see a check mark appeared on the Active column of the previous web page in step 2).

WAN Interface Select the WAN interface order to apply settings here.

Service Provider Select the service provider for the DDNS account.

Service Type Select a service type (Dynamic, Custom or Static). If you choose Custom, you can modify the domain that is chosen in the Domain Name field.

Domain Name Type in one domain name that you applied previously. Use the drop down list to choose the desired domain.

Login Name Type in the login name that you set for applying domain.

Password Type in the password that you set for applying domain.

1. Click OK button to activate the settings. You will see your setting has been saved.

The Wildcard and Backup MX features are not supported for all Dynamic DNS providers. You could get more detailed information from their websites.

5.8.2 Schedule

The Vigor router has a built-in real time clock which can update itself manually or automatically by means of Network Time Protocols (NTP). As a result, you can not only schedule the router to dialup to the Internet at a specified time, but also restrict Internet access to certain hours so that users can connect to the Internet only during certain hours, say, business hours. The schedule is also applicable to other functions.

You have to set your time before set schedule. In System Maintenance>> Time and Date menu, press Inquire Time button to set the Vigor router's clock to current time of your PC. The clock will reset once if you power down or reset the router. There is another way to set up time. You can inquiry an NTP server (a time server) on the Internet to synchronize the router's clock. This method can only be applied when the WAN connection has been built up.

Applications >> Schedule

Schedule:			Set to Factory Default
Index	Status	Index	Status
1.	×	9.	×
2.	×	10.	×
3.	×	11.	×
4.	×	12.	×
5.	×	13.	×
6.	×	14.	×
7.	×	15.	×
8.	×

Status: v --- Active, x --- Inactive

Set to Factory Default Clear all profiles and recover to factory settings.

Index Click the number below Index to access into the setting page of schedule.

Status Display if this schedule setting is active or inactive.

You can set up to 15 schedules. Then you can apply them to your Internet Access or VPN and Remote Access >> LAN to LAN settings.

To add a schedule, please click any index, say Index No. 1. The detailed settings of the call schedule with index 1 are shown below.

Applications >> Schedule

Index No. 1

Enable Schedule Setup Start Date (yyyy-mm-dd) 2000 -1 -1 Start Time (hh:mm) 0 : 0 Duration Time (hh:mm) 0 : 0 Action Force On Idle Timeout 0 minute(s).(max. 255, 0 for default) How Often Once Weekdays Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat OK Clear Cancel

Enable Schedule Setup	Check to enable the schedule.
Start Date (yyyy-mm-dd)	Specify the starting date of the schedule.
Start Time (hh:mm)	Specify the starting time of the schedule.
Duration Time (hh:mm)	Specify the duration (or period) for the schedule.
Action	Specify which action Call Schedule should apply during the period of the schedule.

Force On -Force the connection to be always on.

Force Down -Force the connection to be always down.

Enable Dial-On-Demand -Specify the connection to be dial-on-demand and the value of idle timeout should be specified in Idle Timeout field.

Disable Dial-On-Demand -Specify the connection to be up when it has traffic on the line. Once there is no traffic over idle timeout, the connection will be down and never up again during the schedule.

Idle Timeout	Specify the duration (or period) for the schedule.
	How often -Specify how often the schedule will be applied

Once -The schedule will be applied just once

Weekdays -Specify which days in one week should perform the schedule.

Example

Suppose you want to control the PPPoE Internet access connection to be always on (Force On) from 9:00 to 18:00 for whole week. Other time the Internet access connection should be disconnected (Force Down).

Office

Hour:

(Force On)

Mon - Sun 9:00 am to 6:00 pm

1. Make sure the PPPoE connection and Time Setup is working properly.
2. Configure the PPPoE always on from 9:00 to 18:00 for whole week.
3. Configure the Force Down from 18:00 to next day 9:00 for whole week.
4. Assign these two profiles to the PPPoE Internet access profile. Now, the PPPoE Internet connection will follow the schedule order to perform Force On or Force Down action according to the time plan that has been pre-defined in the schedule profiles.

5.8.3 RADIUS

Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) is a security authentication client/server protocol that supports authentication, authorization and accounting, which is widely used by Internet service providers. It is the most common method of authenticating and authorizing dial-up and tunneled network users.

The built-in RADIUS client feature enables the router to assist the remote dial-in user or a wireless station and the RADIUS server in performing mutual authentication. It enables centralized remote access authentication for network management.

Applications >> RADIUS

RADIUS Setup

Enable Server IP Address Destination Port 1812 Shared Secret Confirm Shared Secret OK Clear Cancel

Enable

Check to enable RADIUS client feature

Server IP Address

Enter the IP address of RADIUS server

Destination Port

The UDP port number that the RADIUS server is using. The default value is 1812, based on RFC 2138.

Shared Secret

The RADIUS server and client share a secret that is used to authenticate the messages sent between them. Both sides must be configured to use the same shared secret.

Confirm Shared Secret

Re-type the Shared Secret for confirmation.

5.8.4 UPnP

The UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) protocol is supported to bring to network connected devices the ease of installation and configuration which is already available for directly connected PC peripherals with the existing Windows 'Plug and Play' system. For NAT routers, the major feature of UPnP on the router is "NAT Traversal". This enables applications inside the firewall to automatically open the ports that they need to pass through a router. It is more reliable than requiring a router to work out by itself which ports need to be opened. Further, the user does not have to manually set up port mappings or a DMZ. UPnP is available on Windows XP and the router provide the associated support for MSN Messenger to allow full use of the voice, video and messaging features.

Applications >> UPnP

UPnP

Enable UPnP Service

Enable Connection control Service

Enable Connection Status Service

Note: If you intend running UPnP service inside your LAN, you should check the appropriate service above to allow control, as well as the appropriate UPnP settings.

Enable UPNP Service

Accordingly, you can enable either the Connection Control Service or Connection Status Service.

After setting Enable UPNP Service setting, an icon of IP Broadband Connection on Router on Windows XP/Network Connections will appear. The connection status and control status will be able to be activated. The NAT Traversal of UPnP enables the multimedia features of your applications to operate. This has to manually set up port mappings or use other similar methods. The screenshots below show examples of this facility.

Address Network Connections Network Tasks Create a new connection Set up a home or small office network See Also Network Troubleshooter Other Places Control Panel My Network Places My Documents My Computer Details Network Connections System Folder Broadband hinet Disconnected WAN Port (PPPOE) Dial-up test Disconnected DrayTek ESON PPP Internet Gateway IP Broadband Connection on Router Enabled LAN or High-Speed Internet Local Area Connection Enabled Realtek RTL0109/010x Family ...

IP Broadband Connection on Router Status General Internet Gateway Status: Connected Duration: 00:19.06 Speed: 100.0 Mbps Activity Internet Internet Gateway My Computer Packets: Sent: 404 734 Received: 1,115 666 Properties Disable Close

The UPnP facility on the router enables UPnP aware applications such as MSN Messenger to discover what are behind a NAT router. The application will also learn the external IP address and configure port mappings on the router. Subsequently, such a facility forwards packets from the external ports of the router to the internal ports used by the application.

IP Broadband Connection on Router Properties General Connect to the Internet using: IP Broadband Connection on Router This connection allows you to connect to the Internet through a shared connection on another computer. Settings... ✓ Show icon in notification area when connected OK Cancel

Advanced Settings Services Select the services running on your network that Internet users can access. Services □ Ftp Example ✓ msnmsgr (192.168.29.11:13135) 60654 UDP ✓ msnmsgr (192.168.29.11:7824) 13251 UDP ✓ msnmsgr (192.168.29.11:8789) 63231 TCP Add... Edit... Delete OK Cancel

The reminder as regards concern about Firewall and UPnP

Can't work with Firewall Software

Enabling firewall applications on your PC may cause the UPnP function not working properly. This is because these applications will block the accessing ability of some network ports.

Security Considerations

Activating the UPnP function on your network may incur some security threats. You should consider carefully these risks before activating the UPnP function.

Some Microsoft operating systems have found out the UPnP weaknesses and hence you need to ensure that you have applied the latest service packs and patches.
Non-privileged users can control some router functions, including removing and adding port mappings.

The UPnP function dynamically adds port mappings on behalf of some UPnP-aware applications. When the applications terminate abnormally, these mappings may not be removed.

5.8.5 IGMP

IGMP is the abbreviation of Internet Group Management Protocol. It is a communication protocol which is mainly used for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups. For invoking IGMP Snooping function, you have to check the Enable IGMP Proxy box first for activating the IGMP proxy function.

Applications >> IGMP

IGMP

Enable IGMP Proxy WAN1 IGMP Proxy is to act as a multicast proxy for hosts on the LAN side. Enable IGMP Proxy, if you will access any multicast group. But this function take no affect when Bridge Mode is enabled. Enable IGMP Snooping Enable IGMP Snooping, multicast traffic is only forwarded to ports that have members of that group. Disable IGMP snooping, multicast traffic is treated in the same manner as broadcast traffic.

Working Multicast Groups
Index	Group ID	P1	P2	P3	P4

Enable IGMP Proxy

Check this box to enable this function. The application of multicast will be executed through WAN port you specified.

Enable IGMP Snooping

Check this box to enable this function. The application of multicast will be executed for the clients in LAN.

Group ID

This field displays the ID port for the multicast group. The available range for IGMP starts from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.254.

P1 to P4

It indicates the LAN port used for the multicast group.

Refresh

Click this link to renew the working multicast group status.

If you check Enable IGMP Proxy, you will get the following page. All the multicast groups will be listed and all the LAN ports (P1 to P4) are available for use.

5.8.6 Wake on LAN

A PC client on LAN can be woken up by the router it connects. When a user wants to wake up a specified PC through the router, he/she must type correct MAC address of the specified PC on this web page of Wake on LAN of this router.

In addition, such PC must have installed a network card supporting WOL function. By the way, WOL function must be set as “Enable” on the BIOS setting.

Application >> Wake on LAN

Wake on LAN

Note: Wake on LAN integrates with Bind IP to MAC function, only binded PCs can wake up through IP. Wake by: MAC Address IP Address: -- MAC Address: Wake Up! Result

Wake by

Two types provide for you to wake up the binded IP. If you choose Wake by MAC Address, you have to type the correct MAC address of the host in MAC Address boxes. If you choose Wake by IP Address, you have to choose the correct IP address.

Wake by:

IP Address

The IP addresses that have been configured in Firewall>>Bind IP to MAC will be shown in this drop down list. Choose the IP address from the drop down list that you want to wake up.

MAC Address

Type any one of the MAC address of the binded PCs.

Wake Up

Click this button to wake up the selected IP. See the following figure. The result will be shown on the box.

Application >> Wake on LAN

Wake on LAN

Note: Wake on LAN integrates with Bind IP to MAC function, only binded PCs can wake up through IP. Wake by: MAC Address IP Address: -- MAC Address: : : : : : : : : : Wake Up! Result Send command to client done.

5.9 VPN and Remote Access

A Virtual Private Network (VPN) is the extension of a private network that encompasses links across shared or public networks like the Internet. In short, by VPN technology, you can send data between two computers across a shared or public network in a manner that emulates the properties of a point-to-point private link.

Below shows the menu items for VPN and Remote Access.

VPN and Remote Access ► Remote Access Control ► PPP General Setup ► IPSec General Setup ► IPSec Peer Identity ► Remote Dial-in User ► LAN to LAN ► Connection Management

5.9.1 Remote Access Control

Enable the necessary VPN service as you need. If you intend to run a VPN server inside your LAN, you should disable the VPN service of Vigor Router to allow VPN tunnel pass through, as well as the appropriate NAT settings, such as DMZ or open port.

VPN and Remote Access >> Remote Access Control Setup

Remote Access Control Setup

Enable PPTP VPN Service
Enable IPSec VPN Service
Enable L2TP VPN Service
Enable ISDN Dial-In

Note: If you intend running a VPN server inside your LAN, you should uncheck the appropriate protocol above to allow pass-through, as well as the appropriate NAT settings.

The Vigor router will not accept the ISDN dial-in connection if the box of Enable ISDN Dial-in is not checked.

5.9.2 PPP General Setup

This submenu only applies to PPP-related VPN connections, such as PPTP, L2TP, L2TP over IPSec.

VPN and Remote Access >> PPP General Setup

PPP General Setup

PPP/MP Protocol Dial-In PPP Authentication PAP or CHAP Dial-In PPP Encryption (MPPE) Optional MPPE Mutual Authentication (PAP) Yes No Username Password IP Address Assignment for Dial-In Users (When DHCP Disable set) Start IP Address 192.168.1.200

Dial-In PPP Authentication

PAP Only - Select this option to force the router to authenticate dial-in users with the PAP protocol.

PAP or CHAP - Selecting this option means the router will attempt to authenticate dial-in users with the CHAP protocol first. If the dial-in user does not support this protocol, it will fall back to use the PAP protocol for authentication.

Dial-In PPP Encryption (MPPE)

Optional MPPE - This option represents that the MPPE encryption method will be optionally employed in the router for the remote dial-in user. If the remote dial-in user does not support the MPPE encryption algorithm, the router will transmit “no MPPE encrypted packets”. Otherwise, the MPPE encryption scheme will be used to encrypt the data.

Optional MPPE Optional MPPE Require MPPE(40/128 bit) Maximum MPPE(128 bit)

Require MPPE (40/128bits) - Selecting this option will

force the router to encrypt packets by using the MPPE encryption algorithm. In addition, the remote dial-in user will use 40-bit to perform encryption prior to using 128-bit for encryption. In other words, if 128-bit MPPE encryption method is not available, then 40-bit encryption scheme will be applied to encrypt the data.

Maximum MPPE - This option indicates that the router

will use the MPPE encryption scheme with maximum bits (128-bit) to encrypt the data.

Mutual Authentication (PAP)

The Mutual Authentication function is mainly used to communicate with other routers or clients who need bi-directional authentication in order to provide stronger security, for example, Cisco routers. So you should enable this function when your peer router requires mutual authentication. You should further specify the User Name

and Password of the mutual authentication peer.

Start IP Address

Enter a start IP address for the dial-in PPP connection. You should choose an IP address from the local private network. For example, if the local private network is 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0, you could choose 192.168.1.200 as the Start IP Address. But, you have to notice that the first two IP addresses of 192.168.1.200 and 192.168.1.201 are reserved for ISDN remote dial-in user.

5.9.3 IPSec General Setup

In IPSec General Setup, there are two major parts of configuration.

There are two phases of IPSec.

Phase 1: negotiation of IKE parameters including encryption, hash, Diffie-Hellman parameter values, and lifetime to protect the following IKE exchange, authentication of both peers using either a Pre-Shared Key or Digital Signature (x.509). The peer that starts the negotiation proposes all its policies to the remote peer and then remote peer tries to find a highest-priority match with its policies. Eventually to set up a secure tunnel for IKE Phase 2.
Phase 2: negotiation IPSec security methods including Authentication Header (AH) or Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) for the following IKE exchange and mutual examination of the secure tunnel establishment.

There are two encapsulation methods used in IPSec, Transport and Tunnel. The Transport mode will add the AH/ESP payload and use original IP header to encapsulate the data payload only. It can just apply to local packet, e.g., L2TP over IPSec. The Tunnel mode will not only add the AH/ESP payload but also use a new IP header (Tunneled IP header) to encapsulate the whole original IP packet.

Authentication Header (AH) provides data authentication and integrity for IP packets passed between VPN peers. This is achieved by a keyed one-way hash function to the packet to create a message digest. This digest will be put in the AH and transmitted along with packets. On the receiving side, the peer will perform the same one-way hash on the packet and compare the value with the one in the AH it receives.

Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) is a security protocol that provides data confidentiality and protection with optional authentication and replay detection service.

VPN and Remote Access >> IPSec General Setup

VPN IKE/IPSec General Setup

Dial-in Set up for Remote Dial-in users and Dynamic IP Client (LAN to LAN).

IKE Authentication Method Pre-Shared Key Confirm Pre-Shared Key IPSec Security Method ✓ Medium (AH) Data will be authentic, but will not be encrypted. High (ESP) ✓ DES ✓ 3DES ✓ AES Data will be encrypted and authentic. OK Cancel

IKE Authentication

This usually applies to those are remote dial-in user or node

Method

(LAN-to-LAN) which uses dynamic IP address and IPSec-related VPN connections such as L2TP over IPSec and IPSec tunnel.

Pre-Shared Key - Currently only support Pre-Shared Key for IKE authentication

Confirm Pre-Shared Key- Retype the characters to confirm the pre-shared key.

IPSec Security Method

Medium - Authentication Header (AH) means data will be authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option is active.

High - Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) means payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated. You may select encryption algorithm from Data Encryption Standard (DES), Triple DES (3DES), and AES.

5.9.4 IPSec Peer Identity

To use digital certificate for peer authentication in either LAN-to-LAN connection or Remote User Dial-In connection, here you may edit a table of peer certificate for selection. As shown below, the router provides 32 entries of digital certificates for peer dial-in users.

VPN and Remote Access >> IPSec Peer Identity

X509 Peer ID Accounts:				Set to Factory Default
Index	Name	Status	Index	Name	Status
1.	???	×	17.	???	×
2.	???	×	18.	???	×
3.	???	×	19.	???	×
4.	???	×	20.	???	×
5.	???	×	21.	???	×
6.	???	×	22.	???	×
7.	???	×	23.	???	×
8.	???	×	24.	???	×
9.	???	×	25.	???	×
10.	???	×	26.	???	×
11.	???	×	27.	???	×
12.	???	×	28.	???	×
13.	???	×	29.	???	×
14.	???	×	30.	???	×
15.	???	×	31.	???	×
16.	???	×	32.	???	×

Set to Factory Default Click it to clear all indexes.

Index Click the number below Index to access into the setting page of IPSec Peer Identity.

Name Display the profile name of that index.

Click each index to edit one peer digital certificate. There are three security levels of digital signature authentication: Fill each necessary field to authenticate the remote peer. The following explanation will guide you to fill all the necessary fields.

Profile Index : 1

Profile Name ???? Enable this account Accept Any Peer ID Accept Subject Alternative Name Type IP Address IP Accept Subject Name Country (C) State (ST) Location (L) Organization (O) Organization Unit (OU) Common Name (CN) Email (E) OK Clear Cancel

Profile Name

Accept Any Peer ID

Accept Subject Alternative Name

Accept Subject Name

Type in a name in this file.

Click to accept any peer regardless of its identity.

Click to check one specific field of digital signature to accept the peer with matching value. The field can be IP Address, Domain, or E-mail Address. The box under the Type will appear according to the type you select and ask you to fill in corresponding setting.

Click to check the specific fields of digital signature to accept the peer with matching value. The field includes Country (C), State (ST), Location (L), Organization (O), Organization Unit (OU), Common Name (CN), and Email (E).

5.9.5 Remote Dial-in User

You can manage remote access by maintaining a table of remote user profile, so that users can be authenticated to dial-in via ISDN or build the VPN connection. You may set parameters including specified connection peer ID, connection type (ISDN Dial-In connection, VPN connection - including PPTP, IPSec Tunnel, and L2TP by itself or over IPSec) and corresponding security methods, etc.

The router provides 32 access accounts for dial-in users. Besides, you can extend the user accounts to the RADIUS server through the built-in RADIUS client function. The following figure shows the summary table.

VPN and Remote Access >> Remote Dial-in User

Index	User	Status	Index	User	Status
1.	???	×	17.	???	×
2.	???	×	18.	???	×
3.	???	×	19.	???	×
4.	???	×	20.	???	×
5.	???	×	21.	???	×
6.	???	×	22.	???	×
7.	???	×	23.	???	×
8.	???	×	24.	???	×
9.	???	×	25.	???	×
10.	???	×	26.	???	×
11.	???	×	27.	???	×
12.	???	×	28.	???	×
13.	???	×	29.	???	×
14.	???	×	30.	???	×
15.	???	×	31.	???	×
16.	???	×	32.	???	×

Set to Factory Default	Click to clear all indexes.
Index	Click the number below Index to access into the setting page of Remote Dial-in User.
User	Display the username for the specific dial-in user of the LAN-to-LAN profile. The symbol ??? represents that the profile is empty.
Status	Display the access state of the specific dial-in user. The symbol V and X represent the specific dial-in user to be active and inactive, respectively.

Click each index to edit one remote user profile. Each Dial-In Type requires you to fill the different corresponding fields on the right. If the fields gray out, it means you may leave it untouched. The following explanation will guide you to fill all the necessary fields.

Index No. 1

User account and Authentication Enable this account Idle Timeout 300 second(s) Allowed Dial-In Type ISDN PPTP IPSec Tunnel L2TP with IPSec Policy None Specify Remote Node Remote Client IP or Peer ISDN Number or Peer ID Netbios Naming Packet Pass Block Multicast via VPN Pass Block (for some IGMP,IP-Camera,DHCP Relay..etc.) Username ???? Password Enable Mobile One-Time Passwords(mOTP) PIN Code Secret IKE Authentication Method Pre-Shared Key IKE Pre-Shared Key Digital Signature(X.509) None IPSec Security Method Medium(AH) High(ESP) DES 3DES AES Local ID (optional) Callback Function Check to enable Callback function Specify the callback number Callback Number Check to enable Callback Budget Control Callback Budget 30 minute(s)

Enable this account

Check the box to enable this function.

Idle Timeout- If the dial-in user is idle over the limitation of the timer, the router will drop this connection. By default, the Idle Timeout is set to 300 seconds.

ISDN

Allow the remote ISDN dial-in connection. You can further set up Callback function below. You should set the User Name and Password of remote dial-in user below

PPTP

Allow the remote dial-in user to make a PPTP VPN connection through the Internet. You should set the User Name and Password of remote dial-in user below

IPSec Tunnel

Allow the remote dial-in user to make an IPSec VPN connection through Internet.

L2TP

Allow the remote dial-in user to make a L2TP VPN connection through the Internet. You can select to use L2TP alone or with IPSec. Select from below:

None - Do not apply the IPSec policy. Accordingly, the VPN connection employed the L2TP without IPSec policy can be viewed as one pure L2TP connection.

Nice to Have - Apply the IPSec policy first, if it is applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the dial-in VPN connection

	becomes one pure L2TP connection. Must -Specify the IPSec policy to be definitely applied on the L2TP connection.
Specify Remote Node	Check the checkbox-You can specify the IP address of the remote dial-in user, ISDN number or peer ID (used in IKE aggressive mode).
Uncheck the checkbox-This means the connection type you select above will apply the authentication methods and security methods in the general settings.
Netbios Naming Packet	Pass – click it to have an inquiry for data transmission between the hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel while connecting.Block – When there is conflict occurred between the hosts on both sides of VPN Tunnel in connecting, such function can block data transmission of Netbios Naming Packet inside the tunnel.
Multicast via VPN	Some programs might send multicast packets via VPN connection.Pass – Click this button to let multicast packets pass through the router.Block – This is default setting. Click this button to let multicast packets be blocked by the router.
User Name	This field is applicable when you select ISDN, PPTP or L2TP with or without IPSec policy above.
Password	This field is applicable when you select ISDN, PPTP or L2TP with or without IPSec policy above.
Enable Mobile One-Time Password (mOTP)	Check this box to make the authentication with mOTP function.PIN Code – Type the code for authentication (e.g, 1234).Secret – Use the 32 digit-secret number generated by mOTP in the mobile phone (e.g., e759bb6f0e94c7ab4fe6).
IKE Authentication Method	This group of fields is applicable for IPSec Tunnels and L2TP with IPSec Policy when you specify the IP address of the remote node. The only exception is Digital Signature (X.509) can be set when you select IPSec tunnel either with or without specify the IP address of the remote node.
Pre-Shared Key - Check the box of Pre-Shared Key to invoke this function and type in the required characters (1-63) as the pre-shared key.
Digital Signature (X.509) – Check the box of Digital Signature to invoke this function and Select one predefined Profiles set in the VPN and Remote Access >>IPSec Peer Identity.
IPSec Security Method	This group of fields is a must for IPSec Tunnels and L2TP with IPSec Policy when you specify the remote node. Check the Medium, DES, 3DES or AES box as the security method.Medium - Authentication Header (AH) means data will be

authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option is invoked. You can uncheck it to disable it.

High - Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) means

payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated. You may select encryption algorithm from Data Encryption Standard (DES), Triple DES (3DES), and AES.

Local ID - Specify a local ID to be used for Dial-in setting in the LAN-to-LAN Profile setup. This item is optional and can be used only in IKE aggressive mode.

Callback Function

The callback function provides a callback service only for the ISDN dial-in user. The remote user will be charged the connection fee by the telecom.

Check to enable Callback function-Enables the callback function.

Specify the callback number-The option is for extra

security. Once enabled, the router will ONLY call back to the specified Callback Number.

Check to enable callback budget control-By default, the

callback function has a time restriction. Once the callback budget has been exhausted, the callback mechanism will be disabled automatically.

Callback Budget (Unit: minutes)- Specify the time budget for the dial-in user. The budget will be decreased automatically per callback connection.

5.9.6 LAN to LAN

Here you can manage LAN-to-LAN connections by maintaining a table of connection profiles. You may set parameters including specified connection direction (dial-in or dial-out), connection peer ID, connection type (VPN connection - including PPTP, IPSec Tunnel, and L2TP by itself or over IPSec) and corresponding security methods, etc.

The router supports 2 VPN tunnels and provides up to 32 profiles simultaneously. The following figure shows the summary table.

VPN and Remote Access >> LAN to LAN

LAN-to-LAN Profiles:				Set to Factory Default
Index	Name	Status	Index	Name	Status
1.	???	×	17.	???	×
2.	???	×	18.	???	×
3.	???	×	19.	???	×
4.	???	×	20.	???	×
5.	???	×	21.	???	×
6.	???	×	22.	???	×
7.	???	×	23.	???	×
8.	???	×	24.	???	×
9.	???	×	25.	???	×
10.	???	×	26.	???	×
11.	???	×	27.	???	×
12.	???	×	28.	???	×
13.	???	×	29.	???	×
14.	???	×	30.	???	×
15.	???	×	31.	???	×
16.	???	×	32.	???	×

Set to Factory Default Click to clear all indexes.

Name Indicate the name of the LAN-to-LAN profile. The symbol ??? represents that the profile is empty.

Status Indicate the status of individual profiles. The symbol V and X represent the profile to be active and inactive, respectively.

Click each index to edit each profile and you will get the following page. Each LAN-to-LAN profile includes 4 subgroups. If the fields gray out, it means you may leave it untouched. The following explanations will guide you to fill all the necessary fields.

For the web page is too long, we divide the page into several sections for explanation.

Profile Index : 1

1. Common Settings

Profile Name ???? Enable this profile VPN Dial-Out Through WAN1 First Netbios Naming Packet ○Pass ○Block Multicast via VPN ○Pass ○Block (for some IGMP,IP-Camera,DHCP Relay..etc.) Call Direction ● Both ○ Dial-Out ○ Dial-in □ Always on Idle Timeout 300 second(s) □ Enable PING to keep alive PING to the IP

2. Dial-Out Settings

Type of Server I am calling ISDN PPTP IPSec Tunnel L2TP with IPSec Policy None Dial Number for ISDN or Server IP/Host Name for VPN. (such as 5551234, draytek.com or 123.45.67.89) Link Type 64k bps Username ???? Password PPP Authentication PAP/CHAP VJ Compression On Off IKE Authentication Method Pre-Shared Key IKE Pre-Shared Key Digital Signature(X.509) None IPSec Security Method Medium(AH) High(ESP) DES without Authentication Advanced Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: , , , , Callback Function (CBCP) Require Remote to Callback Provide ISDN Number to Remote

Profile Name

Specify a name for the profile of the LAN-to-LAN connection.

Enable this profile

Check here to activate this profile.

Netbios Naming Packet

Pass – click it to have an inquiry for data transmission between the hosts located on both sides of VPN Tunnel while connecting.

Block - When there is conflict occurred between the hosts on both sides of VPN Tunnel in connecting, such function can block data transmission of Netbios Naming Packet inside the tunnel.

VPN Dial-Out Through

Use the drop down menu to choose a proper WAN interface for this profile. This setting is useful for dial-out only.

WAN1 First - While connecting, the router will use WAN1 as the first channel for VPN connection. If WAN1 fails, the router will use another WAN interface instead.

WAN1 Only - While connecting, the router will use WAN1 as the only channel for VPN connection.

WAN2 First - While connecting, the router will use WAN2 as the first channel for VPN connection. If WAN2 fails, the router will use another WAN interface instead.

WAN2 Only - While connecting, the router will use WAN2 as the only channel for VPN connection.

Call Direction Specify the allowed call direction of this LAN-to-LAN profile.

Both:-initiator/responder

Dial-Out- initiator only

Dial-In- responder only

Always On or Idle Timeout Always On-Check to enable router always keep VPN connection.

Idle Timeout: The default value is 300 seconds. If the connection has been idled over the value, the router will drop the connection.

Enable PING to keep alive This function is to help the router to determine the status of IPSec VPN connection, especially useful in the case of abnormal VPN IPSec tunnel disruption. For details, please refer to the note below. Check to enable the transmission of PING packets to a specified IP address.

PING to the IP Enter the IP address of the remote host that located at the other-end of the VPN tunnel.

Enable PING to Keep Alive is used to handle abnormal IPSec VPN connection disruption. It will help to provide the state of a VPN connection for router's judgment of redial.

Normally, if any one of VPN peers wants to disconnect the connection, it should follow a serial of packet exchange procedure to inform each other. However, if the remote peer disconnect without notice, Vigor router will by no where to know this situation. To resolve this dilemma, by continuously sending PING packets to the remote host, the Vigor router can know the true existence of this VPN connection and react accordingly. This is independent of DPD (dead peer detection).

ISDN Build ISDN LAN-to-LAN connection to remote network. You should set up Link Type and identity like User Name

	and Password for the authentication of remote server. You can further set up Callback (CBCP) function below.
PPTP	Build a PPTP VPN connection to the server through the Internet. You should set the identity like User Name and Password below for the authentication of remote server.
IPSec Tunnel	Build an IPSec VPN connection to the server through Internet.
L2TP with IPSec Policy	Build a L2TP VPN connection through the Internet. You can select to use L2TP alone or with IPSec. Select from below:
None: Do not apply the IPSec policy. Accordingly, the VPN connection employed the L2TP without IPSec policy can be viewed as one pure L2TP connection.
Nice to Have: Apply the IPSec policy first, if it is applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the dial-out VPN connection becomes one pure L2TP connection.
Must: Specify the IPSec policy to be definitely applied on the L2TP connection.
Link Type	There are three link types provided here for different purpose. Disable disables the LAN to LAN dial-out function. 64Kbps allows you to use one channel for Internet access. 128Kbps allows you to use both channels for Internet access. BOD stands for bandwidth-on-demand. The router will use only one channel in low traffic situations. Once the single channel bandwidth is fully used, the other channel will be activated automatically through the dialup.
	Link Type
User Name	This field is applicable when you select ISDN, PPTP or L2TP with or without IPSec policy above.
Password	This field is applicable when you select ISDN, PPTP or L2TP with or without IPSec policy above.
PPP Authentication	This field is applicable when you select ISDN, PPTP or L2TP with or without IPSec policy above. PAP/CHAP is the most common selection due to wild compatibility.
VJ compression	This field is applicable when you select ISDN, PPTP or L2TP with or without IPSec policy above. VJ Compression is used for TCP/IP protocol header compression. Normally set to Yes to improve bandwidth utilization.
IKE Authentication Method	This group of fields is applicable for IPSec Tunnels and L2TP with IPSec Policy.

Pre-Shared Key - Input 1-63 characters as pre-shared key.

Digital Signature (X.509) - Select one predefined Profiles set in the VPN and Remote Access >>IPSec Peer Identity.

IPSec Security Method This group of fields is a must for IPSec Tunnels and L2TP with IPSec Policy.

Medium Medium (AH) means data will be authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option is active.

High (ESP-Encapsulating Security Payload)- means payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated. Select from below:

DES without Authentication -Use DES encryption algorithm and not apply any authentication scheme.

DES with Authentication-Use DES encryption algorithm and apply MD5 or SHA-1 authentication algorithm.

3DES without Authentication-Use triple DES encryption algorithm and not apply any authentication scheme.

3DES with Authentication-Use triple DES encryption algorithm and apply MD5 or SHA-1 authentication algorithm.

AES without Authentication-Use AES encryption algorithm and not apply any authentication scheme.

AES with Authentication-Use AES encryption algorithm and apply MD5 or SHA-1 authentication algorithm.

Advanced Specify mode, proposal and key life of each IKE phase, Gateway etc.

The window of advance setup is shown as below:

http://192.168.1.1 - IKE advanced settings - Microsoft Internet Explorer IKE advanced settings IKE phase 1 mode IKE phase 1 proposal IKE phase 2 proposal IKE phase 1 key lifetime IKE phase 2 key lifetime Perfect Forward Secret Local ID Main mode Aggressive mode DES_MD5_G1/DES_SHA1_G1/3DES_MD5_G1/3DES_MD5_G2 HMAC_SHA1/HMAC_MD5 28800 (900 ~ 86400) 3600 (600 ~ 86400) Disable Enable OK Close

IKE phase 1 mode -Select from Main mode and Aggressive mode. The ultimate outcome is to exchange security proposals to create a protected secure channel. Main mode is more secure than Aggressive mode since more exchanges are done in a secure channel to set up the IPSec session. However, the Aggressive mode is faster.

The default value in Vigor router is Main mode.

IKE phase 1 proposal-To propose the local available authentication schemes and encryption algorithms to the VPN peers, and get its feedback to find a match. Two combinations are available for Aggressive mode and nine for Main mode. We suggest you select the combination that covers the most schemes.

IKE phase 2 proposal-To propose the local available algorithms to the VPN peers, and get its feedback to find a match. Three combinations are available for both modes. We suggest you select the combination that covers the most algorithms.

IKE phase 1 key lifetime-For security reason, the lifetime of key should be defined. The default value is 28800 seconds. You may specify a value in between 900 and 86400 seconds.

IKE phase 2 key lifetime-For security reason, the lifetime of key should be defined. The default value is 3600 seconds. You may specify a value in between 600 and 86400 seconds.

Perfect Forward Secret (PFS)-The IKE Phase 1 key will be reused to avoid the computation complexity in phase 2. The default value is inactive this function.

Local ID-In Aggressive mode, Local ID is on behalf of the IP address while identity authenticating with remote VPN server. The length of the ID is limited to 47 characters.

Callback Function The callback function provides a callback service as a part of PPP suite only for the ISDN dial-in user. The router owner will be charged the connection fee by the telecom.

Require Remote to Callback-Enable this to let the router to require the remote peer to callback for the connection afterwards.

Provide ISDN Number to Remote-In the case that the remote peer requires the Vigor router to callback, the local ISDN number will be provided to the remote peer. Check here to allow the Vigor router to send the ISDN number to the remote router.

3. Dial-In Settings

Allowed Dial-In Type ✓ ISDN ✓ PPTP ✓ IPSec Tunnel ✓ L2TP with IPSec Policy None Specify ISDN CLID or Remote VPN Gateway Peer ISDN Number or Peer VPN Server IP or Peer ID Username ???? Password VJ Compression On Off IKE Authentication Method ✓ Pre-Shared Key IKE Pre-Shared Key Digital Signature(X.509) None IPSec Security Method ✓ Medium(AH) High(ESP) DES 3DES AES Callback Function (CBCP) Enable Callback Function Use the Following Number to Callback Callback Number Callback Budget 0 minute(s)

4. TCP/IP Network Settings

My WAN IP 0.0.0.0 Remote Gateway IP 0.0.0.0 Remote Network IP 0.0.0.0 Remote Network Mask 255.255.255.0 More RIP Direction Disable From first subnet to remote network, you have to do Route Change default route to this VPN tunnel ( Only single WAN supports this )

Allowed Dial-In Type Determine the dial-in connection with different types.

ISDN Allow the remote ISDN LAN-to-LAN connection. You should set the User Name and Password of remote dial-in user below. In addition, you can further set up Callback function below.

PPTP Allow the remote dial-in user to make a PPTP VPN connection through the Internet. You should set the User Name and Password of remote dial-in user below.

IPSec Tunnel Allow the remote dial-in user to trigger an IPSec VPN connection through Internet.

L2TP Allow the remote dial-in user to make a L2TP VPN connection through the Internet. You can select to use L2TP alone or with IPSec. Select from below:

None - Do not apply the IPSec policy. Accordingly, the VPN connection employed the L2TP without IPSec policy can be viewed as one pure L2TP connection.

Nice to Have - Apply the IPSec policy first, if it is applicable during negotiation. Otherwise, the dial-in VPN connection becomes one pure L2TP connection.

	Must - Specify the IPSec policy to be definitely applied on the L2TP connection.
Specify CLID or Remote VPN Gateway	You can specify the IP address of the remote dial-in user or peer ID (should be the same with the ID setting in dial-in type) by checking the box. Enter Peer ISDN number if you select ISDN above. Also, you should further specify the corresponding security methods on the right side.
If you uncheck the checkbox, the connection type you
		select above will apply the authentication methods and security methods in the general settings.
User Name	This field is applicable when you select ISDN, PPTP or L2TP with or without IPSec policy above.
Password	This field is applicable when you select ISDN, PPTP or L2TP with or without IPSec policy above.
VJ Compression	VJ Compression is used for TCP/IP protocol header compression. This field is applicable when you select ISDN, PPTP or L2TP with or without IPSec policy above.
IKE Authentication Method	This group of fields is applicable for IPSec Tunnels and L2TP with IPSec Policy when you specify the IP address of the remote node. The only exception is Digital Signature (X.509) can be set when you select IPSec tunnel either with or without specify the IP address of the remote node.
Pre-Shared Key - Check the box of Pre-Shared Key to
		invoke this function and type in the required characters (1-63) as the pre-shared key.
Digital Signature (X.509) -Check the box of Digital Signature to invoke this function and select one predefined Profiles set in the VPN and Remote Access >>IPSec Peer Identity.
IPSec Security Method	This group of fields is a must for IPSec Tunnels and L2TP with IPSec Policy when you specify the remote node.
Medium- Authentication Header (AH) means data will be authenticated, but not be encrypted. By default, this option is active.
High- Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) means payload (data) will be encrypted and authenticated. You may select encryption algorithm from Data Encryption Standard (DES), Triple DES (3DES), and AES.
Callback Function	The callback function provides a callback service only for the ISDN LAN-to-LAN connection. The remote user will be charged the connection fee by the telecom.
	Check to enable Callback function-Enables the callback function.
Callback number-The option is for extra security. Once enabled, the router will ONLY call back to the specified Callback Number.

Callback budget- By default, the callback function has

limitation of callback period. Once the callback budget is exhausted, the function will be disabled automatically.

Callback Budget (Unit: minutes)- Specify the time

budget for the dial-in user. The budget will be decreased automatically per callback connection. The default value 0 means no limitation of callback period.

My WAN IP

This field is only applicable when you select ISDN, PPTP or L2TP with or without IPSec policy above. The default value is 0.0.0.0, which means the Vigor router will get a PPP IP address from the remote router during the IPCP negotiation phase. If the PPP IP address is fixed by remote side, specify the fixed IP address here. Do not change the default value if you do not select ISDN, PPTP or L2TP.

Remote Gateway IP

This field is only applicable when you select ISDN, PPTP or L2TP with or without IPSec policy above. The default value is 0.0.0.0, which means the Vigor router will get a remote Gateway PPP IP address from the remote router during the IPCP negotiation phase. If the PPP IP address is fixed by remote side, specify the fixed IP address here. Do not change the default value if you do not select ISDN, PPTP or L2TP.

Remote Network IP/ Remote Network Mask

Add a static route to direct all traffic destined to this Remote Network IP Address/Remote Network Mask through the VPN connection. For IPSec, this is the destination clients IDs of phase 2 quick mode.

More

Add a static route to direct all traffic destined to more Remote Network IP Addresses/ Remote Network Mask through the VPN connection. This is usually used when you find there are several subnets behind the remote VPN router.

RIP Direction

The option specifies the direction of RIP (Routing Information Protocol) packets. You can enable/disable one of direction here. Herein, we provide four options: TX/RX Both, TX Only, RX Only, and Disable.

From first subnet to remote network, you have to do

If the remote network only allows you to dial in with single IP, please choose NAT, otherwise choose Route.

Change default route to this VPN tunnel

Check this box to change the default route with this VPN tunnel. Note that this setting is available only for one WAN interface is enabled. It is not available when both WAN interfaces are enabled. You have to disable one WAN interface (WAN 1 or WAN 2) on WAN >> General Setup for enabling such setting.

5.9.7 Connection Management

You can find the summary table of all VPN connections. You may disconnect any VPN connection by clicking Drop button. You may also aggressively Dial-out by using Dial-out Tool and clicking Dial button.

VPN and Remote Access >> Connection Management

Dial-out Tool Refresh Seconds : 10 Refresh Dial VPN Connection Status Current Page: 1 Page No. Go >> VPN Type Remote IP Virtual Network Tx Pkts Tx Rate (Bps) Rx Pkts Rx Rate (Bps) UpTime

xxxxxxxxx : Data is encrypted.
xxxxxxxx : Data isn't encrypted.

Dial Click this button to execute dial out function.

Refresh Seconds Choose the time for refresh the dial information among 5, 10, and 30.

Refresh Click this button to refresh the whole connection status.

5.10 Certificate Management

A digital certificate works as an electronic ID, which is issued by a certification authority (CA). It contains information such as your name, a serial number, expiration dates etc., and the digital signature of the certificate-issuing authority so that a recipient can verify that the certificate is real. Here Vigor router support digital certificates conforming to standard X.509.

Any entity wants to utilize digital certificates should first request a certificate issued by a CA server. It should also retrieve certificates of other trusted CA servers so it can authenticate the peer with certificates issued by those trusted CA servers.

Here you can manage generate and manage the local digital certificates, and set trusted CA certificates. Remember to adjust the time of Vigor router before using the certificate so that you can get the correct valid period of certificate.

Below shows the menu items for Certificate Management.

Certificate Management ► Local Certificate ► Trusted CA Certificate ► Certificate Backup

5.10.1 Local Certificate

Certificate Management >> Local Certificate

X509 Local Certificate Configuration

Name Subject Status Modify Local --- --- View Delete GENERATE IMPORT REFRESH X509 Local Certificate

Generate

Click this button to open Generate Certificate Request window.

Certificate Management >> Local Certificate

Generate Certificate Request Subject Alternative Name Type IP Address IP Subject Name Country (C) State (ST) Location (L) Organization (O) Organization Unit (OU) Common Name (CN) Email (E) Key Type RSA Key Size 1024 B

Generate

Type in all the information that the window request. Then click Generate again.

Import Click this button to import a saved file as the certification information.

Refresh Click this button to refresh the information listed below.

View Click this button to view the detailed settings for certificate request.

After clicking Generate, the generated information will be displayed on the window below:

Certificate Management >> Local Certificate

X509 Local Certificate Configuration

Name Local /C=TW/ST=HS/O=Draytek/OU=RD/... GENERATE IMPORT REFRESH X509 Local Certificate Request ----BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST---- MIIBnTCCAQYCAQAwXTELMAkGA1UEBhMCVFcxCzAJBgNVBAgTAkhTMRAwDgYDVQQK EwdEcmF5dGVrMQswCQYDVQQLEwJSRDE1MCAGCSqGSIb3DQEJARYTc3VwcG9ydEBk cmF5dGVrLmNvbTCBnzANBgkqhkiG9wOBAQEFAAOBjQAwgYkCgYEAY2ELVTVBytix OTSZZSQdw1Reltv1HnVwm/MFCOy9x+XEwNKG46jdGY1LSAvJTduHH9Oz4OMUx02G mASVORtj7HbNOdYn88p1xRrQFgk8nkblMLdAqb1Ooc/lsYN/smGb4N+Pbo4VMO1VO dKiyAPfp/Z02OWsCddxh/HzZ3Ys8m60CAwEAAaAAMA0GCSqGSIb3DQEBBQUAA4GB AGNB9071V44sgXwiWnXHJvdFLDOdcQO1ZL1XRn+OVdheJjvaISCgiqzJQCKaDQ7 nacBqEc1WOchKzESOdyDc8mtIf7k+i045SeuY7nxswXvPIOn31JMJGMZvQSVrTYu sOvJGBHHwKSKWb1RAZL5xvHjDoMX16czT1ybedZSsrJw ----END CERTIFICATE REQUEST----

5.10.2 Trusted CA Certificate

Trusted CA certificate lists three sets of trusted CA certificate.

Certificate Management >> Trusted CA Certificate

X509 Trusted CA Certificate Configuration

Name	Subject	Status	Modify
Trusted CA-1	---	---	View	Delete
Trusted CA-2	---	---	View	Delete
Trusted CA-3	---	---	View	Delete

To import a pre-saved trusted CA certificate, please click IMPORT to open the following window. Use Browse... to find out the saved text file. Then click Import. The one you imported will be listed on the Trusted CA Certificate window. Then click Import to use the pre-saved file.

Certificate Management >> Trusted CA Certificate

Import X509 Trusted CA Certificate

Select a trusted CA certificate file. Browse. Click Import to upload the certification. Import Cancel

For viewing each trusted CA certificate, click View to open the certificate detail information window. If you want to delete a CA certificate, choose the one and click Delete to remove all the certificate information.

Certificate Information - Windows Internet Explorer http://192.168.1.1/doc/XCaCfVil.htm Certificate Detail Information Certificate Name: Trusted CA-1 Issuer: Subject: Subject Alternative Name: Valid From: Valid To: Close

5.10.3 Certificate Backup

Local certificate and Trusted CA certificate for this router can be saved within one file. Please click Backup on the following screen to save them. If you want to set encryption password for these certificates, please type characters in both fields of Encrypt password and Confirm password.

Also, you can use Restore to retrieve these two settings to the router whenever you want.

Certificate Management >> Certificate Backup

Certificate Backup / Restoration

Backup

Encrypt password: ____ Confirm password: ____ Click Backup to download certificates to your local PC as a file.

Restoration

Select a backup file to restore. Browse. Decrypt password: Click Restore to upload the file.

5.11 ISDN

5.11.1 Basic Concept

ISDN means integrated services digital network that is an international communications standard for sending voice, video, and data over digital telephone lines or normal telephone wires.

Below shows the menu items for ISDN.

ISDN

▶ General Setup
▶ Dialing to a Single ISP
▶ Dialing to Dual ISPs
▶ Call Control

Data call function is supported only when ISDN2 port is configured as ISDN-TE mode. In normal case, the ISDN2 port is configured as ISDN-TE mode in default. If it is configured as ISDN-S0 mode, the data call function will not be supported and Dialing to a Single ISP, Dialing to Dual ISPs and Call Control functions will not be available.

In addition, if ISDN1 port is configured as ISDN-TE mode and ISDN2 is configured as ISDN2-S0 mode, the data call function will not be supported and Dialing to a Single ISP, Dialing to Dual ISPs and Call Control functions will not be available, either.

5.11.2 General Setup

This page provides some basic ISDN settings such as enabling the ISDN port or not, MSN numbers and blocked MSN numbers, etc.

ISDN >> General Setup

ISDN Setup

ISDN Port	Enable Disable	Blocked MSN numbers for the router
Country Code	International
D-Channel Mode		1.
		2.
ISDN1	Point-to-Point	3.
	Point-to-Multipoint	4.
ISDN2	Point-to-Point	5.
	Point-to-Multipoint
Own Number
"Own Number" means that the router will tell the remote end the ISDN number when it's placing an outgoing call.

Index	MSN numbers for the router	Answer mode	Phone CLIR/CLIP
0.		Auto Attendant	□ □
1.		Auto Attendant	□ □
2.		Auto Attendant	□ □
3.		Auto Attendant	□ □
4.		Auto Attendant	□ □
5.		Auto Attendant	□ □
6.		Auto Attendant	□ □
7.		Auto Attendant	□ □
8.		Auto Attendant	□ □
9.		Auto Attendant	□ □

ISDN Port

Click Enable to open the ISDN port and Disable to close it.

Country Code

For proper operation on your local ISDN network, you should choose the correct country code.

International International Argentina Australia Austria Bangladesh Belgium Brasil

D-Channel Mode

It allows you to configure ISDN layer2 protocol as:

Point-to-Point - Configure ISDN port to use static TEI (Terminal Endpoint Identifier).

Point-to-Multipoint - Configure ISDN port to use Dynamic TEI.

Own Number

Enter your ISDN number. Every outgoing call will carry the number to the receiver.

Blocked MSN Numbers for the router

Enter the specified MSN number into the fields to prevent the router from dialing the specific MSN number.

MSN Numbers for the Router

MSN Numbers mean that the router is able to accept only number-matched incoming calls. In addition, MSN services should be supported by local ISDN network provider. The router provides three fields for MSN numbers. Note that MSN services must be acquired from your local telecommunication operators. By default, MSN function is disabled. If you leave the fields blank, all incoming calls will be accepted without number matching.

Answer mode

Specify the way to process incoming phone calls which matched the MSN number for router.

Auto Attendant Auto Attendant Foward To Extension Foward To Group

Auto Attendant - The incoming call would be picked by router automatically. You could hear IVR voice to remind you to dial extension number you want to reach.

Forward to Extension - The incoming call would be forwarded to the extension number you setup directly.

Forward to Group - If you have setup group extension number in web page "Hunt Group", the incoming call could be forwarded to the group extension number you selected.

Phone CLIR/CLIP

Check this box to hide or present the caller ID to remote user.

Example:

Below shows an example of TE port MSN number:

Index	MSN numbers for the router	Answer mode	PhoneCLIR/CLIP
0.	5972727	Auto Attendant	☐ ☐
1.	5972728	Foward To Extension 1 - 100 Extension	☐ ☑
2.	5972729	Foward To Group 1 - 300 Group	☐ ☑
3.		Auto Attendant	☐ ☐
4.		Auto Attendant	☐ ☐
5.		Auto Attendant	☐ ☐
6.		Auto Attendant	☐ ☐
7.		Auto Attendant	☐ ☐
8.		Auto Attendant	☐ ☐
9.		Auto Attendant	☐ ☐

"MSN Numbers" means that the router is able to accept number-matched incoming calls. In addition, MSN service should be supported by the local ISDN network provider.

Refer to the following explanation:

a. If you setup "MSN numbers for the router" as the above figure, it means the Vigor router only accepts MSN numbers of 5972727 / 5972728 / 5972729.
b. If someone dials to the router with 5972727, the call would be picked up automatically. You could hear IVR voice to remind you to dial the extension number you want to reach.
c. If someone dials to the router with 5972728, the call would be forwarded to extension 100 directly.
d. If someone dials to the router with 5972729, the call would be forwarded to group extension 300.
e. If you use a phone with extension 100 to dial an ISDN call, the remote ISDN phone would see the caller ID: 5972728 (for the Phone CLIP is checked).
f. If you use any extension number included in Group extension 300 to dial an ISDN call, the remote ISDN phone would see the caller ID: 5972729 (for the Phone CLIP is checked).

5.11.3 Dial to Single ISP

Select Dialing to a Single ISP if you access the Internet via a single ISP.

ISDN >> Dialing to a Single ISP

Single ISP

ISP Access Setup ISP Name Dial Number Username Password Require ISP callback (CBCP) Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: => , , , , ,

OK

ISP Access Setup

ISP Name - Enter your ISP name such as Seednet, Hinet and so on.

Dial Number -Enter the ISDN access number provided by your ISP.

Username - Enter the username provided by your ISP.

Password - Enter the password provided by your ISP.

Require ISP Callback (CBCP) -If your ISP supports the

callback function, check this box to activate the Callback Control Protocol during the PPP negotiation.

Scheduler (1-15) - Enter the index of schedule profiles to control the Internet access according to the preconfigured schedules. Refer to section Applications>> Schedule for detailed configuration.

PPP/MP Setup

Link Type – There are three link types provided here for different purpose. Link Disable disables the ISDN dial-out function. Dialup 64Kbps allows you to use one ISDN B channel for Internet access. Dialup 128Kbps allows you to use both ISDN B channels for Internet access. Dialup BOD stands for bandwidth-on-demand. The router will use only one B channel in low traffic situations. Once the single B channel bandwidth is fully used, the other B channel will be activated automatically through the dialup. For more detailed BOD parameter settings, please refer to the section of Call Control.

PPP Authentication - PAP only allows you to configure

the PPP session to use the PAP protocol to negotiate the username and password with the ISP. PAP or CHAP is to configure the PPP session to use the PAP or CHAP protocols to negotiate the username and password with the ISP.

Idle Timeout - Idle timeout means the router will be

disconnect after being idle for a preset amount of time. The default is 180 seconds. If you set the time to 0, the ISDN connection to the ISP will always remain on.

IP Address Assignment Method (IPCP)

In most environments, you should not change these settings as most ISPs provide a dynamic IP address for the router when it connects to the ISP. If your ISP provides a fixed IP address, check Yes and enter the IP address in the field of Fixed IP Address.

5.11.4 Dial to Dual ISPs

Select Dialing to Dual ISPs if you have more than one ISP. You will be able to dial to both ISPs at the same time. This is mainly for those ISPs that do not support Multiple-Link PPP (ML-PPP). In such cases, dialing to two ISPs can increase the bandwidth utilization of the ISDN channels to 128kbps data speed.

ISDN >> Dialing to Dual ISPs

Dual ISP

Common Settings 1. □ Enable Dual ISPs Function 2. □ Require ISP callback (CBCP) PPP/MP Setup Link Type Dialup BOD PPP Authentication PAP or CHAP Idle Timeout 180 second(s)

Primary ISP Setup ISP Name Dial Number Username Password IP Address Assignment Method (IPCP) Fixed IP Yes No (Dynamic IP) Fixed IP Address Secondary ISP Setup ISP Name Dial Number Username [e-mail] Password ••••••••• IP Address Assignment Method (IPCP) Fixed IP Yes No (Dynamic IP) Fixed IP Address

OK

Common Settings

Enable Dual ISPs Function - Check to enable the Dual ISPs function. Require ISP Callback (CBCP) - If your ISP supports the callback function, check this box to activate the Callback Control Protocol during the PPP negotiation.

PPP/MP Setup

Link Type – There are three link types provided here for different purpose. Link Disable disables the ISDN dial-out function. Dialup 128Kbps allows you to use both ISDN B channels for Internet access. Dialup BOD stands for bandwidth-on-demand. The router will use only one B channel in low traffic situations. Once the single B channel bandwidth is fully used, the other B channel will be activated automatically through the dialup.

PPP Authentication - PAP only allows you to configure the PPP session to use the PAP protocol to negotiate the username and password with the ISP. PAP or CHAP can

configure the PPP session to use the PAP or CHAP protocols to negotiate the username and password with the ISP.

Idle Timeout - Idle timeout means the router will be disconnect after being idle for a preset amount of time. The default is 180 seconds. If you set the time to 0, the ISDN connection to the ISP will always remain on.

Primary ISP Setup ISP Name - Enter your ISP name.

Dial Number -Enter the ISDN access number provided by your ISP.

Username - Enter the username provided by your ISP.

Password - Enter the password provided by your ISP.

IP Address Assignment Method (IPCP) for primary ISP setup In most environments, you should not change these settings as most ISPs provide a dynamic IP address for the router when it connects to the ISP. If your ISP provides a fixed IP address, check Yes and enter the IP address in the field of Fixed IP Address.

Secondary ISP Setup) ISP Name - Enter the secondary ISP name.

Dial Number -Enter the ISDN access number provided by the ISP.

Username - Enter the username provided by your ISP.

Password - Enter the password provided by your ISP.

IP Address Assignment Method (IPCP) for secondary ISP setup In most environments, you should not change these settings as most ISPs provide a dynamic IP address for the router when it connects to the ISP. If your ISP provides a fixed IP address, check Yes and enter the IP address in the field of Fixed IP Address.

5.11.5 Call Control

Some applications require that the router be remotely activated, or be able to dial up to the ISP via the ISDN interface. Vigor routers provide this feature by allowing user to make a phone call to the router and then ask it to dial up to the ISP. Accordingly, a teleworker can access the remote network to retrieve resources. Of course, a fixed IP address is required for WAN connection and some internal network resource has to be exposed for remote users, such as FTP, and WWW.

ISDN >> Call Control

Call Control Setup

Dial Retry	0 times	Remote Activation
Dial Delay Interval	0 second(s)

PPP/MP Dial-Out Setup

Basic Setup		Bandwidth On Demand (BOD) Setup
Link Type	Dialup BOD	High Water Mark	7000 cps
PPP Authentication	PAP or CHAP	High Water Time	30 second(s)
TCP Header Compression	None	Low Water Mark	6000 cps
Idle Timeout	180 second(s)	Low Water Time	30 second(s)

Call Control Setup

Dial Retry - It specifies the dial retry counts per triggered packet. A triggered packet is the packet whose destination is outside the local network. The default setting is no dial retry. If set to 5, for each triggered packet, the router will dial 5 times until it is connected to the ISP or remote access router.

Dial Delay Interval - It specifies the interval between dialup retries. By default, the interval is 0 second.

Remote Activation – It can help users who would like to access the server which is off the Internet in the head office. To remotely make the server to be available on the Internet, i.e. make the router in the head office activating its Internet access either by dialing-up or starting broadband connection, users can make a regular phone call (the number is set in the Remote Activation field) to the router as signaling it for activation. The phone call will be soon disconnected once the router is on line.

Note that Dialing to a Single ISP should be pre-configured properly.

Basic Setup

Link Type - Because ISDN has two B channels (64Kbps/per channel), you can specify whether you would like to have single B channel, two B channels or BOD (Bandwidth on Demand). Four options are available: Link Disable, Dialup 64Kbps, Dialup 128Kbps, Dialup BOD.

Link Type

Dialup BOD Link Disable Dialup 64Kbps Dialup 128Kbps Dialup BOD

PPP Authentication - It specifies the PPP authentication method for PPP/MP connections. Normally you can set it to PAP/CHAP for better compatibility.

TCP Header Compression - VJ Compression: It is used for TCP/IP protocol header compression. Normally it is set to Yes to improve bandwidth utilization.

Idle Timeout - Because our IDSN link type is Dial On Demand, the connection will be initiated only when needed.

Bandwidth-On-Demand (BOD) Setup Bandwidth-On-Demand is for Multiple-Link PPP \ML-PPP or MP). The parameters are only applied when you set the Link Type to Dialup BOD. The ISDN usually use one B channel to access the Internet or remote network when you choose the Dialup BOD link type. The router will use the parameters here to decide on when you activate/drop the additional B channel. Note that cps (characters-per-second) measures the total link utilization.

High Water Mark and High Water Time - These parameters specify the situation in which the second channel will be activated. With the first connected channel, if its utilization exceeds the High Water Mark and such a channel is being used over the High Water Time, the additional channel will be activated. Thus, the total link speed will be 128kbps (two B channels).

Low Water Mark and Low Water Time - These parameters specify the situation in which the second channel will be dropped. In terms of the two B channels, if their utilization is under the Low Water Mark and these two channels are being used over the High Water Time, the additional channel will be dropped. As a result, the total link speed will be 64kbps (one B channel).

5.12 IP PBX

IP PBX (IP -Private Branch eXchange) is a private telephone network used within an enterprise. Users of the PBX can share a certain number of outside lines for making telephone calls external to the PBX.

IP PBX integrates the benefits of VoIP and transfers the message from IP phone into the data that can be accepted by traditional PBX through IP network. It is a new platform that enterprises can use data network to deliver voice. Additionally, to move the IP phone set(s), users just need to plug into another network connector. Such thing simplifies the procedure of moving, increasing, changing and deleting phone settings; also it can join with other system such as CALL center to be a multi-functional communication platform. Moreover, it can save large cost in communication for the enterprise.

This menu can assist users to configure most of settings in IP PBX.

Below shows menu items for IP PBX:

IP PBX ► Extension ► Line Setting ► Dial Plan ► PBX System ► PBX Status

5.12.1 Extension

The system allows you to set 50 extension numbers for ISDN/SIP/Phone call. Please open IP PBX>>Extension to get the following page.

IP PBX >> Extension

Internal Phone Extension

Index	Ext.	Name	Email Address	Outgoing Call	Status
1.	---	---			x
2.	---	---			x
3.	---	---			x
4.	---	---			x
5.	---	---			x
6.	---	---			x
7.	---	---			x
8.	---	---			x
9.	---	---			x
10.	---	---			x

There are 50 extension profiles that you can configure. Please click any number under Index to set detailed configuration.

Internal Phone Extension Index 1

Internal Phone Extension Active Enable Disable Allow Registration from WAN VPN Type SIP Extension Number --- Display Name --- Authentication Use Display Name as authentication ID Password Enable PPTP VPN Dial-In for this Number/Password E-mail Address Send a test e-mail Voice mail Password MWI Notify User who Subscribed Force Notify User Outgoing Call Use SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 ISDN2-TE PSTN Answer Mode No answer after 60 sec then Keep Ring Busy then Do Nothing Not on-line Do Nothing

Internal Phone Extension Active

Allow Registration from

Click Enable to invoke such profile.

If Disable registration from WAN in IP PBX >> PBX System >> SIP Proxy Setting page is unchecked, there are two options offered here (WAN / VPN) for extension registration.

For getting the highest network security, please check VPN only.

In addition, refer to section 3.14 How to enhance the security for extensions' registration for detailed information.

Type

Determine the type for such extension profile.

SIP – Choose this type to make such extension profile available for general IP phone.

ISDN – Choose this type to make such extension profile available for ISDN phone call.

Extension Number

Type the number of extension for such index.

Display Name	Type a name as a display for this extension profile.
Authentication	Check this box to make the IP PBX executing authentication while the number is dialed.Use Display Name as authentication ID - Check this box to use the Display Name as the authentication ID for such extension profile.
Password	Type a number for the IP PBX to execute authentication.When an IP phone connects to network, IP PBX will use such password for authentication.Enable PPTP VPN Dial-In for this Number /Password -Check this box to enable remote user can use this account setting as PPTP remote dial-in authentication account.
E-mail Address	Type an e-mail address to receive media (voice) file sent by incoming calls.Send a test e-mail: Click this button to send a test e-mail to the mail box you typed here.
Voice Mail Password	Type a password here. When the user want to listen the voice mail, he/she muse use such password to open it.
MWI (Message Waiting Indicator)	There are two types of MWI for users to choose. Please click the one according to the real application.
Notify User who Subscribed - The user needs to send outSUBSCRIBE message first. When IPPBX detects new voice message from some extension number or the condition of the voice message is changed, it will transfer “NOTIFY” message to the users within the valid time subscribed.Force Notify User- The user does not send out SUBSCRIBE message automatically. The IPPBX will deliver “NOTIFY” message to the users if there is a new message or the user registers on IPPBX again.
Outgoing Call Use	There are six outside lines (SIP accounts) and two ISDN lines (available based on the Phone Setting configuration) and one PSTN for you to specify for such extension. Please check the one(s) you want.
Answer Mode	Specify the way to process incoming phone calls.No answer after ...... - When the incoming phone call is not picked up, it will be processed by keeping ringing, leaving voice mail, forwarding to certain extension or group, or forwarding a PSTN or mobile via SIP Trunk. Please specify the waiting time and determine the way you want to process.

Busy then – When this extension number is busy, the incoming phone call will be processed by leaving voice mail,

forwarding to certain extension or group, or forwarding to SIP Trunk. Please determine the way you want to process.

Do Nothing Do Nothing Voice Mail Forward To Extension Forward To Group Forward To SIP Trunk

Not on-line – When this extension number is not online, the

incoming phone call will be processed by leaving voice mail, forwarding to certain extension or group, or forwarding to SIP Trunk. Please determine the way you want to process.

Do Nothing Do Nothing Voice Mail Forward To Extension Forward To Group Forward To SIP Trunk

Forward To SIP Trunk

If you choose Forward To SIP Trunk as the Answer Mode setting, you have to specify one of the SIP Trunk numbers (from 001 to 006) and type an external number in the field of dial to. Later, the internal phone calls will be transferred to such specified external number if they match the conditions of such profile.

Busy then Do Nothing Not on-line Forward To SIP Trunk Forward To SIP Trunk 1 - 001 and dial to 1 - 001 2 - 002 3 - 003 4 - 004 5 - 005 6 - 006 OK C

Note: The fiftieth extension profile is dedicated to Phone type.

49.	903	ISDN Phone1		SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 ISDN2-TE	v
50.	901	Phone		SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 ISDN2-TE	v
<< 1-10 | 11-20 | 21-30 | 31-40 | 41-50 >>					<< Back

In such page, you can configure settings to fit real requirement except for display name, type, authentication, password and not on-line.

Internal Phone Extension Index 50

Internal Phone Extension Active Enable Disable Allow Registration from WAN VPN Type Phone Extension Number 901 Display Name Phone Authentication Use Display Name as authentication ID Password Enable PPTP VPN Dial-In for this Number/Password E-mail Address Send a test e-mail Voice mail Password MWI Notify User who Subscribed Force Notify User Outgoing Call Use SIP1 SIP2 SIP3 SIP4 SIP5 SIP6 ISDN2-TE PSTN Answer Mode No answer after 60 sec then Keep Ring Busy then Do Nothing Not on-line Do Nothing

5.12.2 Line Setting

There are six SIP outside lines and one ISDN line provided by this IP PBX device. Users can set them respectively from SIP Trunk and ISDN Trunk.

IP PBX >> Line Setting

Line Setting

SIP Trunk

ISDN Trunk

PSTN Trunk

DID (Direct Inward Dialing) is a service provided by SIP providers. It allows one main SIP account (SIP Trunk) attached with several sub-accounts (defined in Alias List under SIP Trunk). When the main accounts have been registered on VigorIPPBX 2820, it means the router owns these sub-accounts at the same time. That is, people can dial main SIP accounts or sub-accounts via VigorIPPBX 2820.

5.12.2.1 SIP Trunk

This page allows you to set profiles for 6 SIP outside lines (main account) at one time with 50 alias names (sub account).

IP PBX >> SIP Trunk List

Index	Profile Name	Domain/Realm	Proxy	Account Number/Name	Trunk Number	Status
1.					001	-
2.					002	-
3.					003	-
4.					004	-
5.					005	-
6.					006	-

R: Success registered on SIP server

-:Fail to register on SIP server

Alias List

Profile Name	Display the name for such main account.
Domain/Realm	Display domain name or IP address of the SIP Registrar server.
Proxy	Display the domain name or IP address of SIP proxy server.
Account Number/Name	Display the account name of SIP Address.
Trunk Number	Display the short number for such account.
Status	Display current status for the account (successful registration or failed registration).
Alias List	Allows you to set sub accounts for the main accounts in SIP Trunk.

Please click any number under Index to set detailed configuration.

SIP Trunk Index 1

Profile Name		(11 char max.)
Register via	Auto	□ Call without Registration
SIP Local Port	5070
Domain/Reallm		(63 char max.)
Proxy		(63 char max.)
Proxy Port	5060
Display Name		(23 char max.)
Account Number/Name		(63 char max.)
□ Authentication ID		(63 char max.)
Password		(63 char max.)
Expiry Time	1 hour	3600 sec
Trunk number	001	(3 char max.)
Out-going call CLI	Main number
	Alias number
Office hours answer mode	Auto Attendant
Non-Office hours answer mode	Auto Attendant

Note: SIP Local Port can not be equal to PBX Proxy Port.

OK

Cancel

Profile Name

Assign a name for this profile for identifying. You can type similar name with the domain. For example, if the domain name is draytel.org, then you might set draytel-1 in this field.

Register via

If you want to make VoIP call without register personal information, please choose None and check the box to achieve the goal. Some SIP server allows user to use VoIP function without registering. Choosing Auto is recommended. The system will select a proper way for your VoIP call.

SIP Port

Set the port number for sending/receiving SIP message for building a session. The default value is 6060. Your peer must set the same value in his/her Registrar.

Domain/Realm

Set the domain name or IP address of the SIP Registrar server.

Proxy

Set domain name or IP address of SIP proxy server. By the time you can type :port number after the domain name to specify that port as the destination of data transmission (e.g., nat.draytel.org:5065)

Proxy Port

Set port number for the proxy server.

Display Name

The caller-ID that you want to be displayed on your friend's screen.

Account Number/Name	Enter your account name of SIP Address, e.g. every text before @..
Authentication ID	Check the box to invoke this function and enter the name or number used for SIP Authorization with SIP Registrar. If this setting value is the same as Account Name, it is not necessary for you to check the box and set any value in this field.
Password	The password provided to you when you registered with a SIP service.
Expiry Time	It is the time duration that your SIP Registrar server keeps your registration record. Before the time expires, the router will send another register request to SIP Registrar again.
Trunk Number	There are two ways to dial outside lines for an extension number. First, dial a short number and wait for a while. When dial tone appears, please dial the real outside line number. Second, dial a short number and then the real outside line number without waiting for dial tone. The short number is defined here as Trunk Number.
Out-going call CLI	Determine which phone number will be shown to the remote end.Main number – Choose this item to display the SIP trunk number.Alias number – Choose this item to display the alias phone number, that is, the sub account.
Office hours answer mode	Set the answering mode for such outside line in office time. You can specify it with Auto Attendant (AA), or forward it to any Extension or Group directly.
Non-office hours answer mode	Set the answering mode for such outside line in non-office time. You can specify it with Auto Attendant (AA), or forward it to any Extension or Group directly.

Alias List

Click the Alias List link to access into the configuration page as shown below.

IP PBX >> Alias

Alias List

Index	Profile Name	Number	Office Hours	Non Office Hours	Active	Trunk
1.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
2.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
3.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
4.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
5.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
6.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
7.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
8.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
9.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No
10.			Auto Attendant	Auto Attendant	No

<< 1-10 | 11-20 | 21-30 | 31-40 | 41-50 >>

Next >>

Profile Name Display the alias name for such sub account.

Number Display the phone number of such account.

Office Hours Display the selected answer mode for office hours.

Non Office Hours Display the selected answer mode for non office hours.

Active Display current activation status for such account, enabled or disabled.

Trunk Display the SIP Trunk for such sub account attached.

You can set 50 profiles as alias for SIP Trunk list. Click the number under Index to set detailed configuration.

IP PBX >> Alias

Alias 1.

Active	Enable	Disable
Alias Name
Alias Number
Alias of SIP Trunk	1 - ???
Out-going call CLI	Main number
	Alias number
Answer Mode
Office hours answer mode	Auto Attendant
Non-Office hours answer mode	Auto Attendant

OK Clear Cancel

Active

Click Enable to activate this entry. Or, click Disable to inactive this entry.

Alias

Type a name for such account.

Alias Number	Type a number for such account.
Alias of SIP Trunk	Choose one of the items listed in SIP Trunk List for this alias profile.
Out-going call CLI	Determine which phone number will be shown to the remote end.Main number – Choose this item to display the SIP trunk number.Alias number – Choose this item to display the alias phone number, that is, the sub account.
Office hours answer mode	Set the answering mode for such outside line in office time. You can specify it with Auto Attendant (AA), or forward it to any Extension or Group directly.
Non-office hours answer mode	Set the answering mode for such outside line in non-office time. You can specify it with Auto Attendant (AA), or forward it to any Extension or Group directly.

5.12.2.2 ISDN Trunk

This page allows you to set profile for ISDN outside line.

IP PBX >> ISDN Trunk

ISDN Trunk

ISDN 1 Trunk Number

ISDN 2 Trunk Number

Office hours answer mode

Non-Office hours answer mode

ISDN Trunk Auto Hunt

903 904 Auto Attendant Auto Attendant 666

OK

Cancel

ISDN 1 Trunk Number Set the trunk number for extension to access when they want to make ISDN calls via this port.

ISDN 2 Trunk Number Set the trunk number for extensions to access when they want to make ISDN calls via this port.

Note: When this field grayed out and can not set the number, it means the port is set as ISDN-S0 type. Therefore, it can not be used as ISDN Trunk port. If you want to use this port as ISDN Trunk, please go to

Office hours answer mode

IPPBX>PBX System> Phone Setting page to change the port type.

Set the answering mode for such outside line in office time. You can specify it with Auto Attendant (AA), or forward it to any Extension or Group directly.

Auto Attendant Auto Attendant Foward To Extension Foward To Group

Non-office hours answer mode

Set the answering mode for such outside line in non-office time. You can specify it with Auto Attendant, or forward it to any Extension or Group directly.

Auto Attendant Auto Attendant Foward To Extension Foward To Group

ISDN Trunk Auto Hunt

When both ISDN ports set to TE mode, you can specify an auto hunt number. When people want to dialing to I SDN network via this number by using extension, the router will auto hunt an available line for it.

5.12.2.3 PSTN Trunk

This page allows you to set profile for PSTN line.

IP PBX >> PSTN Trunk

PSTN Trunk

Trunk Number 902 (7 digits max.) Office hours answer mode Auto Attendant Non-Office hours answer mode Auto Attendant Off-Net PIN Code: Enable Disable 0000 On-Net PIN Code: Enable Disable 0000 Disconnect PSTN Trunk: Disconnect

Trunk Number

Type the PSTN Trunk number in this field. When an extension wants to access the PSTN trunk, it needs to dial the trunk number, just like you dial 0 to access trunk line in normal PBX system.

Office hours answer mode

Set the answering mode for such outside line in office time. You can specify it with Auto Attendant (AA), or forward it to any Extension or Group directly.

Auto Attendant Auto Attendant Foward To Extension Foward To Group

Non-office hours answer mode

Set the answering mode for such outside line in non-office time. You can specify it with Auto Attendant, or forward it to any Extension or Group directly.

Auto Attendant Auto Attendant Foward To Extension Foward To Group

Off-Net Pin Code

If a user needs to do off-net (from VoIP to PSTN) call, he has to input the PIN code number to do the authentication for checking if the call is off-net or not. Select Enable and type the number as a Pin Code.

On-Net PIN Code

If a user needs to do on-net (from PSTN to VoIP) call, he has to input the PIN code number to do the authentication for checking if the call is on-net or not. Select Enable and type the number as a Pin Code.

Disconnect PSTN Trunk

Press this button to disconnect PSTN trunk when FXO seize the line and no way to release it.

5.12.3 Dial Plan

IP PBX >> Dial Plan

Dial Plan Configuration

Digit Map

Phone Book

Call Barring

5.12.3.1 Digit Map

For the convenience of user, this page allows users to edit prefix number for the SIP account with adding number, stripping number or replacing number. It is used to help user having a quick and easy way to dial out through VoIP interface.

IP PBX >> DialPlan Setup

Digit Map Setup

#	Enable	Match Prefix	Mode	OP Number	Min Len	Max Len	Route	Backup Route
1		886	Replace	86	0	0	ISDN2-TE	None
2			None		0	0	ISDN2-TE	None
3			None		0	0	ISDN2-TE	None
4			Add		0	0	ISDN2-TE	None
5			Strip		0	0	ISDN2-TE	None
6			None		0	0	ISDN2-TE	None
7			None		0	0	ISDN2-TE	None

18		None		0	0	ISDN2-TE	None
19		None		0	0	ISDN2-TE	None
20		None		0	0	ISDN2-TE	None

Note: 1. The length for Min Len and Max Len fields should be between 0\~25.
2. Wildcard '?' is supported.
Tips for One stage dialing for trunk line:
1. Set the mode to "Strip".
2. Let the OP number and Prefix number be the same.
3. Set a suitable range for the length fields.
4. Select a specific route for this rule.
For example, set op number and prefix number to 1, and set the route to VoIP1. When an extension dial "12345", PBX will dial "2345" to the route of VoIP1.
5. Backup route will trigger when defalut route not registered or receive fail response.

Enable

Check this box to invoke this setting.

Match Prefix

It is used to match with the number you dialed and can be modified with the OP Number by the mode (add, strip or replace).

Mode

None - No action.

Add - When you choose this mode, the OP number will be

added before the prefix number for calling out through the specific route.

Strip - When you choose this mode, partial or the whole

prefix number will be deleted according to the OP number. Take the above picture (Prefix Table Setup web page) as an example, the OP number of 886 will be deleted completely for the prefix number is set with 886.

Replace - When you choose this mode, the OP number will be replaced by the prefix number for calling out through the specific VoIP interface. Take the above picture (Prefix Table Setup web page) as an example, the prefix number of 03 will be replaced by 8863. For example: dial number of "031111111" will be changed to "88631111111" and sent to SIP server.

Mode

OP Number

The front number you type here is the first part of the account number that you want to execute special function (according to the chosen mode) by using the prefix number.

Min Len

Set the minimal length of the dial number for applying the prefix number settings. Take the above picture (Prefix Table Setup web page) as an example, if the dial number is between 7 and 9, that number can apply the prefix number settings here.

Max Len

Set the maximum length of the dial number for applying the prefix number settings.

Route

Choose the one that you want to enable the match prefix settings from the saved SIP accounts. Please set up one SIP account first to make this route available. This item will be changed according to the port settings configured in IP PBX>>PBX System>>Phone Settings and IP PBX>>Line Settings>>SIP Trunk.

IP PBX >> PBX System

Phone List

Index	Port	Call Feature	Codec	T
1	Phone	CW,CT,	G.729A/B	U De
2	ISDN1-S0		G.729A/B	U De
3	ISDN2-TE		G.729A/B	U De

Account nber/Name	Trunk Number	Status
	001	-
	002	-
	003	-
	004	-
	005	-
	006	-

Backup Route

It will be triggered when the original route is not registered or receives failed response.

Backup Route None None ISDN2-TE VoIP1 VoIP2 VoIP3 VoIP4 VoIP5 VoIP6

5.12.3.2 Phone Book

In this section, you can set your VoIP contacts in the “phonebook”. It can help you to make calls quickly and easily by using Speed Dial Number. There are total 20 index entries in the phonebook for you to store all your friends and family members’ phone numbers.

IP PBX >> Phone Book Setup

Phone Book Setup

#	Enable	Speed Dial Number	Phone Number	Route
1				VolP1
2				VolP1
3				VolP2
4				VolP3
5				VolP4
6				VolP5
7				VolP6
8				VolP1
9				VolP1
10				VolP1
11				VolP1
12				VolP1
13				VolP1
14				VolP1
15				VolP1
16				VolP1
17				VolP1
18				VolP1
19				VolP1
20				VolP1

Enable

Check the box to enable the entry.

Speed Dial Number

Type the digit number (maximum 6) in this field which can dial to the client with the phone number specified later.

Phone Number

Type the complete phone number (maximum 19) for the client that you want to dial out.

Route

Choose the interface (from VoIP 1 to VoIP 6) for the phone call to dial out.

5.12.3.3 Call Barring

Call barring is used to block phone calls coming from the one that is not welcomed.

IP PBX >> DialPlan Setup

Call Barring Setup				Set to Factory Default
Index	Call Direction	Barring Type	Barring Number/URL/URI	Route	Schedule	Status
1.						x
2.						x
3.						x
4.						x
5.						x
6.						x
7.						x
8.						x
9.						x
10.						x

Advanced: Block Anonymous Block Unknown Domain

Click any index number to display the dial plan setup page.

IP PBX >> DialPlan Setup

Call Barring Index No. 1
Enable
Call Direction	IN
Apply To	All
Barring Type	Specific URI/URL
Specific URI/URL
Interface	1-???
Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup

Enable

Click this to enable this entry.

Call Direction

Determine the direction for the phone call, IN – incoming call, OUT-outgoing call, IN & OUT – both incoming and outgoing calls.

Apply To

Call barring can be applied to specific extension number (set in IP PBX >>Extension) or group (IP PBX >>PBX System >>Hunt Group) respectively or applied to all of extensions/groups completely.

Extension 1 - --- Extension Specific URI/URL Group 1 - ???? Group Specific URI/URL

Barring Type

Determine the type of the VoIP phone call, URI/URL or number. It will bring out different setting options.

Specific Number/Specific URI/URL

This field will be changed based on the type you selected for barring Type. Please type numbers or URI/URL

Interface

"All" means all the phone calls (including ISDN1/2 & SIP) will be blocked with such mechanism. Or you can specify certain port (set in IP PBX>>Line Setting>>SIP Trunk) to be blocked by choosing from the drop down list.

Index (1-15) in Schedule

Enter the index of schedule profiles to control the call barring according to the preconfigured schedules. Refer to section Application >>Schedule for detailed configuration.

Additionally, you can set advanced settings for call barring such as Block Anonymous or Block Unknown Domain. Simply click the relational links to open the web page.

For Block Anonymous – this function can block the incoming calls without caller ID on the interface specified in the following window. Such controlling also can be done based on preconfigured schedules.

IP PBX >> DialPlan Setup

Call Barring Block Anonymous

Enable Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup

Note: Block the incoming calls which do not have the caller ID.

For Block Unknown Domain – this function can block incoming calls from unrecognized domain that is not specified in SIP accounts. Such controlling also can be done based on preconfigured schedules.

IP PBX >> DialPlan Setup

Call Barring Block Unknown Domain

Enable

Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup

Note: If the domain of the incoming call is different from the domain found in SIP accounts, the call should be blocked.

OK

Cancel

5.12.4 PBX System

This page allows you to set relational (advanced) settings for PBX

IP PBX >> PBX System

PBX System

SIP Proxy Setting

Hunt Group

Voice Mail Configuration

Office Hours

Auto Attendant Wizard

Prompt Maintenance

Phone Setting

SIP Trunk and Extension Configuration Backup

5.12.4.1 SIP Proxy Setting

To make the IP phone to be registered in IP PBX device successfully, it is necessary for the users to configure settings in this page.

IP PBX >> PBX System

SIP Proxy Setting

SIP Local Port

5060

SIP Proxy Realm

PBX.com

Parking Server Number

777

Call Pickup Number

-1

RTP Local Port Start

15050

RTP Local Port End

20000

√ Disable registration from WAN

□ Limit SIP Request WAN

Request/Sec (Range: 0\~64)

Note1: The Call Pickup Number used for both specific number pickup and group pickup.

Note2: If "Disable registration from WAN" option is selected, you can still enable certain extensions to register from WAN/VPN on individual extension profile page.

Cancel

SIP Local Port

Set a port number as SIP local port. The default setting is

	5060.
SIP Proxy Realm	Type SIP service domain name. In full SIP URI, such is the part after @ symbol.
Parking Server Number	This number is used to communicate with the parking server and invoke the parking function. The default setting number is “777”.1. When you receive a phone call and need to go to the remote end to talk with the same caller, you have to hold the phone call and transfer the call to this number from VoIP phone set.2. The parking sever will give you another voice number (e.g., your parking number is XXXX).Please remember it and hang up the phone set.3. Next, use another phone set in remote end to communicate with that caller again by dialing the voice number (XXXX).
Call Pickup Number	Press the number specified here to pickup a call which is ringing on another extension. For specific extension pickup, press 'pickup number' + 'extension number' + #; for group pickup, just press 'pickup number' + #.For example, pickup number is *1 and 101 ~ 105 are set in the same hunt group. When an incoming call rings extension 101; the extension 102~105 can just dial *1# to pickup the call. However, if the extension 106 wants to pickup that call, it needs to dial *1101#.
RTP Local Port Start/RTP Local Port End	If your VoIP service provider gave you such information, please type the port number for RTP traffic. Otherwise, keep the default setting. For one port number used, type the same port number in RTP Local Port Start and RTP Local Port End fields. To set a range for port numbers type different port numbers in RTP Local Port Start and RTP Local Port End fields.
Disable registration from WAN	Check this box to disable the SIP account registration from WAN side. It can prevent unauthorized users to use your system.If this option is selected, you can still enable certain extensions to register from WAN/VPN on individual extension profile page.
Limit SIP Request WAN	Choose this item to restrict number of SIP request per second from WAN side.

5.12.4.2 Hunt Group

This page allows you to make several extension numbers under certain group. Thus, when a phone call incomes, all the extension numbers under such group will ring.

IP PBX >> PBX System

Hunt Group

Index	Group Name	Group Extension	Hunt List (Max 20 Extension)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Index

You can set 10 groups for using in different conditions. Simply click the number under Index to specify detailed information.

Group Name

Display the name of such group.

Group Extension

Display the extension number of such group.

Hunt List

Display the members inside the group.

Click any index number to display the hunt group setup page.

Hunt Groups Index 1

Hunt Group Name Hunt Group Extension Hunt Rule Simultaneously Timeout 60 Seconds (MUST greater than 10 seconds) Overflow Rule Terminate

Hunt List (Maximum Of Group Member:20)

Available 32 - --- 33 - --- 34 - --- 35 - --- 36 - --- 37 - --- 38 - --- 39 - --- 40 - --- 41 - --- 42 - --- 43 - --- 44 - --- 45 - --- 46 - --- 47 - --- 48 - --- 49 - 903 50 - 901 Add >> Add All Remove << Remove All Move Up Move Down

Hunt Group Name Type suitable name for such group.

Hunt Group Extension Type extension number for such group.

Hunt Rule Use the drop down menu to choose rule for such group.

Simultaneously - Choose such rule can make all the phones in the groups ring while receiving incoming calls.

Sequentially - Choose such rule can make all the phones in the groups ring one by one while receiving incoming calls.

Timeout Set the timeout for such group. The default setting is 60 seconds. After timeout, the system will execute overflow rule selected below.

Overflow Rule When the hunt group does not have any response to an incoming call, the call will be processed with the way chosen here such as being terminated, keeping ringing, forwarding to certain group, forwarding to certain extension or leaving voice mail and so one. If you choose Forward to Group or Forward to Extension, a drop down box will appear for you to choose the extension / group to transfer to.

Terminate

Terminate

Keep Ringing

Forward to Group

Forward To Extension

Voice Mail

Add>>	Click this button to move the selected item in Available area to Chosen area.
Add All	Click this button to move all of the items in Available area to Chosen area.
Remove<<	Click this button to move the selected item in Chosen area to Available area.
Remove All	Click this button to clear all of the selections in Chosen area.
Move Up	Click this button to move the selected item to the upper place.
Move Down	Click this button to move the selected item to the lower place.

5.12.4.3 Voice Mail Configuration

This page allows users to set actions for voices mails.

IP PBX >> PBX System

Voice Mail Configuration

Extension for checking messages 888 (20 ~ 65535) Send Voice Message by Email Delete Voice Message after Sending Mail Day for keeping voice mail 3 (1~7) Maximum messages time 30 Sec Mail Voice-Mail Setup SMTP Server SMTP Port 25 Authentication User Name Password

Extension for checking messages

Send Voice Message by Email

The number specified here is used for the user to listen personal voice mail from IP PBX device.

IP PBX can send the voice mail to the specified e-mail address for the incoming call if you check this box.

Delete Voice Message after Sending Mail - IP PBX can send the voice mail to the specified e-mail address for the incoming call directly and delete the temporary file in IP PBX if you check this box.

Days for keeping voice mail

Type the days for keeping each voice mail.

Maximum message time

Type the recording length for each voice mail.

SMTP Server

Type IP address or domain name for the server specified for receiving voice messages.

SMTP Port

Type the port number for the server. The default value is 25.

Authentication

Check this box to authenticate the mail server.

User Name

Type a name for IP PBX to authenticate the mail server automatically while connecting.

Password

Type a password for IP PBX to authenticate the mail server automatically while connecting.

5.12.4.4 Office Hours

You can set ten groups of office hours including starting point, ending point on duty day(s).

IP PBX >> PBX System

Office Hours

Index Enable		Office Hour Start (HHMM)		Office Hour End (HHMM)		Weekdays
1		02	25	04	25
2		00	00	00	00
3		00	00	00	00
4		00	00	00	00
5		00	00	00	00
6		00	00	00	00
7		00	00	00	00
8		00	00	00	00
9		00	00	00	00
10		00	00	00	00

Holiday Setting

Month	Date
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Office Hour Start

Use the drop down menu to choose the time as the starting point.

Office Hour End

Use the drop down menu to choose the time as the ending point.

Weekdays

Check the day(s) to apply the office hour for that index.

Date

Specify date(s) for applying the office hour settings in holiday, for example, type 2,4 6 & 7 in the field of Date for Month 1. It means January 2,4,6 & 7 will apply the office hour settings configured in this page.

5.12.4.5 Auto Attendant Wizard

The first page is configured for phone calls in office hours.

IP PBX >> PBX System

Auto Attendant Wizard - Office Hours

graph LR
    A["Caller calls Auto Attendant"] --> B["Auto Attendant answers the call, plays office hours greeting (prompt 5), and waits for caller input"]
    B --> C["Key"]
    C --> D["Action"]
    D --> E["0 Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    D --> F["1 Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    D --> G["2 Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    D --> H["3 Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    D --> I["4 Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    D --> J["5 Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    D --> K["6 Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    D --> L["7 Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    D --> M["8 Ring Extension 1 - 101"]
    D --> N["9 Ring Extension 1 - 101"]

Click Next. The second page is configured for phone calls in non-office hours.

IP PBX >> PBX System

Auto Attendant Wizard - Non-Office Hours

graph LR
    A["Caller calls Auto Attendant"] --> B["Auto Attendant answers the call, plays non-office hours greeting (prompt 6), and waits for caller input"]
    B --> C["Key"]
    C --> D["Action"]
    D --> E["0"]
    D --> F["1"]
    D --> G["2"]
    D --> H["3"]
    D --> I["4"]
    D --> J["5"]
    D --> K["6"]
    D --> L["7"]
    D --> M["8"]
    D --> N["9"]

Key 0-9

Key 0 is fixed with Ring Extension.

Key 1 - 9 can be set with different actions.

Action

Drop down menu 1 contains Ring Extension /Plays Prompt/Ring Hunt Group/Not Used.

Ring Extension Ring Extension Plays Prompt Ring Hunt Group Not Used

Ring Extension - Only the extension number selected here will ring.

Plays Prompt - Audio file will be played automatically.

Ring Hunt Group - Only the extension number within the Hunt Group will ring.

Not Used – Nothing will be done for the key.

Drop down menu 2 contains extension name (ex. Tom,

Mike)] or prompt [Prompt 1\~ Prompt 10, audio files] or Hunt Group Name [(ex. Sales, RD2)]. It will be changed according to drop down menu 1.

Ring Extension 1 - --- Plays Prompt Prompt 1 Ring Hunt Group 1 - ???? Not Used

Finally, the following window will appear.

IP PBX >> PBX System

Auto Attendant Wizard - Record Prompts

Please enter **** and (1151#\~1160#: Record user ivr data; 1251#\~1260#: Play user ivr data.) to access IVR and auto-attendant message menu.

To record user prompts:

Step 1: Connect an analog phone to the phone port.

Step 2: Enter****to access the IVR menu.

Step 3: Enter 11XX# to record a prompt.

[Here "XX" can be from 51 to 60 for recording user prompt 1 to user prompt 10 respectively.]

You can record the office hours and non-office hour greetings or other prompts.

Prompt 5 is used as office hours greeting.

Prompt 6 is used as non-office hours greeting.

5.12.4.6 Prompt Maintenance

The IP PBX system provides several audio files for users to choose for playing. Moreover, users can upload other audio files from USB storage or hard disk or others to make the IP PBX system playing. Users can record audio files and upload to router or download to PC. However, the file format of the audio file must follow the rule stated on the web page. Users can record the audio files through a phone set connected to the router or use audio record program on PC.

IP PBX >> PBX System

Prompt Maintenance

Download

Prompt G711 01

Back Up

Upload

Browse..

Restore

Note: The file name follows a pre-defined rule:

User Prompt File: v2820pbx_g711_userpromptXX.wav; XX: 01\~11;

If G711 Prompt File is upload, we will generate related G729 Prompt File automatically. But

we can not generate G711 Prompt file based on G729 Prompt file;

User prompt 11 is used for music on hold function.

Warning: Do Not access phone which connected on FXS port during you upload prompt file, it will cause router malfunction.

Supported wave file format, the length of time is 75 sec at most.

Codec	Channels	Sample rate	Bits
Linear PCM	Stereo, Mono	8k, 11.025k, 12k, 16k, 22.05k, 24k, 32k, 44.1k, 48k	16
A-law g711	Stereo, Mono	8k, 11.025k, 12k, 16k, 22.05k, 24k, 32k, 44.1k, 48k	8
u-law g711	Stereo, Mono	8k, 11.025k, 12k, 16k, 22.05k, 24k, 32k, 44.1k, 48k	8

Download

The audio file can be saved with IVR file format or WAV file format. In general, it will be saved in the router's memory after you record it. To back up the audio file(s) (saved in FLASH of the router) to your computer, please choose the one you want from the drop-down menu and click Back Up.

Download

Prompt G711 01 Prompt G711 01 Prompt G711 02 Prompt G711 03 Prompt G711 04 Prompt G711 05 Prompt G711 06 Prompt G711 07 Prompt G711 08 Prompt G711 09 Prompt G711 10 Prompt G729 01 Prompt G729 02 Prompt G729 03 Prompt G729 04 Prompt G729 05 Prompt G729 06 Prompt G729 07 Prompt G729 08 Prompt G729 09 Prompt G729 10 System Prompt G711 System Prompt G729

Prompt 1 to prompt 10 will be used for user-defined audio

files (file format must be .WAV). System Prompt file is provided by router firmware.

Upload

System Prompt file is provided by router firmware. To use such audio file, you have to upload it to flash memory of the router after finishing firmware update.

Click this

audio files.

Brow

Restore

Click this button to save the file to the router. Next time, the audio file will be played in IP PBX system.

Record audio file

Below shows a flow chart for using a phone set to record audio file.

graph TD
    A["1 2 3\n4 5 6\n7 8 9\n*/· 0 #/="] --> B["*****"]
    B --> C["IVR Greeting"]
    C --> D["1151#~1160# (Record user-defined prompt file within 20cc.)"]
    D --> E["#"]
    E --> F["1 : Save\n2 : Review\n3 : Re-record\n* : Cancel"]
    C --> G["1251#~1260# (Play user-defined prompt file)"]
    G --> H["(Play user-defined prompt file)"]
    H --> I["(Delete user-defined prompt file)"]
    I --> J["(1 : Confirm\n* : Cancel)"]
    C --> K["1351#~1360# 14# (Delete user-defined prompt file)"]
    K --> L["(Clear all user-defined prompt files)"]
    L --> M["(1 : Confirm\n* : Cancel)"]

5.12.4.7 Phone Setting

This page allows user to set phone settings.

IP PBX >> PBX System

Phone List

Index	Port	Call Feature	Codec	Tone	Gain (Mic/Speaker)	Extension Number	DTMF Relay
1	Phone	CW,CT,	G.729A/B	User Defined	5/5	901	OutBand
2	ISDN1-SO		G.729A/B	User Defined	5/5	903	OutBand
3	ISDN2-TE		G.729A/B	User Defined	5/5	904	OutBand
4	FXO		G.729A/B	User Defined	5/5	902	OutBand

RTP

Symmetric RTP
Dynamic RTP Port Start	10050
Dynamic RTP Port End	15000
RTP TOS	IP precedence 5 10100000
VoIP Collection Timer	4 sec
VoIP Collection Timer Length	4

Phone List

Port – There are four phone ports provided here for you to configure. Index 1 and Index 4 are fixed and two (Index 2 & 3) are configurable. Phone port allows you to set general settings for analog phones. FXO port allows you to configure settings for PBX line. ISDN port allows you to set common settings for ISDN network connection. ISDN1 and ISDN2 port are configurable. Please use the drop down list to choose ISDN1/2-TE for Internet connection or choose ISDN1/2-S0 (ISDN intern) for ISDN phone. In addition, you can connect six phones to this router in certain case. Please refer to Section 1-4 for detailed information of ISDN phone/network connection.

Call Feature – A brief description for call feature will be shown in this field for your reference.

Codec – The default Codec setting for each port will be shown in this field for your reference. You can click the number below the Index field to change it for each phone port.

Tone - Display the tone settings that configured in the advanced settings page of Phone Index.

Gain - Display the volume gain settings for Mic/Speaker that configured in the advanced settings page of Phone Index.

Default SIP Account – “draytel_1” is the default SIP account. You can click the number below the Index field

to change SIP account for each phone port.

DTMF Relay – Display DTMF mode that configured in the advanced settings page of Phone Index.

RTP

Symmetric RTP – Check this box to invoke the function. To make the data transmission going through on both ends of local router and remote router not misleading due to IP lost (for example, sending data from the public IP of remote router to the private IP of local router), you can check this box to solve this problem.

Dynamic RTP Port Start - Specifies the start port for RTP stream. The default value is 10050.

Dynamic RTP Port End - Specifies the end port for RTP stream. The default value is 15000.

RTP TOS – It decides the level of VoIP package. Use the drop down list to choose any one of them.

Manual IP precedence 1 IP precedence 2 IP precedence 3 IP precedence 4 IP precedence 5 IP precedence 6 IP precedence 7 AF Class1 (Low Drop) AF Class1 (Medium Drop) AF Class1 (High Drop) AF Class2 (Low Drop) AF Class2 (Medium Drop) AF Class2 (High Drop) AF Class3 (Low Drop) AF Class3 (Medium Drop) AF Class3 (High Drop) AF Class4 (Low Drop) AF Class4 (Medium Drop) AF Class4 (High Drop) EF Class Manual

RTP TOS

VoIP Collection Timer – Not available.

VoIP Collection Timer Length - Not available.

Detailed Settings for Phone Port

Click the number link of Phone port, you can access into the following page for configuring Phone settings. Below is the sample page for Phone port.

IP PBX >> PBX System

Phone

Call Feature Hotline Session Timer 90 sec DND(Do Not Disturb) Mode Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: Note: Action and Idle Timeout settings will be ignored. CLIR (hide caller ID) Call Waiting Call Transfer Codecs Prefer Codec G.729A/B (8Kbps) Single Codec Packet Size 20ms Voice Active Detector Off

Hotline

Check the box to enable it. Type in the SIP URL in the field for dialing automatically when you pick up the phone set.

Session Timer

Check the box to enable the function. In the limited time that you set in this field, if there is no response, the connecting call will be closed automatically.

DND (Do Not Disturb) Mode

Set a period of peace time without disturbing by VoIP phone call. During the period, the one who dial in will listen busy tone, yet the local user will not listen any ring tone.

Index (1-15) in Schedule - Enter the index of schedule

profiles to control the DND mode according to the preconfigured schedules. Refer to section Applications>> Schedule for detailed configuration.

CLIR (hide caller ID)

Check this box to hide the caller ID on the display panel of the phone set.

Call Waiting

Check this box to invoke this function. A notice sound will appear to tell the user new phone call is waiting for your response. Click hook flash to pick up the waiting phone call.

Call Transfer

Check this box to invoke this function. Click hook flash to initiate another phone call. When the phone call connection succeeds, hang up the phone. The other two sides can communicate, then.

Codecs

Prefer Codec - Select one of five codecs as the default for your VoIP calls. The codec used for each call will be negotiated with the peer party before each session, and so may not be your default choice. The default codec is G.729A/B; it occupies little bandwidth while maintaining

good voice quality.

If the upstream speed is only 64Kbps, do not use G.711

codec. It is better for you to have at least 256Kbps upstream if you would like to use G.711.

Prefer Codec

G.711A (64Kbps) G.711MU (64Kbps) G.711A (64Kbps) G.729A/B (8Kbps) G.723 (6.4kbps) G.726 32 (32kbps)

Single Codec - If the box is checked, only the selected

Codec will be applied.

Packet Size - The amount of data contained in a single packet. The default value is 20 ms, which means the data packet will contain 20 ms voice information.

Packet Size

Voice Active Detector - This function can detect if the

voice on both sides is active or not. If not, the router will do something to save the bandwidth for other using. Click On to invoke this function; click off to close the function.

Voice Active Detector

In addition, you can press the Advanced button to configure tone settings, volume gain, MISC and DTMF mode. Advanced setting is provided for fitting the telecommunication custom for the local area of the router installed. Wrong tone settings might cause inconvenience for users. To set the sound pattern of the phone set, simply choose a proper region to let the system find out the preset tone settings and caller ID type automatically. Or you can adjust tone settings manually if you choose User Defined. TOn1, TOff1, TOn2 and TOff2 mean the cadence of the tone pattern. TOn1 and TOn2 represent sound-on; TOff1 and TOff2 represent the sound-off.

Advance Settings >> Phone

Tone Settings Region User Defined Low Freq (Hz) High Freq (Hz) T on 1 (msec) T off 1 (msec) T on 2 (msec) T off 2 (msec) Dial tone 350 440 0 0 0 0 Ringing tone 400 450 400 200 400 2000 Busy tone 400 0 375 375 0 0 Congestion tone 0 0 0 0 0 0 Volume Gain Mic Gain(1-10) 5 Speaker Gain(1-10) 5 DTMF DTMF Mode OutBand (RFC2833) Payload Type (RFC2833) 101 MISC Dial Tone Power Level (1 - 50) 27 Ring Frequency (10 - 50HZ) 25

Region

Select the proper region which you are located. The common settings of Caller ID Type, Dial tone, Ringing tone, Busy tone and Congestion tone will be shown automatically on the page. If you cannot find out a suitable one, please choose User Defined and fill out the corresponding values for dial tone, ringing tone, busy tone, congestion tone by yourself for VoIP phone.

User Defined User Defined UK US Denmark Italy Germany Netherlands Portugal Sweden Australia Slovenia Czech Slovakia Hungary Switzerland France

Also, you can specify each field for your necessity. It is

recommended for you to use the default settings for VoIP communication.

Volume Gain

Mic Gain (1-10)/Speaker Gain (1-10) - Adjust the volume of microphone and speaker by entering number

from 1-10. The larger of the number, the louder the volume is.

MISC

Dial Tone Power Level - This setting is used to adjust the loudness of the dial tone. The smaller the number is, the louder the dial tone is. It is recommended for you to use the default setting.

Ring Frequency - This setting is used to drive the

frequency of the ring tone. It is recommended for you to use the default setting.

DTMF

DTMF Mode - There are four DTMF modes for you to choose.

InBand - Choose this one then the Vigor will send the DTMF tone as audio directly when you press the keypad on the phone

OutBand - Choose this one then the Vigor will capture the keypad number you pressed and transform it to digital form then send to the other side; the receiver will generate the tone according to the digital form it receive. This function is very useful when the network traffic congestion occurs and it still can remain the accuracy of DTMF tone.

SIP INFO- Choose this one then the Vigor will capture the DTMF tone and transfer it into SIP form. Then it will be sent to the remote end with SIP message.

DTMF mode

InBand InBand OutBand ( RFC2833) SIP INFO (cisco format) SIP INFO (nortel format)

Payload Type (rfc2833) - Choose a number from 96 to

127, the default value was 101. This setting is available for the OutBand (RFC2833) mode.

Detailed Settings for ISDN1/2-S0 Port

Click the number link of Index 2 or Index 3 (ISDN1-S0 or ISDN2-S0), you can access into the following page for configuring Phone settings.

IP PBX >> PBX System

ISDN1-S0

Call Feature Hotline Session Timer 90 sec DND(Do Not Disturb) Mode Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: Note: Action and Idle Timeout settings will be ignored. CLIR (hide caller ID) Call Waiting Call Transfer Codecs Prefer Codec G.729A/B (8Kbps) Single Codec Packet Size 20ms Voice Active Detector Off

Hotline

Check the box to enable it. Type in the SIP URL in the field for dialing automatically when you pick up the phone set.

Session Timer

Check the box to enable the function. In the limited time that you set in this field, if there is no response, the connecting call will be closed automatically.

DND (Do Not Disturb) mode

Set a period of peace time without disturbing by VoIP phone call. During the period, the one who dial in will listen busy tone, yet the local user will not listen any ring tone.

Index (1-15) in Schedule - Enter the index of schedule

profiles to control the DND mode according to the preconfigured schedules. Refer to section Applications>> Schedule for detailed configuration.

CLIR (hide caller ID)

Check this box to hide the caller ID on the display panel of the phone set.

Call Waiting

Check this box to invoke this function. A notice sound will appear to tell the user new phone call is waiting for your response. Click hook flash to pick up the waiting phone call.

Call Transfer

Check this box to invoke this function. Click hook flash to initiate another phone call. When the phone call connection succeeds, hang up the phone. The other two sides can communicate, then.

Codecs

Prefer Codec - Select one of five codecs as the default for your VoIP calls. The codec used for each call will be negotiated with the peer party before each session, and so may not be your default choice. The default codec is G.729A/B; it occupies little bandwidth while maintaining

good voice quality.

If your upstream speed is only 64Kbps, do not use G.711 codec. It is better for you to have at least 256Kbps upstream if you would like to use G.711.

Prefer Codec

G.711A (64Kbps) G.711MU (64Kbps) G.711A (64Kbps) G.729A/B (8Kbps) G.723 (6.4kbps) G.726 32 (32kbps)

Single Codec – If the box is checked, only the selected Codec will be applied.

Packet Size - The amount of data contained in a single packet. The default value is 20 ms, which means the data packet will contain 20 ms voice information.

Packet Size

Voice Active Detector - This function can detect if the voice on both sides is active or not. If not, the router will do something to save the bandwidth for other using. Click On to invoke this function; click off to close the function.

Voice Active Detector

In addition, you can press the Advanced button to configure tone settings, volume gain, MISC, DTMF mode and MSN number. Advanced setting is provided for fitting the telecommunication custom for the local area of the router installed. Wrong tone settings might cause inconvenience for users. To set the sound pattern of the phone set, simply choose a proper region to let the system find out the preset tone settings and caller ID type automatically. Or you can adjust tone settings manually if you choose User Defined. TOn1, TOff1, TOn2 and TOff2 mean the cadence of the tone pattern. TOn1 and TOn2 represent sound-on; TOff1 and TOff2 represent the sound-off.

Advance Settings >> ISDN1-S0

Tone Settings Region User Defined Low Freq High Freq T on 1 T off 1 T on 2 T off 2 (Hz) (Hz) (msec) (msec) (msec) (msec) Dial tone 350 440 0 0 0 0 Ringing tone 400 450 400 200 400 2000 Busy tone 400 0 375 375 0 0 Congestion tone 0 0 0 0 0 0 Volume Gain DTMF Mic Gain(1-10) 5 DTMF Mode OutBand (RFC2833) Speaker Gain(1-10) 5 Payload Type (RFC2833) 101 MISC Dial Tone Power Level (1 - 50) 27 Ring Frequency (10 - 50HZ) 25

Region

Select the proper region which you are located. The common settings of Caller ID Type, Dial tone, Ringing tone, Busy tone and Congestion tone will be shown automatically on the page. If you cannot find out a suitable one, please choose User Defined and fill out the corresponding values for dial tone, ringing tone, busy tone, congestion tone by yourself for VoIP phone.

Tone Settings Region User Defined User Defined UK US Denmark Italy Germany Netherlands Portugal Sweden Australia Slovenia Czech Slovakia Hungary Switzerland France UK_CCA China Taiwan

Also, you can specify each field for your necessity. It is recommended for you to use the default settings for VoIP

communication.

Volume Gain

Mic Gain (1-10)/Speaker Gain (1-10) - Adjust the volume of microphone and speaker by entering number from 1-10. The larger of the number, the louder the volume is.

MISC

Dial Tone Power Level - This setting is used to adjust the loudness of the dial tone. The smaller the number is, the louder the dial tone is. It is recommended for you to use the default setting.

Ring Frequency - This setting is used to drive the

frequency of the ring tone. It is recommended for you to use the default setting.

DTMF

DTMF Mode – There are four DTMF modes for you to choose.

InBand - Choose this one then the Vigor will send the DTMF tone as audio directly when you press the keypad on the phone

OutBand - Choose this one then the Vigor will capture the keypad number you pressed and transform it to digital form then send to the other side; the receiver will generate the tone according to the digital form it receive. This function is very useful when the network traffic congestion occurs and it still can remain the accuracy of DTMF tone.

SIP INFO- Choose this one then the Vigor will capture the DTMF tone and transfer it into SIP form. Then it will be sent to the remote end with SIP message.

DTMF mode

InBand InBand OutBand ( RFC2833) SIP INFO (cisco format) SIP INFO (nortel format)

Payload Type (rfc2833) - Choose a number from 96 to

127, the default value was 101. This setting is available for the OutBand (RFC2833) mode.

Detailed Settings for ISDN1/2-TE Port

The vigor router allows users to switch the function of ISDN1/ISDN2 port between TE or S0 mode. Please use the drop down list to choose the one you want.

2 ISDN1-TE ISDN1-TE 3 ISDN1-S0

3 ISDN2-TE ISDN2-TE ISDN2-S0 RTP

Choose ISDN-TE and click the number link for that port, you will see the following page.

ISDN2-TE

Call Feature □ Session Timer 90 sec □ DND(Do Not Disturb) Mode Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: □, □, □, □ Note: Action and Idle Timeout settings will be ignored. □ CLIR (hide caller ID) Codecs Prefer Codec G.729A/B (8Kbps) □ Single Codec Packet Size 20ms Voice Active Detector Off

Session Timer

Check the box to enable the function. In the limited time that you set in this field, if there is no response, the connecting call will be closed automatically.

DND (Do Not Disturb) mode

Set a period of peace time without disturbing by VoIP phone call. During the period, the one who dial in will listen busy tone, yet the local user will not listen any ring tone.

Index (1-15) in Schedule - Enter the index of schedule

profiles to control the DND mode according to the preconfigured schedules. Refer to section Applications>> Schedule for detailed configuration.

CLIR (hide caller ID)

Check this box to hide the caller ID on the display panel of the phone set.

Codecs

Prefer Codec - Select one of five codecs as the default for your VoIP calls. The codec used for each call will be negotiated with the peer party before each session, and so may not be your default choice. The default codec is G.729A/B; it occupies little bandwidth while maintaining good voice quality.

If your upstream speed is only 64Kbps, do not use G.711

codec. It is better for you to have at least 256Kbps upstream if you would like to use G.711.

Prefer Codec

G.711A (64Kbps) G.711MU (64Kbps) G.711A (64Kbps) G.729A/B (8Kbps) G.723 (6.4kbps) G.726_32 (32kbps)

Single Codec – If the box is checked, only the selected Codec will be applied.

Packet Size-The amount of data contained in a single

packet. The default value is 20 ms, which means the data packet will contain 20 ms voice information.

Packet Size

Voice Active Detector - This function can detect if the

voice on both sides is active or not. If not, the router will do something to save the bandwidth for other using. Click On to invoke this function; click off to close the function.

Voice Active Detector

In addition, you can press the Advanced button to configure tone settings, volume gain, MISC and DTMF mode. Advanced setting is provided for fitting the telecommunication custom for the local area of the router installed. Wrong tone settings might cause inconvenience for users. To set the sound pattern of the phone set, simply choose a proper region to let the system find out the preset tone settings and caller ID type automatically. Or you can adjust tone settings manually if you choose User Defined. TOn1, TOff1, TOn2 and TOff2 mean the cadence of the tone pattern. TOn1 and TOn2 represent sound-on; TOff1 and TOff2 represent the sound-off.

IP PBX >> Phone Settings

Advance Settings >> ISDN2-TE

Tone Settings Region User Defined Low Freq (Hz) High Freq (Hz) T on 1 (msec) T off 1 (msec) T on 2 (msec) T off 2 (Dial tone) 350 440 0 0 0 0 Ringing tone) 400 450 400 200 400 2000 Busy tone) 400 0 375 375 0 0 Congestion tone) 0 0 0 0 0 0 Volume Gain Mic Gain(1-10) 5 DTMF Speaker Gain(1-10) 5 DTMF Mode OutBand (RFC2833) Payload Type (RFC2833) (96 - 127) 101 Authentication PIN Code Check for ISDN to VoIP Calls 0000 Check for VoIP to ISDN Calls 0000 OK Cancel

Region

Select the proper region which you are located. The common settings of Caller ID Type, Dial tone, Ringing tone, Busy tone and Congestion tone will be shown automatically on the page. If you cannot find out a suitable one, please choose User Defined and fill out the corresponding values for dial tone, ringing tone, busy tone, and congestion tone by yourself for VoIP phone.

Tone Settings Region User Defined User Defined UK US Denmark Italy Germany Netherlands Portugal Sweden Australia Slovenia Czech Slovakia Hungary Switzerland France UK_CCA China Taiwan

Also, you can specify each field for your necessity. It is

recommended for you to use the default settings for VoIP communication.

Volume Gain

Mic Gain (1-10)/Speaker Gain (1-10) - Adjust the volume of microphone and speaker by entering number from 1-10. The larger of the number, the louder the volume is.

Authentication PIN Code

Check for ISDN to VoIP Calls – Set a pin code for the router to authenticate which one is allowed to dial ISDN to VoIP call. The figure that you can type in this field is limited from three to eight with digits from zero to nine.

Check for VoIP to ISDN Calls - Set a pin code for the

router to authenticate which one is allowed to dial VoIP to ISDN call. The figure that you can type in this field is limited from three to eight with digits from zero to nine.

DTMP

DTMF mode - There are four selections provided here:

InBand: Choose this one then the Vigor will send the

DTMF tone as audio directly when you press the keypad on the phone

OutBand: Choose this one then the Vigor will capture the

keypad number you pressed and transform it to digital form then send to the other side; the receiver will generate the tone according to the digital form it receive. This function is very useful when the network traffic congestion occurs and it still can remain the accuracy of DTMF tone.

SIP INFO: Choose this one then the Vigor will capture

the DTMF tone and transfer it into SIP form. Then it will

be sent to the remote end with SIP message.

DTMF mode

InBand InBand OutBand ( RFC2833) SIP INFO (cisco format) SIP INFO (nortel format)

Payload Type (rfc2833) - Choose a number from 96 to 127, the default value was 101. This setting is available for the OutBand (RFC2833) mode.

Detailed Settings for FXO Port

Click the number link of FXO port, you can access into the following page for configuring Phone settings. Below is the sample page for FXO port.

IP PBX >> PBX System

FXO

Call Feature □ Session Timer 90 sec □ DND(Do Not Disturb) Mode Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: □, □, □, □ Note: Action and Idle Timeout settings will be ignored. □ CLIR (hide caller ID) Codecs Prefer Codec G.729A/B (8Kbps) □ Single Codec Packet Size 20ms Voice Active Detector Off

Session Timer

Check the box to enable the function. In the limited time that you set in this field, if there is no response, the connecting call will be closed automatically.

DND (Do Not Disturb) mode

Set a period of peace time without disturbing by VoIP phone call. During the period, the one who dial in will listen busy tone, yet the local user will not listen any ring tone.

Index (1-15) in Schedule - Enter the index of schedule profiles to control the DND mode according to the preconfigured schedules. Refer to section Applications>> Schedule for detailed configuration.

CLIR (hide caller ID)

Check this box to hide the caller ID on the display panel of the phone set.

Codecs

Prefer Codec - Select one of five codecs as the default for your VoIP calls. The codec used for each call will be negotiated with the peer party before each session, and so may not be your default choice. The default codec is G.729A/B; it occupies little bandwidth while maintaining good voice quality.

If your upstream speed is only 64Kbps, do not use G.711 codec. It is better for you to have at least 256Kbps upstream if you would like to use G.711.

Prefer Codec

G.711A (64Kbps) G.711MU (64Kbps) G.711A (64Kbps) G.729A/B (8Kbps) G.723 (6.4kbps) G.726_32 (32kbps)

Single Codec – If the box is checked, only the selected Codec will be applied.

Packet Size-The amount of data contained in a single

packet. The default value is 20 ms, which means the data packet will contain 20 ms voice information.

Packet Size

Voice Active Detector - This function can detect if the

voice on both sides is active or not. If not, the router will do something to save the bandwidth for other using. Click On to invoke this function; click off to close the function.

Voice Active Detector

In addition, you can press the Advanced button to configure tone settings, volume gain, MISC and DTMF mode. Advanced setting is provided for fitting the telecommunication custom for the local area of the router installed. Wrong tone settings might cause inconvenience for users. To set the sound pattern of the phone set, simply choose a proper region to let the system find out the preset tone settings and caller ID type automatically. Or you can adjust tone settings manually if you choose User Defined. TOn1, TOff1, TOn2 and TOff2 mean the cadence of the tone pattern. TOn1 and TOn2 represent sound-on; TOff1 and TOff2 represent the sound-off.

Advance Settings >> FXO

Tone Settings Region User Defined Low Freq High Freq T on 1 T off 1 T on 2 T off 2 (Hz) (Hz) (msec) (msec) (msec) (msec) Dial tone 425 0 0 0 0 0 Ringing tone 425 0 1000 4000 0 0 Busy tone 425 0 500 500 0 0 Congestion tone 0 0 0 0 0 0 Volume Gain DTMF Mic Gain(1-10) 5 DTMF Mode OutBand (RFC2833) Speaker Gain(1-10) 5 Payload Type (RFC2833) 101 MISC Dial Tone Power Level (1 - 50) 27

Region

Select the proper region which you are located. The common settings of Caller ID Type, Dial tone, Ringing tone, Busy tone and Congestion tone will be shown automatically on the page. If you cannot find out a suitable one, please choose User Defined and fill out the corresponding values for dial tone, ringing tone, busy tone, and congestion tone by yourself for VoIP phone.

Tone Settings Region User Defined User Defined UK US Denmark Italy Germany Netherlands Portugal Sweden Australia Slovenia Czech Slovakia Hungary Switzerland France UK_CCA China Taiwan Día Ringi Bus Conges Volume Mic Gain Speaker MISC Dial Tone

Also, you can specify each field for your necessity. It is recommended for you to use the default settings for VoIP communication.

Volume Gain

Mic Gain (1-10)/Speaker Gain (1-10) - Adjust the volume of microphone and speaker by entering number from 1-10. The larger of the number, the louder the volume is.

MISC

Dial Tone Power Level - This setting is used to adjust the loudness of the dial tone. The smaller the number is, the louder the dial tone is. It is recommended for you to use the default setting.

DTMF

DTMF mode - There are four selections provided here:

InBand: Choose this one then the Vigor will send the

DTMF tone as audio directly when you press the keypad on the phone

OutBand: Choose this one then the Vigor will capture the

keypad number you pressed and transform it to digital form then send to the other side; the receiver will generate the tone according to the digital form it receive. This function is very useful when the network traffic congestion occurs and it still can remain the accuracy of DTMF tone.

SIP INFO: Choose this one then the Vigor will capture

the DTMF tone and transfer it into SIP form. Then it will be sent to the remote end with SIP message.

DTMF mode

InBand InBand OutBand ( RFC2833) SIP INFO (cisco format) SIP INFO (nortel format)

Payload Type (rfc2833) - Choose a number from 96 to

127, the default value was 101. This setting is available for the OutBand (RFC2833) mode.

Four ISDN Channels Application

There are two ISDN physical connectors for connecting to ISDN phones. However, if these two ISDN connectors are configured with ISDN-TE port from the web page, LAN users can connect to four ISDN phones at one time through ISDN PBX system.

graph TD
    A["PBX"] --> B["ISDN Phone Ext:602"]
    A --> C["ISDN Phone Ext:601"]
    A --> D["PBX"]
    D --> E["ISDN Phone"]
    D --> F["PBX"]
    F --> G["ISDN Phone"]
    H["DrayTek VigorIPPBX 2820n"] --> I["TE"]
    H --> J["TE"]
    H --> K["TE"]
    L["IP PBX >> PBX System"] --> M["Phone List"]
    M --> N["1 Phone CW,CT, G.729"]
    M --> O["2 ISDN1-TE"]
    M --> P["3 ISDN2-TE"]

Follow the steps below to configure the phone ports with features of ISDN-TE.

1. Open IP PBX>>PBX System.
2. Click Phone Settings to open the configuration page.

IP PBX >> PBX System

Index	Port	Call Feature	Codec	Tone	Gain (Mic/Speaker)	Ex
1	Phone	CW,CT,	G.729A/B	User Defined	5/5
2	ISDN1-TE		G.729A/B	User Defined	5/5
3	ISDN2-TE		G.729A/B	User Defined	5/5
4	FXO		G.729A/B	User Defined	5/5

1. Choose ISDN1-TE as the Port setting in index 2 and ISDN2-TE as the Port setting in index 3.
2. Click OK to save the change.
3. Next, click index 2 link / index 3 link to configure detailed settings for each port respectively.

When you finished the configuration, four ISDN lines are ready for the user to communicate with others.

5.12.4.8 SIP Trunk and Extension Configuration Backup

This page allows you to backup or restore SIP Trunk and Extension Configuration to the host and restore them to the router if required.

IP PBX >> SIP Trunk and Extension Configuration Backup

SIP Trunk Setting Backup / Restoration

Restoration Select a SIPTrunk_Setting.bak file. Browse. Click Restore to upload the file. Restore Backup Click Backup to download current running sip trunk settings as a file. Backup Cancel

Extension Setting Backup / Restoration

Restoration Select a Ext_Setting.bak file. Browse. Click Restore to upload the file. Restore Backup Click Backup to download current running extension settings as a file. Backup Cancel

Backup the Configuration for SIP Trunk or Extension Settings

Follow the steps below to backup your configuration.

1. Click Backup button. A dialog appears for you to confirm the settings backup. Click Save button to open another dialog for saving configuration as a file.
2. In Save As dialog, the default filename is v2820pbx_SIPTrunk_Setting_2010XXXX (for SIP Trunk) or v2820pbx_Ext_Setting_2010XXX (for extension settings). You could give it another name by yourself.
3. Click Save button, the configuration will download automatically to your computer as a file named v2820pbx_SIPTrunk_Setting_2010XXXX (for SIP Trunk) or v2820pbx_Ext_Setting_2010XXX (for extension settings).

The above example is using Windows platform for demonstrating examples. The Mac or Linux platform will display different windows, but the backup function is still available.

Restore Configuration

1. Click Browse button in the field of Restoration to choose the correct configuration file for uploading to the router.
2. Click Restore button and wait for few seconds, the following picture will tell you that the restoration procedure is successful.

5.12.5 PBX Status

IP PBX >> PBX Status

PBX Status

Call Detail Records

Extension Monitor

5.12.5.1 Call Detail Records

This page displays call records of IP PBX such as failed call, successful call, no-answer call, date of the call and the duration of each call, and so on.

IP PBX >> PBX Status

CDR Export

Click Export to download CDR record as a file(.csv).

Export

Call Detail Records

Refresh Seconds:

Refresh

Index	Date	From	To	Result	Duration
1
2
3
4
5

40
47
48
49
50

<< 1.50 | 51.100 | 101.150 | 151.200 | 201.250 | 251.300 | 301.350 | 351.400 | 401.450 | 451.500

| 501.550 | 551.600 | 601.650 | 651.700 | 701.750 | 751.800 | 801.850 | 851.900 | 901.950 | 951.1000 >>

Such records can be exported as a file (with file format .csv) and stored in the host. Simply click Export.

IP PBX >> PBX Status

CDR Export

Click Export to download CDR record as a file(.csv).

Export

Call Detail Records

Refresh Seconds:

Refresh

Index	Date	From	To	Result	Duration
1	2010/10/15 05:29:22	102	101	Success	00:00:10
2	2010/10/14 10:40:26	903	001/8333111	Success	00:00:28
3	2010/10/14 10:38:31	903	001/8333111	Success	00:00:35
4	2010/10/14 10:37:10	902	001/8333111	Success	00:03:10
5	2010/10/14 10:36:04	902	001/8333111	Success	00:00:20
6	2010/10/14 10:33:00	901	001/8333111	Success	00:04:15
7	2010/10/14 01:58:34	102	101	Success	00:00:07
8	2010/10/14 01:57:45	102	101	Success	00:00:11
9	2010/10/13 13:03:38	102	101	Success	00:00:03
10	2010/10/13 13:02:34	102	888	Success	00:00:21
11	2010/10/13 12:59:21	102	101	Success	00:00:13
12	2010/10/13 12:58:04	102	101	Success	00:00:13
13	2010/10/13 12:56:25	102	101	Success	00:00:14
14	2010/10/13 11:41:49	101	1001	Fail	00:00:00

5.12.5.2 Extension Monitor

This page displays owner's name, IP address, status and peer ID for each extension number.

IP PBX >> PBX Status

Index	Name	Extension	IP	Status	Peer ID
1	---	---		Offline
2	---	---		Offline
3	---	---		Offline
4	---	---		Offline
5	---	---		Offline
6	---	---		Offline
7	---	---		Offline
8	---	---		Offline
9	---	---		Offline
10	---	---		Offline

Refresh Click it to reload the page.

5.13 Wireless LAN

This function is used for "n" models only.

5.13.1 Basic Concepts

Over recent years, the market for wireless communications has enjoyed tremendous growth. Wireless technology now reaches or is capable of reaching virtually every location on the surface of the earth. Hundreds of millions of people exchange information every day via wireless communication products. The Vigor “n” model, a.k.a. Vigor wireless router, is designed for maximum flexibility and efficiency of a small office/home. Any authorized staff can bring a built-in WLAN client PDA or notebook into a meeting room for conference without laying a clot of LAN cable or drilling holes everywhere. Wireless LAN enables high mobility so WLAN users can simultaneously access all LAN facilities just like on a wired LAN as well as Internet access.

The Vigor wireless routers are equipped with a wireless LAN interface compliant with the standard IEEE 802.11n protocol. To boost its performance further, the Vigor Router is also loaded with advanced wireless technology to lift up data rate up to 300 Mbps*. Hence, you can finally smoothly enjoy stream music and video.

Note: * The actual data throughput will vary according to the network conditions and environmental factors, including volume of network traffic, network overhead and building materials.

In an Infrastructure Mode of wireless network, Vigor wireless router plays a role as an Access Point (AP) connecting to lots of wireless clients or Stations (STA). All the STAs will share the same Internet connection via Vigor wireless router. The General Settings will set up the information of this wireless network, including its SSID as identification, located channel etc.

graph TD
    A["Internet"] --> B["Draytek"]
    B --> C["192.168.1.2"]
    B --> D["192.168.1.1"]
    B --> E["SSID: Draytek\nChannel: 6\nMode: WEP only"]

Security Overview

Real-time Hardware Encryption: Vigor Router is equipped with a hardware AES encryption engine so it can apply the highest protection to your data without influencing user experience.

Complete Security Standard Selection: To ensure the security and privacy of your wireless communication, we provide several prevailing standards on market.

WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a legacy method to encrypt each frame transmitted via radio using either a 64-bit or 128-bit key. Usually access point will preset a set of four keys and it will communicate with each station using only one out of the four keys.

WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access), the most dominating security mechanism in industry, is separated into two categories: WPA-personal or called WPA Pre-Share Key (WPA/PSK), and WPA-Enterprise or called WPA/802.1x.

In WPA-Personal, a pre-defined key is used for encryption during data transmission. WPA applies Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) for data encryption while WPA2 applies AES. The WPA-Enterprise combines not only encryption but also authentication.

Since WEP has been proved vulnerable, you may consider using WPA for the most secure connection. You should select the appropriate security mechanism according to your needs. No matter which security suite you select, they all will enhance the over-the-air data protection and /or privacy on your wireless network. The Vigor wireless router is very flexible and can support multiple secure connections with both WEP and WPA at the same time.

Separate the Wireless and the Wired LAN- WLAN Isolation enables you to isolate your wireless LAN from wired LAN for either quarantine or limit access reasons. To isolate means neither of the parties can access each other. To elaborate an example for business use, you may set up a wireless LAN for visitors only so they can connect to Internet without hassle of the confidential information leakage. For a more flexible deployment, you may add filters of MAC addresses to isolate users' access from wired LAN.

Manage Wireless Stations - Station List will display all the station in your wireless network and the status of their connection.

Below shows the menu items for Wireless LAN.

Wireless LAN ► General Setup ► Security ► Access Control ► WPS ► WDS ► Advanced Setting ► AP Discovery ► Station List

5.13.2 General Setup

By clicking the General Settings, a new web page will appear so that you could configure the SSID and the wireless channel. Please refer to the following figure for more information.

Wireless LAN >> General Setup

General Setting ( IEEE 802.11 )

Enable Wireless LAN Mode : Mixed(11b+11g+11n) Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup: Only schedule profiles that have the action "Force Down" are applied to the WLAN, all other actions are ignored. Enable Hide SSID SSID Isolate Member Isolate VPN 1 □ DrayTek □ 2 □ 3 □ 4 □

Isolate Member: Wireless clients (stations) with the same SSID cannot access for each other.
Isolate VPN: isolate wireless with remote dial-in and LAN to LAN VPN.
Channel: Channel 6, 2437MHz Long Preamble: Long Preamble: necessary for some old 802.11 b devices only(lower performance)
Packet-OVERDRIVE™
Tx Burst
Note:
The same technology must also be supported in clients to boost WLAN performance.

Rate Control Enable Upload Download SSID 1 30000 kbps 30000 kbps SSID 2 30000 kbps 30000 kbps SSID 3 30000 kbps 30000 kbps SSID 4 30000 kbps 30000 kbps

Note: range 100\~50,000 kbps

Enable Wireless LAN

Mode

Check the box to enable wireless function.

At present, the router can connect to 11b Only, 11g Only, 11n Only, Mixed(11b+11g), Mixed(11g+11n) and Mixed

(11b+11g+11n) stations simultaneously. Simply choose Mix (11b+11g+11n) mode.

Mixed(11b+11g+11n) 11b Only 11g Only 11n Only Mixed(11b+11g) Mixed(11g+11n) Mixed(11b+11g+11n)

Index(1-15)	Set the wireless LAN to work at certain time interval only. You may choose up to 4 schedules out of the 15 schedules pre-defined in Applications >> Schedule setup. The default setting of this filed is blank and the function will always work.
Hide SSID	Check it to prevent from wireless sniffing and make it harder for unauthorized clients or STAs to join your wireless LAN. Depending on the wireless utility, the user may only see the information except SSID or just cannot see any thing about Vigor wireless router while site surveying. The system allows you to set four sets of SSID for different usage. In default, the first set of SSID will be enabled. You can hide it for your necessity.
SSID	Means the identification of the wireless LAN. SSID can be any text numbers or various special characters. The default SSID is "default". We suggest you to change it.
Isolate Member	Check this box to make the wireless clients (stations) with the same SSID not accessing for each other.
Isolate VPN	Check this box to isolate wireless with remote dial-in and LAN to LAN VPN.
Channel	Means the channel of frequency of the wireless LAN. The default channel is 6. You may switch channel if the selected channel is under serious interference. If you have no idea of choosing the frequency, please select Auto to let system determine for you.

Channel: Channel 6, 2437MHz Auto Channel 1, 2412MHz Channel 2, 2417MHz Channel 3, 2422MHz Channel 4, 2427MHz Channel 5, 2432MHz Channel 6, 2437MHz Channel 7, 2442MHz Channel 8, 2447MHz Channel 9, 2452MHz Channel 10, 2457MHz Channel 11, 2462MHz Channel 12, 2467MHz Channel 13, 2472MHz

Long Preamble

This option is to define the length of the sync field in an 802.11 packet. Most modern wireless network uses short preamble with 56 bit sync filed instead of long preamble with 128 bit sync field. However, some original 11b wireless network devices only support long preamble. Check it to use Long Preamble if needed to communicate with this kind of devices.

Packet-OVERDRIVE

This feature can enhance the performance in data transmission about 40% for 11g (5% for 11n) by checking Tx Burst. It is active only when both sides of Access Point and Station (in wireless client) invoke this function at the same time. That is, the wireless client must support this feature and invoke the function, too.

Note: Vigor N61 wireless adapter supports this function.

Therefore, you can use and install it into your PC for matching with Packet-OVERDRIVE (refer to the following picture of Vigor N61 wireless utility window, choose Enable for TxBURST on the tab of Option).

Vigor M61 802.11n Wireless USB Adapter Utility Configuration States Options About General Setting ✓ Auto launch when Windows start up ☐ Remember mini status position ☐ Auto hide mini status ☐ Set mini status always on top ☐ Enable IP Setting and Proxy Setting in Profile ☐ Group Focusing Ad-hoc WLAN type to connect ○ Infrastructure and Ad-hoc network ○ Infrastructure network only ○ Ad-hoc network only □ Automatically connect to non-preferred networks Advance Setting □ Disable Ratio Fragmentation Threshold: 2345 RTS Threshold: 2347 Frequency: 802.11 b/g/n - 2.4GHz Ad-hoc Channel: 1 Finger Save Mode: Disable To Reset: Disable OK Cancel Apply

Rate Control

It controls the data transmission rate through wireless connection.

Upload - Check Enable and type the transmitting rate for data upload. Default value is 30,000 kbps.

Download - Type the transmitting rate for data download.

Default value is 30,000 kbps.

5.13.3 Security

This page allows you to set security with different modes for SSID 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively. After configuring the correct settings, please click OK to save and invoke it.

By clicking the Security Settings, a new web page will appear so that you could configure the settings of WEP and WPA.

Wireless LAN >> Security Settings

SSID 1 SSID 2 SSID 3 SSID 4 Mode: WPA/PSK Set up RADIUS Server if 802.1x is enabled. WPA: Encryption Mode: TKIP Pre-Shared Key(PSK): ********** Type 8~63 ASCII character or 64 Hexadecimal digits leading by "0x", for example "cfgs01a2..." or "0x655abcd...". WEP: Encryption Mode: 64-Bit Key 1 : ********** Key 2 : ********** Key 3 : ********** Key 4 : ********** For 64 bit WEP key Type 5 ASCII character or 10 Hexadecimal digits leading by "0x", for example "AB312" or "0x4142333132". For 128 bit WEP key Type 13 ASCII character or 26 Hexadecimal digits leading by "0x", for example "0123456789abc" or "0x30313233343536373839414243".

Mode

There are several modes provided for you to choose.

WPA/PSK Disable WEP WEP/802.1x Only WPA/802.1x Only WPA2/802.1x Only Mixed(WPA+WPA2/802.1x only) WPA/PSK WPA2/PSK Mixed(WPA+WPA2)/PSK

Disable - Turn off the encryption mechanism.

WEP-Accepts only WEP clients and the encryption key should be entered in WEP Key.

WEP/802.1x Only - Accepts only WEP clients and the encryption key is obtained dynamically from RADIUS server with 802.1X protocol.

WPA/802.1x Only- Accepts only WPA clients and the encryption key is obtained dynamically from RADIUS server with 802.1X protocol.

WPA2/802.1x Only- Accepts only WPA2 clients and the encryption key is obtained dynamically from RADIUS server with 802.1X protocol.

Mixed (WPA+WPA2/802.1x only) - Accepts WPA and WPA2 clients simultaneously and the encryption key is obtained dynamically from RADIUS server with 802.1X protocol.

WPA/PSK-Accepts only WPA clients and the encryption key should be entered in PSK.

WPA2/PSK-Accepts only WPA2 clients and the encryption key should be entered in PSK.

Mixed (WPA+ WPA2)/PSK - Accepts WPA and WPA2 clients simultaneously and the encryption key should be entered in PSK.

Note: You should also set RADIUS Server simultaneously if WEP/802.1x Only, WPA/802.1x Only, WPA2/802.1x Only or Mixed (WPA+WPA2/802.1x only) is selected.

WPA The WPA encrypts each frame transmitted from the radio using the key, which either PSK (Pre-Shared Key) entered manually in this field below or automatically negotiated via 802.1x authentication. Either 8\~63 ASCII characters, such as 012345678(or 64 Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as "0x321253abcde...").

Type - Select from Mixed (WPA+WPA2) or WPA2 only.

Pre-Shared Key (PSK) - Either 8\~63 ASCII characters, such as 012345678..(or 64 Hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as "0x321253abcde...").

WEP 64-Bit - For 64 bits WEP key, either 5 ASCII characters, such as 12345 (or 10 hexadecimal digitals leading by 0x, such as 0x4142434445.)

128-Bit - For 128 bits WEP key, either 13 ASCII characters, such as ABCDEFGHIJKLM (or 26 hexadecimal digits leading by 0x, such as 0x4142434445464748494A4B4C4D).

Encryption Mode:

All wireless devices must support the same WEP encryption bit size and have the same key. Four keys can be entered here, but only one key can be selected at a time. The keys can be entered in ASCII or Hexadecimal. Check the key you wish to use.

5.13.4 Access Control

In the Access Control, the router may restrict wireless access to certain wireless clients only by locking their MAC address into a black or white list. The user may block wireless clients by inserting their MAC addresses into a black list, or only let them be able to connect by inserting their MAC addresses into a white list. In the Access Control web page, users may configure the white/black list modes used by each SSID and the MAC addresses applied to their lists.

Wireless LAN >> Access Control

Access Control

Enable Mac Address Filter ✓ SSID 1 White List ✓ SSID 2 White List ✓ ✓ SSID 3 White List ✓ SSID 4 White List ✓ MAC Address Filter Index Attribute MAC Address Apply SSID Client's MAC Address : □: □: □: □: □: □ Apply SSID : □ SSID 1 □ SSID 2 □ SSID 3 □ SSID 4 Attribute : □ s: Isolate the station from LAN Add Delete Edit Cancel

Enable Mac Access Filter

Select the access control filter type to be applied to wireless LAN identified with SSID 1 to 4 respectively.

MAC Address Filter

Display all access control entries that were inserted before.

Client's MAC Address

Manually enter the MAC address of wireless client.

Apply SSID

After entering the client's MAC address, check the box of the SSIDs desired to insert this MAC address into their access control list.

Attribute

s: Isolate the station from LAN - select to isolate the wireless client from the wired LAN network.

Add

Add a new access control entry into the list.

Delete

Delete the selected access control entry in the list.

Edit

Edit the selected access control entry in the list.

Cancel

Give up current modified settings.

OK

Click it to save the settings in access control list.

Clear All

Clean all entries in the MAC address list.

5.13.5 WPS

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) provides easy procedure to make network connection between wireless station and wireless access point (vigor router) with the encryption of WPA and WPA2.

graph LR
    A["Internet"] --> B["AP Router"]
    B --> C["Connection via WPS"]
    C --> D["Station"]
    D --> E["Wireless Card Installed"]
    B --> F["Set SSID and Encryption (WPA/WPA2)"]
    C --> G["PBC"]
    C --> H["PIN Code"]

Note: Such function is available for the wireless station with WPS supported.

It is the simplest way to build connection between wireless network clients and vigor router. Users do not need to select any encryption mode and type any long encryption passphrase to setup a wireless client every time. He/she only needs to press the WPS button on AP and selects that AP on the utility of wireless station. Then WPS will connect for client and router automatically.

There are two methods to do network connection through WPS between AP and Stations: pressing the Start PBC button or using PIN Code.

- On the side of VigorIPPBX 2820 series which served as an AP, press Wireless LAN ON/OFF/WPS button for 2 seconds to wait for client device making network connection through WPS or click Start PBC on web configuration interface. On the side of a station with network card installed, press Start PBC button of network card.

graph LR
    A["Start PBC"] --> B["Web Interface"]
    C["Wireless LAN ON/OFF/WPS"] --> D["Button on AP Router"]
    E["Start PBC"] --> F["WLAN Card"]
    G["PBC"] --> H["Signal waves from PBC to WLAN Card"]

- If you want to use PIN code, you have to know the PIN code specified in wireless client. Then provide the PIN code of the wireless client you wish to connect to the vigor router.

graph LR
    A["Start PIN"] --> B["PIN Code of Station"]
    C["Start PIN"] --> B
    D["Start PIN"] --> E["WLAN Card"]
    F["Start PIN"] --> E
    G["Start PIN"] --> H["Define a PIN Code"]

For WPS is supported in WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK mode, if you do not choose such mode in Wireless LAN>>Security, you will see the following message box.

Microsoft Internet Explorer WPS only supports in WPA/WPA2-PSK Mode. OK

Please click OK and go back Wireless LAN>>Security to choose WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK mode and access WPS again.

Below shows Wireless LAN>>WPS web page.

Wireless LAN >> WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)

Enable WPS

Wi-Fi Protected Setup Information

WPS Status	Configured
SSID	DrayTek
Authentication Mode	Disable

Device Configure

Configure via Push Button	Start PBC
Configure via Client PinCode		Start PIN

Status: The Authentication Mode is NOT WPA/WPA2 PSK!!

Note: WPS can help your wireless client automatically connect to the Access point.

: WPS is Disabled.
Q: WPS is Enabled.
: Waiting for WPS requests from wireless clients.

Enable WPS

Check this box to enable WPS setting.

WPS Status

Display related system information for WPS.

SSID

Display the SSID1 of the router. WPS is supported by SSID1 only.

Authentication Mode

Display current authentication mode of the router. Only WPA2/PSK and WPA/PSK support WPS.

Configure via Push Button

Click Start PBC to invoke Push-Button style WPS setup procedure. The router will wait for WPS requests from wireless clients about two minutes. The WPS LED on the router will blink fast when WPS is in progress. It will return to normal condition after two minutes. (You need to setup WPS within two minutes)

Configure via Client PinCode

Please input the PIN code specified in wireless client you wish to connect, and click Start PIN button. The WLAN LED on the router will blink fast when WPS is in progress. It will return to normal condition after two minutes. (You need to setup WPS within two minutes)

5.13.6 WDS

WDS means Wireless Distribution System. It is a protocol for connecting two access points (AP) wirelessly. Usually, it can be used for the following application:

• Provide bridge traffic between two LANs through the air.
- Extend the coverage range of a WLAN.

To meet the above requirement, two WDS modes are implemented in Vigor router. One is Bridge, the other is Repeater. Below shows the function of WDS-bridge interface:

graph TD
    A["LAN1"] -->|WDS Bridge Link| B["LAN2"]
    B -->|WDS Bridge Link| C["LAN3"]
    C -->|WDS Bridge Link| B
    B -->|WDS Bridge Link| A

The application for the WDS-Repeater mode is depicted as below:

graph LR
    A["Host with bridge Interface 1"] -->|WDS Link| B["Host with repeater Interface"]
    B -->|WDS Link| C["Host with bridge Interface 2"]
    C -->|WDS Link| A

The major difference between these two modes is that: while in Repeater mode, the packets received from one peer AP can be repeated to another peer AP through WDS links. Yet in Bridge mode, packets received from a WDS link will only be forwarded to local wired or wireless hosts. In other words, only Repeater mode can do WDS-to-WDS packet forwarding.

In the following examples, hosts connected to Bridge 1 or 3 can communicate with hosts connected to Bridge 2 through WDS links. However, hosts connected to Bridge 1 CANNOT communicate with hosts connected to Bridge 3 through Bridge 2.

graph TD
    A["Host with bridge Interface 1"] -->|WDS Link| B["Host with bridge Interface 2"]
    B -->|WDS Link| C["Host with bridge Interface 3"]
    C -->|No| D["Central Node"]
    style D fill:#ffcccc,stroke:#333

Click WDS from Wireless LAN menu. The following page will be shown.

WDS Settings

Set to Factory Default

Mode:

Security:

Disable

WEP

Pre-shared Key

WEP:

Use the same WEP key set in Security Settings.

Pre-shared Key:

Type:

TKIP

Key

Type 8\~63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal digits leading by "0x", for example "cfgs01a2..." or "0x655abcd...".

Bridge

Enable

Peer MAC Address

Grid of empty rectangular boxes with varying border styles, likely for counting or pattern recognition exercises.

Note: Disable unused links to get better performance.

Repeater

Enable

Access Point Function:

Enable

○ Disable

Status:

□ Send "Hello" message to peers.

Link Status

Note: The status is valid only when the peer also supports this function.

OK

Cancel

Mode

Choose the mode for WDS setting. Disable mode will not invoke any WDS setting. Bridge mode is designed to fulfill the first type of application. Repeater mode is for the second one.

Security

There are three types for security, Disable, WEP and Pre-shared key. The setting you choose here will make the following WEP or Pre-shared key field valid or not. Choose one of the types for the router.

WEP

Check this box to use the same key set in Security Settings page. If you did not set any key in Security Settings page, this check box will be dimmed.

Pre-shared Key

Type - Display the type of the PSK used by such device.

Key - Type 8 \~ 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal digits leading by "0x".

Bridge

If you choose Bridge as the connecting mode, please type in the peer MAC address in these fields. Four peer

	MAC addresses are allowed to be entered in this page at one time. Yet please disable the unused link to get better performance. If you want to invoke the peer MAC address, remember to check Enable box in the front of the MAC address after typing.
Repeater	If you choose Repeater as the connecting mode, please type in the peer MAC address in these fields. Four peer MAC addresses are allowed to be entered in this page at one time. Similarly, if you want to invoke the peer MAC address, remember to check Enable box in the front of the MAC address after typing.
Access Point Function	Click Enable to make this router serving as an access point; click Disable to cancel this function.
Status	It allows user to send “hello” message to peers. Yet, it is valid only when the peer also supports this function.

5.13.7 Advanced Setting

This page allows users to set advanced settings such as operation mode, channel bandwidth, guard interval, and aggregation MSDU for wireless data transmission.

Wireless LAN >> Advanced Setting

HT Physical Mode

Operation Mode	Mixed Mode Green Field
Channel Bandwidth	20 20/40
Guard Interval	long auto
Aggregation MSDU(A-MSDU)	Disable Enable

OK

Operation Mode

Mixed Mode – the router can transmit data with the ways supported in both 802.11a/b/g and 802.11n standards. However, the entire wireless transmission will be slowed down if 802.11g or 802.11b wireless client is connected.

Green Field - to get the highest throughput, please

choose such mode. Such mode can make the data transmission happening between 11n systems only. In addition, it does not have protection mechanism to avoid the conflict with neighboring devices of 802.11a/b/g.

Channel Bandwidth

20 - the router will use 20Mhz for data transmission and receiving between the AP and the stations.

20/40 - the router will use 20Mhz or 40Mhz for data transmission and receiving according to the station capability. Such channel can increase the performance for data transit.

Guard Interval

It is to assure the safety of propagation delays and reflections for the sensitive digital data. If you choose auto as guard interval, the AP router will choose short guard interval (increasing the wireless performance) or

long guard interval for data transmit based on the station capability.

Aggregation MSDU

Aggregation MSDU can combine frames with different sizes. It is used for improving MAC layer's performance for some brand's clients. The default setting is Enable.

5.13.8 AP Discovery

Vigor router can scan all regulatory channels and find working APs in the neighborhood. Based on the scanning result, users will know which channel is clean for usage. Also, it can be used to facilitate finding an AP for a WDS link. Notice that during the scanning process (about 5 seconds), no client is allowed to connect to Vigor.

This page is used to scan the existence of the APs on the wireless LAN. Yet, only the AP which is in the same channel of this router can be found. Please click Scan to discover all the connected APs.

Wireless LAN >> Access Point Discovery

Access Point List

BSSID Channel SSID Scan See Statistics. Note: During the scanning process (~5 seconds), no station is allowed to connect with the router. Add to WDS Settings : AP's MAC address : : : : : : : : : Add to Bridge Repeater

Scan

It is used to discover all the connected AP. The results will be shown on the box above this button.

Statistics

It displays the statistics for the channels used by APs.

Wireless LAN >> Site Survey Statistics

Recommended channels for usage: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 AP number v.s. Channel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Channel Cancel

Add to

If you want the found AP applying the WDS settings, please type in the AP's MAC address on the bottom of the page or choose the AP MAC address from the Scan

result field, and click Bridge or Repeater. Next, click Add to. Later, the MAC address of the AP will be added to Bridge or Repeater field of WDS settings page.

5.13.9 Station List

Station List provides the knowledge of connecting wireless clients now along with its status code. There is a code summary below for explanation. For convenient Access Control, you can select a WLAN station and click Add to Access Control below.

Wireless LAN >> Station List

Station List

Status

MAC Address

Associated with

Refresh

Status Codes :

C: Connected, No encryption.

E: Connected, WEP

P: Connected, WPA

A: Connected, WPA2.

B: Blocked by Access Control.

N: Connecting.

F: Fail to pass 802.1X or WPA/PSK authentication.

Note: After a station connects to the router successfully, it may be turned off without notice. In that case, it will still be on the list until the connection expires.

Add to Access Control :

Client's MAC address

Add

Refresh

Add

Click this button to refresh the status of station list.

Click this button to add current selected MAC address into Access Control.

5.14 USB Application

USB diskette can be regarded as a server. By way of Vigor router, clients on LAN can access, write and read data stored in USB diskette. After setting the configuration in USB

Application, you can type the IP address of the Vigor router and username/password created in USB Application>>USB User Management on the client software. Thus, the client can use the FTP site (USB diskette) or share the Samba service through Vigor router.

USB Application

USB General Settings
USB User Management
▶ File Explorer
USB Disk Status

5.14.1 USB General Settings

This page will determine the number of concurrent FTP connection, default charset for FTP server and enable Samba service. At present, the Vigor router can support USB storage disk with formats of FAT16 and FAT32 only. Therefore, before connecting the USB storage disk into the Vigor router, please make sure the memory format for the USB storage disk is FAT16 or FAT32. It is recommended for you to use FAT32 for viewing the filename completely (FAT16 cannot support long filename).

USB Application >> USB General Settings

USB General Settings

General Settings

Simultaneous FTP Connections

Default Charset

Samba Service Settings(Network Neighborhood)

Enable Disable

Access Mode

LAN Only LAN And WAN

NetBios Name Service

Workgroup Name

Host Name

Note: 1. If Charset is set to "default", only English long file name is supported.

1. Multi-session ftp download will be banned by Router FTP server. If your ftp client have multi-connection mechanism, such as FileZilla, you may limit client connections setting to 1 to get better performance.
2. A workgroup name must not be the same as the host name. The workgroup name and the host name can have as many as 15 characters and a host name can have as many as 23 characters, but both cannot contain any of the following: . ; : "< > * + = / \ | ?.

OK

General Settings

Simultaneous FTP Connections - This field is used to specify the quantity of the FTP sessions. The router allows up to 6 FTP sessions connecting to USB storage disk at one time.

Default Charset - At present, Vigor router supports three types of character sets: default, GB2312 and BIG5.

	Default Charset is for English based file name. For Simplified Chinese file/directory names, please choose GB2312; for Traditional Chinese file/directory names, choose BIG5.
Samba Service Settings	Click Enable to invoke samba service via the router.
Access Mode	LAN Only – Users coming from internet cannot connect to the samba server of the router.LAN And WAN - Both LAN and WAN users can access samba server of the router.
NetBios Name Service	For the NetBios service of USB storage disk, you have to specify a workgroup name and a host name. A workgroup name must not be the same as the host name. The workgroup name can have as many as 15 characters and the host name can have as many as 23 characters. Both them cannot contain any of the following--- ; : " <> * += \ | ?.Workgroup Name – Type a name for the workgroup.Host Name – Type the host name for the router.

5.14.2 USB User Management

This page allows you to set profiles for FTP/Samba users. Any user who wants to access into the USB storage disk must type the same username and password configured in this page. Before adding or modifying settings in this page, please insert a USB storage disk first. Otherwise, an error message will appear to warn you.

USB Application >> USB User Management

Index	Username	Home Folder	Index	Username	Home Folder
1.			9.
2.			10.
3.			11.
4.			12.
5.			13.
6.			14.
7.			15.
8.			16.

Click index number to access into configuration page.

Profile Index: 1

FTP/Samba User Username Password Confirm Password Home Folder Enable Disable (Maximum 11 Characters) Access Rule File Read Write Delete Directory List Create Remove

Note: The folder name can only contain the following characters: A-Z a-z 0-9 \$ % '- _ @ \~ ' ! ( ) / and space.

FTP/Samba User

Enable – Click this button to activate this profile (account) for FTP service or Samba User service. Later, the user can use the username specified in this page to login into FTP server.

Disable – Click this button to disable such profile.

Username

Type the username for FTP/Samba users for accessing into FTP server (USB storage disk). Be aware that users cannot access into USB storage disk in anonymity. Later, you can open FTP client software and type the username specified here for accessing into USB storage diskette.

Note: "Admin" could not be typed here as username, for the word is specified for accessing into web pages of Vigor router only. Also, it is reserved for FTP firmware upgrade usage.

Note: FTP Passive mode is not supported by Vigor Router.

Please disable the mode on the FTP client.

Password

Type the password for FTP/Samba users for accessing FTP server. Later, you can open FTP client software and type the password specified here for accessing into USB storage disk.

Confirm Password

Type the password again to make confirmation.

Home Folder

It determines the folder for the client to access into.

The user can enter a directory name in this field. Then, after clicking OK, the router will create the specific/new folder in the USB storage disk. In addition, if the user types “/” here, he/she can access into all of the disk folders and files in USB storage disk.

Note: When write protect status for the USB storage disk is ON, you cannot type any new folder name in this field. Only “/” can be used in such case.

You can click 📋 to open the following dialog to add any new folder which can be specified as the Home Folder.

USB User Management Choose Folder Folder Name Create New Home Folder Folder Name: test Create Note: The folder name can only contain the following characters; A-Z a-z 0-9 $ % ' - _ @ ~ ' 1 ( ) and space, Only 11 characters are allowed.

Access Rule

It determines the authority for such profile. Any user, who uses such profile for accessing into USB storage disk, must follow the rule specified here.

File – Check the items (Read, Write and Delete) for such profile.

Directory -Check the items (List, Create and Remove) for such profile.

Before you click OK, you have to insert a USB diskette into the USB interface of the Vigor router. Otherwise, you cannot save the configuration.

5.14.3 File Explorer

To review the content of USB diskette via USB port of the router, please open USB Application Explorer to browse the files.

USB Application >> File Explorer

File Explorer Current Path: / Name Size Delete Rename Upload File Select a file: Browse... Upload

Note: The folder can not be deleted when it is not empty.

Refresh Click this icon to refresh files list.

Back Click this icon to return to the upper directory.

Create Click this icon to add a new folder.

Current Path Display current folder.

Upload Click this button to upload the selected file to the USB

diskette. The uploaded file in the USB diskette can be shared for other user through FTP.

USB Application >> File Explorer

File Explorer
	Name	Size	Delete	Rename
public			✘
GBK2Uni.dat		128 KB	✘
Uni2Big.dat		128 KB	✘
Uni2GBK.dat		128 KB	✘
MSN_MAIN_0.xml		14 KB	✘
MSDOS.SYS		1 KB	✘
NTDETECT.COM		46 KB	✘
openssl_多CN.zip		585 KB	✘
SmartStartTime.txt		2 KB	✘
SmartVPNv350.rar		565 KB	✘
v2820pbx_g729_sysprompt.ivr		123 KB	✘
v2820pbx_sysprompt.ivr		978 KB	✘
BY.rar		5,039 KB	✘
NewCert222.der		1 KB	✘
SyslogRC6c.exe		1,252 KB	✘
SyslogRd.exe		1,252 KB	✘
SyslogRd1.exe		1,252 KB	✘
tools_21.6mb.zip		18,223 KB	✘
sadfsafd.ea		5,430 KB	✘
bootfont.bin		315 KB	✘
EConfickerRemover.exe		119 KB	✘
fat32format.exe		48 KB	✘
fraggle.exe		18 KB	✘
fraggle2.exe		18 KB	✘
GLF1D63.tmp		10 KB	✘

Upload File Select a file: Browse... Upload

5.14.4 Disk Status

This page is to monitor the status for the users who accessing into FTP or Samba server (USB diskette) via the Vigor router. If you want to remove the diskette from USB port in router, please click Disconnect USB Disk first. And then, remove the USB diskette later.

USB Application >> USB Disk Status

USB Mass Storage Device Status

Connection Status: Disk Connected

Write Protect Status: No

Disk Capacity: 2009 MB

Free Capacity: 1562 MB Refresh

FTP & SMB Users Connected

Index

Service

IP Address(Port)

Disconnect USB Disk

Refresh

Username

Note: If the write protect switch of USB disk is turned on, the USB disk is in READ-ONLY mode. No data can be written to it.

Connection Status

If there is no USB diskette connected to Vigor router, "No Disk Connected" will be shown here.

Write Protect Status Display current status if such USB disk is protected (data not allowed to be written in) or not.

Disk Capacity

It displays the total capacity of the USB diskette.

Free Capacity

It displays the free space of the USB diskette. Click Refresh at any time to get new status for free capacity.

Index It displays the number of the client which connecting to FTP server.

Service It displays the server (FTP or SMB) that the client wants to connect.

IP Address (Port) It displays the IP address of the user's host which connecting to the FTP server.

Username It displays the username that user uses to login to the FTP server.

When you insert USB diskette into the Vigor router, the system will start to find out such device within several seconds.

5.15 System Maintenance

For the system setup, there are several items that you have to know the way of configuration: Status, Administrator Password, Configuration Backup, Syslog, Time setup, Reboot System, and Firmware Upgrade.

Below shows the menu items for System Maintenance.

System Maintenance ► System Status ► TR-069 ► Administrator Password ► Configuration Backup ► SysLog / Mail Alert ► Time and Date ► Management ► Reboot System ► Firmware Upgrade ► Activation

5.15.1 System Status

The System Status provides basic network settings of Vigor router. It includes LAN and WAN interface information. Also, you could get the current running firmware version or firmware related information from this presentation.

System Status

Model Name	:VigorIPPBX 2820
Firmware Version	:3.5.5.1_RC8
Build Date/Time	:Nov 23 2010 15:08:33
ADSL Firmware Version	:211011_A Hardware: Annex A

LAN
MAC Address	: 00-50-7F-68-F8-00
1st IP Address	: 192.168.1.1
1st Subnet Mask	: 255.255.255.0
DHCP Server	: Yes
DNS	: 172.16.3.18

WAN 1
Link Status	: Disconnected
MAC Address	: 00-50-7F-68-F8-01
Connection	: PPPoE
IP Address	: ---
Default Gateway	: ---

SIP Trunk/PBX SYSTEM
Index	Profile	Status
1.	---	---
2.	---	---
3.	---	---
4.	---	---
5.	---	---
6.	---	---
WAN side registration : Disable

WAN 2
Link Status	: Connected
MAC Address	: 00-50-7F-68-F8-02
Connection	: Static IP
IP Address	: 172.16.3.102
Default Gateway	: 172.16.1.1

Wireless LAN
MAC Address	: 00-50-7F-68-F8-00
Frequency Domain	: Europe
Firmware Version	: 1.8.1.0
SSID	: DrayTek

Model Name Display the model name of the router.

Firmware Version Display the firmware version of the router.

Build Date/Time Display the date and time of the current firmware build.

ADSL Firmware Version Display the ADSL firmware version.

LAN----

MAC Address Display the MAC address of the LAN Interface.

1^st IP Address	Display the IP address of the LAN interface.
1^st Subnet Mask	Display the subnet mask address of the LAN interface.
DHCP Server	Display the current status of DHCP server of the LAN interface.
DNS	Display the assigned IP address of the primary DNS.
WAN----
Link Status	Display current connection status.
MAC Address	Display the MAC address of the WAN Interface.
Connection	Display the connection type.
IP Address	Display the IP address of the WAN interface.
Default Gateway	Display the assigned IP address of the default gateway.
SIP Trunk----
Index/Profile/Status	Display current status for SIP profiles.
WAN side registration	Display the status for WAN side registration.
	Disable - the SIP device is not allowed to register from WAN side.
Wireless LAN----
MAC Address	Display the MAC address of the WLAN Interface.
Frequency Domain	It can be Europe (13 usable channels), USA (11 usable channels) etc. The available channels supported by the wireless products in different countries are various.
Firmware Version	It indicates information about equipped WLAN miniPC card. This also helps to provide availability of some features that are bound with some WLAN miniPCi.
SSID	Display the SSID of the router.

5.15.2 TR-069

This device supports TR-069 standard. It is very convenient for an administrator to manage a TR-069 device through an Auto Configuration Server, e.g., VigorACS.

System Maintenance >> TR-069 Setting

ACS and CPE Settings

ACS Server On Internet ACS Server URL Username Password CPE Client Enable Disable URL http://172.16.3.229:8069/cwm/CRN.html Port 8069 Username vigor Password

Periodic Inform Settings

Disable Enable Interval Time 900 second(s) OK

ACS Server On

Choose the interface for the router connecting to ACS server.

ACS Server On

ACS Server

URL/Username/Password – Such data must be typed according to the ACS (Auto Configuration Server) you want to link. Please refer to Auto Configuration Server user's manual for detailed information.

CPE Client

It is not necessary for you to type them. Such information is useful for Auto Configuration Server.

Enable/Disable – Sometimes, port conflict might be

occurred. To solve such problem, you might want to change port number for CPE. Please click Enable and change the port number.

Periodic Inform Settings

The default setting is Enable. Please set interval time or schedule time for the router to send notification to CPE. Or click Disable to close the mechanism of notification.

5.15.3 Administrator Password

This page allows you to set new password.

System Maintenance >> Administrator Password Setup

Administrator Password

Old Password New Password Confirm Password

OK

Old Password

Type in the old password. The factory default setting for password is blank.

New Password

Type in new password in this filed.

Confirm Password

Type in the new password again.

When you click OK, the login window will appear. Please use the new password to access into the web configurator again.

5.15.4 Configuration Backup

Backup the Configuration

Follow the steps below to backup your configuration.

1. Go to System Maintenance >> Configuration Backup. The following windows will be popped-up, as shown below.

System Maintenance >> Configuration Backup

Configuration Backup / Restoration

Restoration Select a configuration file. Browse Click Restore to upload the file. Restore Backup Click Backup to download current running configurations as a file. Backup Cancel

1. Click Backup button to get into the following dialog. Click Save button to open another dialog for saving configuration as a file.

File Download You are downloading the file: config.cfg from 192.168.1.1 Would you like to open the file or save it to your computer? Open Save Cancel More Info ✓ Always ask before opening this type of file

1. In Save As dialog, the default filename is config.cfg. You could give it another name by yourself.

Save As Save in: Desktop My Documents My Computer My Network Places RVS-COM Lite Annex A mmm MWSnap300 TeleDanmark Tools config v2k2_232_config_1 v2k6_250_config_1 File name: config Save as type: Configuration file Save Cancel

1. Click Save button, the configuration will download automatically to your computer as a file named config.cfg.

The above example is using Windows platform for demonstrating examples. The Mac or Linux platform will appear different windows, but the backup function is still available.

Note: Backup for Certification must be done independently. The Configuration Backup does not include information of Certificate.

Restore Configuration

1. Go to System Maintenance >> Configuration Backup. The following windows will be popped-up, as shown below.

System Maintenance >> Configuration Backup

Configuration Backup / Restoration Restoration Select a configuration file. Browse.. Click Restore to upload the file. Restore Backup Click Backup to download current running configurations as a file. Backup Cancel

1. Click Browse button to choose the correct configuration file for uploading to the router.

2. Click Restore button and wait for few seconds, the following picture will tell you that the restoration procedure is successful.

5.15.5 Syslog/Mail Alert

SysLog function is provided for users to monitor router. There is no bother to directly get into the Web Configurator of the router or borrow debug equipments.

System Maintenance >> SysLog / Mail Alert Setup

SysLog / Mail Alert Setup

SysLog Access Setup Enable Syslog Save to: Syslog Server USB Disk Router Name Server IP Address Destination Port 514 Enable syslog message: Firewall Log VPN Log User Access Log Call Log WAN Log Router/DSL information Mail Alert Setup Enable SMTP Server Mail To Return-Path Authentication User Name Password Enable E-Mail Alert: DoS Attack IM-P2P Send a test e-mail

Enable	Check Enable to activate function of syslog.
Syslog Save to	Check Syslog Server to save the log to Syslog directly.Check USB Disk to save the log to the attached USB diskette.
Router Name	Type in the router name provided by ISP.
Server IP Address	The IP address of the Syslog server.
Destination Port	Assign a port for the Syslog protocol.
Enable syslog message	Check the box listed on this web page to send the corresponding message of firewall, VPN, User Access, Call, WAN, Router/DSL information to Syslog.
Enable (Alert Setup...)	Check Enable to activate function of mail alert.
Send a test e-mail	Make a simple test for the e-mail address specified in this page. Please assign the mail address first and click this button to execute a test for verify the mail address is available or not.
SMTP Server	The IP address of the SMTP server.
Mail To	Assign a mail address for sending mails out.
Return-Path	Assign an e-mail address of another mailbox to accept all returned messages if fatal problems occur at the recipient mailbox.The e-mail address typed here also acts as the Sender address while Vigor sends out the alert e-mails.
Authentication	Check this box to activate this function while using e-mail application.
User Name	Type the user name for authentication.
Password	Type the password for authentication.
Enable E-mail Alert	Check the box to send alert message to the e-mail box while the modem detecting the item(s) you specify here.
	DoS AttackIM-P2P

Click OK to save these settings.

For viewing the Syslog, please do the following:

1. Just set your monitor PC's IP address in the field of Server IP Address
2. Install the Router Tools in the Utility within provided CD. After installation, click on the Router Tools>>Syslog from program menu.

Router Tools V3.5.1 About Router Tools Firmware Upgrade Utility Syslog Uninstall Router Tools V3.5.1 Visit DrayTek Web Site

1. From the Syslog screen, select the router you want to monitor. Be reminded that in Network Information, select the network adapter used to connect to the router. Otherwise, you won't succeed in retrieving information from the router.

DrayTek Sylog 3.6.1 Controls 192.168.1.1 Vigor series LAN Status TX Packets RX Packets 1693 1470 WAN Status Gateway IP (Fixed) TX Packets TX Rate ... 0 0 WAN IP (Fixed) RX Packets RX Rate ... 0 0 Firewall Log VPN Log User Access Log Call Log WAN Log Others Network Information Net State On Line Routers IP Address Mask MAC 192.168.1.1 255.255.2... 00-50-7F-54-6 Refresh Host Name: vivian NIC Description: SIS 900-Based PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter - Packet Sc NIC Information MAC Address: 00-11-D8-E4-58-CE Default Getaway: 192.168.1.1 IP Address: 192.168.1.10 DHCP Server: 192.168.1.1 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 Lease Obtained: Mon Jan 22 01:28:23 2007 DNS Servers: 168.95.1.1 Lease Expires: Thu Jan 25 01:28:23 2007 ADSL Status Mode State Up Speed Down Speed SNR Margin Loop AP

5.15.6 Time and Date

It allows you to specify where the time of the router should be inquired from.

System Maintenance >> Time and Date

Time Information

Current System Time 2007 Jun 28 Thu 5 : 53 : 42 Inquire Time

Time Setup

Use Browser Time Use Internet Time Client Time Protocol NTP (RFC-1305) Server IP Address pool.ntp.org Time Zone (GMT) Greenwich Mean Time : Dublin Enable Daylight Saving Automatically Update Interval 30 min

Current System Time

Click Inquire Time to get the current time.

Use Browser Time

Select this option to use the browser time from the remote administrator PC host as router's system time.

Use Internet Time

Select to inquire time information from Time Server on the Internet using assigned protocol.

Time Protocol

Select a time protocol.

Server IP Address

Type the IP address of the time server.

Time Zone

Select the time zone where the router is located.

Enable Daylight Saving

Check this box to enable daylight saving. Such function is useful for certain areas.

Automatically Update Interval

Select a time interval for updating from the NTP server.

Click OK to save these settings.

5.15.7 Management

This page allows you to manage the settings for access control, access list, port setup, and SMP setup. For example, as to management access control, the port number is used to send/receive SIP message for building a session. The default value is 5060 and this must match with the peer Registrar when making VoIP calls.

System Maintenance >> Management

Management Setup

Router Name Management Port Setup User Define Ports Default Ports Telenet Port 23 (Default: 23) HTTP Port 80 (Default: 80) HTTPS Port 443 (Default: 443) FTP Port 21 (Default: 21) SSH Port 22 (Default: 22) Disable PING from the Internet SNMP Setup Enable SNMP Agent Get Community public Set Community private Manager Host IP Trap Community public Notification Host IP Trap Timeout 10 seconds Access List List IP Subnet Mask 1 2 3

OK

Router Name	Type in the router name provided by ISP.
Allow management from the Internet	Enable the checkbox to allow system administrators to login from the Internet. There are several servers provided by the system to allow you managing the router from Internet.Check the box(es) to specify.
Disable PING from the Internet	Check the checkbox to reject all PING packets from the Internet. For security issue, this function is enabled by default.
Access List	You could specify that the system administrator can only login from a specific host or network defined in the list. A maximum of three IPs/subnet masks is allowed.List IP - Indicate an IP address allowed to login to the router.Subnet Mask - Represent a subnet mask allowed to login to the router.
Default Ports	Check to use standard port numbers for the Telnet and HTTP servers.
User Defined Ports	Check to specify user-defined port numbers for the Telnet, HTTP and FTP servers.
Enable SNMP Agent	Check it to enable this function.
Get Community	Set the name for getting community by typing a proper character. The default setting is public.
Set Community	Set community by typing a proper name. The default setting is private.
Manager Host IP	Set one host as the manager to execute SNMP function. Please type in IP address to specify certain host.
Trap Community	Set trap community by typing a proper name. The default setting is public.
Notification Host IP	Set the IP address of the host that will receive the trap community.
Trap Timeout	The default setting is 10 seconds.

5.15.8 Reboot System

The Web Configurator may be used to restart your router. Click Reboot System from System Maintenance to open the following page.

System Maintenance >> Reboot System

Reboot System

Do you want to reboot your router?

Using current configuration
○ Using factory default configuration

Reboot Now

Auto Reboot Time Schedule

Index(1-15) in Schedule Setup:

Note: Action and Idle Timeout settings will be ignored.

OK

Cancel

Index (1-15) in Schedule Setup - You can type in four sets of time schedule for performing system reboot. All the schedules can be set previously in Applications >> Schedule web page and you can use the number that you have set in that web page.

If you want to reboot the router using the current configuration, check Using current configuration and click OK. To reset the router settings to default values, check Using factory default configuration and click OK. The router will take 5 seconds to reboot the system.

Note: When the system pops up Reboot System web page after you configure web settings, please click OK to reboot your router for ensuring normal operation and preventing unexpected errors of the router in the future.

5.15.9 Firmware Upgrade

Before upgrading your router firmware, you need to install the Router Tools. The Firmware Upgrade Utility is included in the tools. The following web page will guide you to upgrade firmware by using an example. Note that this example is running over Windows OS (Operating System).

Download the newest firmware from DrayTek's web site or FTP site. The DrayTek web site is www.draytek.com (or local DrayTek's web site) and FTP site is ftp.draytek.com.

Click System Maintenance>> Firmware Upgrade to launch the Firmware Upgrade Utility.

System Maintenance >> Firmware Upgrade

Web Firmware Upgrade

Select a firmware file.

Browse.

Click Upgrade to upload the file.

Upgrade

TFTP Firmware Upgrade from LAN

Current Firmware Version: 3.5.5.1_RC8

Firmware Upgrade Procedures:

1. Click "OK" to start the TFTP server.
2. Open the Firmware Upgrade Utility or other 3-party TFTP client software.
3. Check that the firmware filename is correct.
4. Click "Upgrade" on the Firmware Upgrade Utility to start the upgrade.
5. After the upgrade is complete, the TFTP server will automatically stop running.

Do you want to upgrade firmware?

OK

Click OK. The following screen will appear. Please execute the firmware upgrade utility first.

System Maintenance >> Firmware Upgrade

TFTP server is running. Please execute a Firmware Upgrade Utility software to upgrade router's firmware. This server will be closed by itself when the firmware upgrading finished.

5.15.10 Activation

There are three ways to activate WCF on vigor router, using Service Activation Wizard, by means of CSM>>Web Content Filter Profile or via System Maintenance>>Activation.

After you have finished the setting profiles for WCF, it is the time to activate the mechanism for your computer.

Click System Maintenance>>Activation to open the following page for accessing http://myvigor.draytek.com.

Note: Such service mechanism is powered by Commtouch.

System Maintenance >> Activation Activate via interface : auto-selected

Web-Filter License

[Status: Not Activated]

Activate

Authentication Message

Note: If you want to use email alert or syslog, please configure the SysLog/ Mail Alert Setup page. If you change the service provider, the configuration of the function will be reset.

OK Cancel

Activate via Interface

Choose WAN interface used by such device for activating Web Content Filter.

Activate via interface : WAN 1 auto-selected WAN 1 WAN 2

Activate

The Activate link brings you accessing into www.vigorpro.com to finish the activation of the account and the router.

Authentication Message

As for authentication information of web filter, the process of authenticating will be displayed on this field for your reference.

Below shows the successful activation of Web Content Filter:

System Maintenance >> Activation

Activate via interface : WAN 1

Web-Filter License

Activate

[Status:Commtouch] [Start Date:2010-07-27 Expire Date:2010-08-27]

Authentication Message

Activated Wiz, Activated Wizard query license status Successful, 2010-03-15 07:28:20

Note: If you want to use email alert or syslog, please configure the SysLog/Mail Alert Setup page. If you change the service provider, the configuration of the function will be reset.

OK

Cancel

Status

Display the mechanism (represented with code number, e.g., CT-CF) adopted by such router.

Start Date

Display the starting date of WCF license activated successfully.

Expire Date

Display the ending date of WCF license activated successfully.

Activate

Click this link to access into http://myvigor.draytek.com for activating WCF function.

5.16 Diagnostics

Diagnostic Tools provide a useful way to view or diagnose the status of your Vigor router. Below shows the menu items for Diagnostics.

Diagnostics

▶ Dial-out Trigger
Routing Table
▶ ARP Cache Table
DHCP Table
NAT Sessions Table
▶ Ping Diagnosis
Data Flow Monitor
▶ Traffic Graph
Trace Route

5.16.1 Dial-out Trigger

Click Diagnostics and click Dial-out Trigger to open the web page. The internet connection (e.g., ISDN, PPPoE, PPPoA, etc) is triggered by a package sending from the source IP address.

Diagnostics >> Dial-out Trigger

Dial-out Triggered Packet Header | Refresh |
HEX Format:
00 50 7F 00 00 00-00 0E A6 2A D5 A1-08 00
45 00 00 30 89 C9 40 00-7F 06 80 01 C0 A8 01 0A
41 36 EF 14 08 A4 07 47-33 20 94 D1 00 00 00 00
70 02 FF FF B9 45 00 00-02 04 05 B4 01 01 04 02
BE 9C 80 C9 9F A8 80 5B-3D D9 80 19 84 68 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00-00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Decoded Format:
192.168.1.10,2212 -> 65.54.239.20,1863
Pr tcp HLen 20 TLen 48 -S Seq 857773265 Ack O Win 65535 

Decoded Format It shows the source IP address (local), destination IP

(remote) address, the protocol and length of the package.

Refresh Click it to reload the page.

5.16.2 Routing Table

Click Diagnostics and click Routing Table to open the web page.

Diagnostics >> View Routing Table

Current Running Routing Table
Key: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, * - default, ~ - private
* 0.0.0.0/ 0.0.0.0 via 172.16.3.4, WAN2
C~ 192.168.1.0/ 255.255.255.0 is directly connected, LAN
C 172.16.0.0/ 255.255.0.0 is directly connected, WAN2 

Refresh Click it to reload the page.

5.16.3 ARP Cache Table

Click Diagnostics and click ARP Cache Table to view the content of the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) cache held in the router. The table shows a mapping between an Ethernet hardware address (MAC Address) and an IP address.

Diagnostics >> View ARP Cache Table

IP Address	MAC Address
192.158.1.10	00-CE-A6-2A-D5-A1
172.15.2.240	00-05-5D-04-D2-C0
172.15.2.194	00-50-7F-33-31-E9
172.15.3.237	00-0C-6E-D0-CA-63
172.15.3.222	00-50-7F-1A-59-11
172.15.2.209	00-07-40-82-13-77
172.15.3.181	00-50-7F-1A-58-CF
172.15.2.238	00-50-7F-C0-29-1D
172.15.2.62	00-50-7F-26-6E-21
172.15.3.201	00-50-7F-1C-49-E5
220.130.52.220	00-50-7F-C1-06-4D
172.15.3.115	00-1A-92-92-E8-1D
172.15.2.114	00-50-7F-C0-25-BD
172.15.3.134	00-50-7F-33-31-E3
172.15.2.229	00-50-7F-F0-00-5E

Refresh Click it to reload the page.

Clear Click it to clear the whole table.

5.16.4 DHCP Table

The facility provides information on IP address assignments. This information is helpful in diagnosing network problems, such as IP address conflicts, etc.

Click Diagnostics and click DHCP Table to open the web page.

Diagnostics >> View DHCP Assigned IP Addresses

DHCP IP Assignment Table DHCP server: Running Index IP Address MAC Address Leased Time HOST ID 1 192.168.1.10 00-0E-A6-2A-D5-A1 0:00:06.820 ok-lccgjyiy075u

Index It displays the connection item number.

IP Address It displays the IP address assigned by this router for specified PC.

MAC Address It displays the MAC address for the specified PC that DHCP assigned IP address for it.

Leased Time It displays the leased time of the specified PC.

HOST ID It displays the host ID name of the specified PC.

Refresh Click it to reload the page.

5.16.5 NAT Sessions Table

Click Diagnostics and click NAT Sessions Table to open the setup page.

Diagnostics >> NAT Sessions Table

Private IP :Port #Pseudo Port			Peer IP :Port Interface
192.168.1.10	2473	52059	207.46.106.51	1863	VAN2
192.168.1.10	2476	52062	207.46.26.253	7001	VAN2
192.168.1.10	2477	52063	207.46.26.254	7001	VAN2
192.168.1.10	2477	52063	207.46.26.254	9	VAN2
192.168.1.10	2477	52063	207.46.26.253	7001	VAN2
192.168.1.10	2478	52064	207.68.178.16	80	VAN2
192.168.1.10	2479	52065	207.68.178.16	80	VAN2

Private IP:Port	It indicates the source IP address and port of local PC.
#Pseudo Port	It indicates the temporary port of the router used for NAT.
Peer IP:Port	It indicates the destination IP address and port of remote host.
Interface	It displays the representing number for different interface.
Refresh	Click it to reload the page.

5.16.6 Ping Diagnosis

Click Diagnostics and click Ping Diagnosis to pen the web page.

Diagnostics >> Ping Diagnosis

Ping Diagnosis

Note: If you want to ping a LAN PC or you don't want to specify which WAN to ping through, please select "Unspecified". Ping through: Unspecified Ping to: Host / IP Host / IP Gateway 1 Gateway 2 DNS IP Address: Run Result | Clear |

Ping through

Use the drop down list to choose the WAN interface that you want to ping through or choose Unspecified to be determined by the router automatically.

Ping through:	Unspecified
	Unspecified
	WAN1
	WAN2

Ping to	Use the drop down list to choose the destination that you want to ping.
IP Address	Type in the IP address of the Host/IP that you want to ping.
Run	Click this button to start the ping work. The result will be displayed on the screen.
Clear	Click this link to remove the result on the window.

5.16.7 Data Flow Monitor

This page displays the running procedure for the IP address monitored and refreshes the data in an interval of several seconds. The IP address listed here is configured in Bandwidth Management. You have to enable IP bandwidth limit and IP session limit before invoke Data Flow Monitor. If not, a notification dialog box will appear to remind you enabling it.

Click Diagnostics and click Data Flow Monitor to open the web page. You can click IP Address, TX rate, RX rate or Session link for arranging the data display.

Diagnostics >> Data Flow Monitor

Index	IP Address	TX rate(Kbps)	RX rate(Kbps)	Sessions	Action
		Current / Peak / Speed	Current / Peak / Speed	Current / Peak
WAN1	---	0 / 0 / Auto	0 / 0 / Auto	---
WAN2	192.168.5.20	1 / 1401 / Auto	1 / 2124 / Auto	---
Total		1 / 1401 / Auto	1 / 2124 / Auto	9 / 85

Note: 1. Click "Block" to prevent specified PC from surfing Internet for 5 minutes.

1. The IP blocked by the router will be shown in red, and the session column will display the remaining time that the specified IP will be blocked.

2. (Kbps): shared bandwidth + : residual bandwidth used Current/Peak are average.

Enable Data Flow Monitor Check this box to enable this function.

Refresh Seconds Use the drop down list to choose the time interval of

refreshing data flow that will be done by the system automatically.

Refresh Seconds:

Refresh

Click this link to refresh this page manually.

Index

Display the number of the data flow.

IP Address

Display the IP address of the monitored device.

TX rate (kbps)

Display the transmission speed of the monitored device.

RX rate (kbps)

Display the receiving speed of the monitored device.

Sessions

Display the session number that you specified in Limit Session web page.

Action

Block - can prevent specified PC accessing into Internet within 5 minutes.

page: 1 Refresh ps) ▼ Sessions Action 7 Block

Unblock – the device with the IP address will be blocked

in five minutes. The remaining time will be shown on the session column.

page: 1 Sessions blocked / 298 Action Unblock

5.16.8 Traffic Graph

Click Diagnostics and click Traffic Graph to pen the web page. Choose WAN1 Bandwidth/WAN2 Bandwidth, Sessions, daily or weekly for viewing different traffic graph. Click Refresh to renew the graph at any time.

Diagnostics >> Traffic Graph

5.16.9 Trace Route

Click Diagnostics and click Trace Route to open the web page. This page allows you to trace the routes from router to the host. Simply type the IP address of the host in the box and click Run. The result of route trace will be shown on the screen.

Diagnostics >> Trace Route

Trace Route Trace through: Unspecified Protocol: ICMP Host / IP Address: Run Result Clear

Trace through

Use the drop down list to choose the WAN interface that you want to ping through or choose Unspecified to be determined by the router automatically.

Protocol Choose a protocol (ICMP or UDP) for such route.

Host/IP Address It indicates the IP address of the host.

Run Click this button to start route tracing work.

Clear Click this link to remove the result on the window.

This page is left blank.

Chapter 6: Trouble Shooting

This section will guide you to solve abnormal situations if you cannot access into the Internet after installing the router and finishing the web configuration. Please follow sections below to check your basic installation status stage by stage.

• Checking if the hardware status is OK or not.
• Checking if the network connection settings on your computer are OK or not.
  ● Pinging the router from your computer.
• Checking if the ISP settings are OK or not.
  ● Backing to factory default setting if necessary.

If all above stages are done and the router still cannot run normally, it is the time for you to contact your dealer for advanced help.

6.1 Checking If the Hardware Status Is OK or Not

Follow the steps below to verify the hardware status.

1. Check the power line and WLAN/LAN cable connections. Refer to "1.3 Hardware Installation" for details.

2. Turn on the router. Make sure the ACT LED blink once per second and the correspondent LAN LED is bright.

ACT BrayTek Factory Reset ACT VPN Line USB DSL Phone CSM WAN2 QoS ISDN1 ISDN2 Phone

1. If not, it means that there is something wrong with the hardware status. Simply back to "1.3 Hardware Installation" to execute the hardware installation again. And then, try again.

6.2 Checking If the Network Connection Settings on Your Computer Is OK or Not

Sometimes the link failure occurs due to the wrong network connection settings. After trying the above section, if the link is stilled failed, please do the steps listed below to make sure the network connection settings is OK.

For Windows

The example is based on Windows XP. As to the examples for other operation systems, please refer to the similar steps or find support notes in www.draytek.com.

1. Go to Control Panel and then double-click on Network Connections.

Network Connections

1. Right-click on Local Area Connection and click on Properties.

Disable Status Repair Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Delete Rename Properties

1. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and then click Properties.

eth0 Properties General Authentication Advanced Connect using: ASUSTeK/Broadcom 440x 10/100 Ir Configure... This connection uses the following items: ✓ Client for Microsoft Networks ✓ File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks ✓ QoS Packet Scheduler ✓ Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Install... Uninstall Properties Description Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks. ✓ Show icon in notification area when connected ✓ Notify me when this connection has limited or no connectivity OK Cancel

1. Select Obtain an IP address automatically and Obtain DNS server address automatically.

Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties General Alternate Configuration You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability. Otherwise, you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings. Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address: IP address: Subnet mask: Default gateway. Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses: Preferred DNS server: Alternate DNS server: Advanced... OK Cancel

For MacOS

1. Double click on the current used MacOs on the desktop.
2. Open the Application folder and get into Network.
3. On the Network screen, select Using DHCP from the drop down list of Configure IPv4.

Network Show All Displays Sound Network Startup Disk Location: Automatic Show: Built-in Ethernet TCP/IP PPPoE AppleTalk Proxies Ethernet Configure IPv4: Using DHCP IP Address: 192.168.1.10 Renew DHCP Lease Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 DHCP Client ID: Router: 192.168.1.1 (If required) DNS Servers: Search Domains: IPv6 Address: fe80:0000:0000:0000:020a:95ff:fe8d:72e4 Configure IPv6... Click the lock to prevent further changes. Assist me... Apply Now

6.3 Pinging the Router from Your Computer

The default gateway IP address of the router is 192.168.1.1. For some reason, you might need to use “ping” command to check the link status of the router. The most important thing is that the computer will receive a reply from 192.168.1.1. If not, please check the IP address of your computer. We suggest you setting the network connection as get IP automatically. (Please refer to the section 6.2)

Please follow the steps below to ping the router correctly.

For Windows

1. Open the Command Prompt window (from Start menu> Run).

2. Type command (for Windows 95/98/ME) or cmd (for Windows NT/ 2000/XP/Vista). The DOS command dialog will appear.

Microsoft Windows XP [Version 5.1.2600] (C) Copyright 1985-2001 Microsoft Corp. D:\Documents and Settings\fae>ping 192.168.1.1 Pinging 192.168.1.1 with 32 bytes of data: Reply from 192.168.1.1: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=255 Reply from 192.168.1.1: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=255 Reply from 192.168.1.1: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=255 Reply from 192.168.1.1: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=255 Ping statistics for 192.168.1.1: Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 <0% loss>, Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds: Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms D:\Documents and Settings\fae>

1. Type ping 192.168.1.1 and press [Enter]. If the link is OK, the line of "Reply from 192.168.1.1:bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=255" will appear.

2. If the line does not appear, please check the IP address setting of your computer.

For Mac OS (Terminal)

1. Double click on the current used Mac OS on the desktop.

2. Open the Application folder and get into Utilities.

3. Double click Terminal. The Terminal window will appear.

4. Type ping 192.168.1.1 and press [Enter]. If the link is OK, the line of "64 bytes from 192.168.1.1: icmp_seq=0 ttl=255 time=xxxx ms" will appear.

Terminal — bash — 80x24 Last login: Sat Jan 3 02:24:18 on ttyp1 Welcome to Darwin! Vigor10:~ draytek$ ping 192.168.1.1 PING 192.168.1.1 (192.168.1.1): 56 data bytes 64 bytes from 192.168.1.1: icmp_seq=0 ttl=255 time=0.755 ms 64 bytes from 192.168.1.1: icmp_seq=1 ttl=255 time=0.697 ms 64 bytes from 192.168.1.1: icmp_seq=2 ttl=255 time=0.716 ms 64 bytes from 192.168.1.1: icmp_seq=3 ttl=255 time=0.731 ms 64 bytes from 192.168.1.1: icmp_seq=4 ttl=255 time=0.72 ms ^C --- 192.168.1.1 ping statistics --- 5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max = 0.697/0.723/0.755 ms Vigor10:~ draytek$

6.4 Checking If the ISP Settings are OK or Not

Click WAN>> Internet Access and then check whether the ISP settings are set correctly. Click WAN1 or WAN2 link to review the settings that you configured previously.

WAN >> Internet Access

Internet Access

Index	Display Name	Physical Mode	Config Information
WAN1		ADSL	Channel: 1, VPI: 0, VCI: 33, Protocol: PPPoE/LLC/SNAP, Modulation: Multimode, Dynamic IP
WAN2		Ethernet	IP Address: 172.16.3.229, Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0, Gateway IP: 172.16.3.4

6.5 Problems for 3G Network Connection

When you have trouble in using 3G network transmission, please check the following:

Check if USB LED lights on or off

You have to wait about 15 seconds after inserting 3G USB Modem into your Vigor2820. Later, the USB LED will light on which means the installation of USB Modem is successful. If the USB LED does not light on, please remove and reinsert the modem again. If it still fails, restart Vigor2820.

USB LED lights on but the network connection does not work

Check the PIN Code of SIM card is disabled or not. Please use the utility of 3G USB Modem to disable PIN code and try again. If it still fails, it might be the compliance problem of system. Please open DrayTek Syslog Tool to capture the connection information (WAN Log) and send the page (similar to the following graphic) to the service center of DrayTek.

DrayTek Syslog Controls 192.168.1.1 DrayTek Vigor 2820 LAN Status TX Packets RX Packets 6442 3807 WAN Status Getway IP (Static) TX Packets RX Rate --- 0 0 WAN IP (Static) RX Packets TX Rate --- 0 0 Fire Wall Log VPN Log User Access Log Call Log WAN Log Network Information Net State Time Host Message Apr 12 09:17:49 Vigor WAN2 PPPoE <= Protocol:LCP(c021) ConfReq Identifier:0x03 ACCM: 0x0 Authe: Apr 12 09:17:49 Vigor [3G]Modem status:a1 20 00 00 00 00 02 00 03 00 Apr 12 09:17:49 Vigor WAN2 PPPoE => Protocol:LCP(c021) ConfReq Identifier:0x00 MRU: 1500 ACCM Apr 12 09:17:49 Vigor WAN2 PPPoE <= V:1 T:1 PADS ID:0 Apr 12 09:17:49 Vigor [3G]Modem response: CONNECT 3600000 Apr 12 09:17:49 Vigor [3G]Modem status:a1 20 00 00 00 00 02 00 02 00 Apr 12 09:17:49 Vigor [3G]Modem status:a1 20 00 00 00 00 02 00 02 00 Apr 12 09:17:49 Vigor [3G]Modem dial ATDT*99# Apr 12 09:17:49 Vigor WAN2 PPPoE => V:1 T:1 PADR ID:0 Apr 12 09:17:49 Vigor WAN2 PPPoE <= V:1 T:1 PADO ID:0 Apr 12 09:17:49 Vigor [3G]Modem response: OK Apr 12 09:17:49 Vigor [3G]Modem initialize AT&FE0V1X1&D2&C1S0=0 Apr 12 09:17:49 Vigor WAN2 PPPoE => V:1 T:1 PADI ID:0 ADSL Status Mode State Up Speed Down Speed SNR Margin Loop Att

Transmission Rate is not fast enough

Please connect your Notebook with 3G USB Modem to test the connection speed to verify if the problem is caused by VigorIPPBX 2820. In addition, please refer to the manual of 3G USB Modem for LED Status to make sure if the modem connects to Internet via HSDPA mode. If you want to use the modem indoors, please put it on the place near the window to obtain better signal receiving.

6.6 Backing to Factory Default Setting If Necessary

Sometimes, a wrong connection can be improved by returning to the default settings. Try to reset the router by software or hardware.

Warning: After pressing factory default setting, you will loose all settings you did before. Make sure you have recorded all useful settings before you pressing. The password of factory default is null.

Software Reset

You can reset the router to factory default via Web page.

Go to System Maintenance and choose Reboot System on the web page. The following screen will appear. Choose Using factory default configuration and click OK. After few seconds, the router will return all the settings to the factory settings.

System Maintenance >> Reboot System

Reboot System

Do you want to reboot your router?

Using current configuration
○ Using factory default configuration

OK

Hardware Reset

While the router is running (ACT LED blinking), press the Factory Reset button and hold for more than 5 seconds. When you see the ACT LED blinks rapidly, please release the button. Then, the router will restart with the default configuration.

Factory Reset Factory Reset ACT VPN Line USB DSL Phone CSM WAN2 Go5 ISDN1 ISDN2 Phone

After restore the factory default setting, you can configure the settings for the router again to fit your personal request.

6.7 Contacting Your Dealer

If the router still cannot work correctly after trying many efforts, please contact your dealer for further help right away. For any questions, please feel free to send e-mail to [e-mail].

Appendix: Hardware

Specifications

	Operating : 0°C ~ 45°C Temperature
	Storage : -25°C ~ 70°C
Humidity 10% ~ 90% (non-condensing)
Max. Power Consumption 10 Watt
Dimension L241 * W165 * H44 (mm)
Power DC 12V ~ 15V